JP2022031506A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine that can grasp information on a game.

SOLUTION: A game machine of the present invention stores acquired determination information as reservation memory, and displays reservation display according to the number of reservation memories on a special symbol reservation first display, a special symbol reservation second display, and a first image display device. In addition, when the power is restored and the reservation display is restarted, the restart timing of the special symbol reservation first display and the special symbol reservation second display is earlier than the restart timing of the first image display device. After displaying an image related to the restoration on the first image display device, the reservation display is restarted.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 74

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In a conventional gaming machine, a random number for drawing whether or not to win a special game is stored as a hold when a game ball enters the start area, and when a preset start condition is satisfied, the hold is read out. A lottery for a special game is performed, and when the special game is won by the lottery for the special game, the special game is executed. Furthermore, based on the lottery result of the special game, the effect image composed of various moving images and still images is displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect device is moved to excite the player's game. Has become the mainstream (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Further, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 displays information about the game in the effect display unit in order to notify the player of the information about the game.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-208143

By the way, in recent gaming machines, the effect equipment device has become large, and when it is movable, it may cover the effect display unit and it may be difficult to visually recognize the information about the game. In these cases, the player can obtain the information about the game. There was a problem that it was difficult to grasp.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information about a game in view of the above background.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention has a starting area provided in a game area where a game ball can flow down in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, and the starting area. A storage means (main control board) that stores the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by entering the ball as a hold storage, and a determination means that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. And a display means (main control board, effect control board) for displaying hold information according to the number of hold storages, the display means is a first display means (special symbol) having a first hold display area. The hold information is visually recognized by the hold first display), the second display means having the second hold display area (special symbol hold second display), the first hold display area, and the second hold display area. When the power to the gaming machine is cut off, the holding information is displayed in any of the holding display areas, including a third display means (first image display device) having a third holding display area that is easy to facilitate. When the power to the gaming machine is restored, the display of the hold information is resumed in any of the hold display areas, and when the display of the hold information is restarted, the hold display area is used. The timing for resuming the display of the reserved information in the first reserved display area and the timing for resuming the display of the reserved information in the second reserved display area are earlier than the timing for resuming the display of the reserved information, and the third The display means is characterized in that when the power supply to the gaming machine is restored, the image related to the restoration is displayed, and then the display of the pending information in the third reserved display area can be resumed. And.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to grasp information about the gaming.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the perspective view of the gaming machine in the state which the glass frame is opened. It is a figure which shows an example of the perspective view of the back side of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the image displayed in the display area of the 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot determination table of a jackpot lottery. It is a figure which shows an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a jackpot game control table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big winning opening opening / closing control table of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the big winning opening opening / closing control table of a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state setting table at the end of a big hit game. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol for a 1st start port. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol for a 2nd start port. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table of the jackpot lottery for a 1st start opening. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary determination table of the jackpot lottery for a 2nd start opening. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a hit determination table for ordinary symbols, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a stop symbol determination table for ordinary symbols, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table for ordinary symbols. , (D) is a diagram showing an example of an opening mode determination table for the second starting port. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol reservation storage area of the main RAM 101c, (b) is a diagram showing an example of each storage unit of the special symbol reservation storage area, and (c) is a diagram showing an example of each storage unit of the special symbol reservation storage area. The figure which shows an example, (d) is a figure which shows an example of each storage part of a normal symbol hold storage area. It is a figure which shows the main processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd start port detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the gate detection switch input process in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol memory determination processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure variation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special symbol stop processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the jackpot game end processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the general control process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the ordinary symbol variation processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the auxiliary game processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the data creation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the output control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the type of the command transmitted from the main control board to the effect control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the timer interrupt processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the first half of the effect control unit command analysis processing in the effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the latter half of the effect control unit command analysis processing in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the special figure hold memory update process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the variation effect pattern determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode 1. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for effect mode 2. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation effect pattern determination table for the 2nd start port. It is a figure which shows the advance notice effect determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice type determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol notice mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the advance notice pattern of the symbol advance notice effect, and the effect example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the notice pattern of the design notice effect and the effect example 2. It is a figure which shows an example of the music notice mode determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows an example of the music notice mode determination table for a big hit. It is a figure which shows the effect example 1 displayed in the music notice pattern and the image display part. It is a figure which shows the effect example 2 displayed in the music notice pattern and the image display part. It is a figure which shows the effect example 3 displayed in the music notice pattern and the image display part. It is a figure which shows the effect example 4 displayed in the music notice pattern and the image display part. It is a figure which shows the effect example 5 displayed in the music notice pattern and the image display part. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice mode determination table for loss, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice mode determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the effect example 1 displayed in the step-up notice pattern and the image display part. It is a figure which shows the step-up notice pattern and the effect example 2 displayed on the image display part. It is a figure which shows the step-up notice pattern and the effect example 3 displayed on the image display part. It is a figure which shows the jackpot effect pattern determination process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the data creation process in an effect control unit. It is a figure which shows the data output processing in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the display result which is stopped and displayed as a result of a variable display. It is a figure which shows the display example 1 of the information displayed on the 1st game information display device, the 2nd game information display device, and the 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the display example 2 of the information displayed on the 1st game information display device, the 2nd game information display device, and the 1st image display device. (A) is a diagram showing display example 3 of information displayed on the first game information display device, the second game information display device, and the first image display device, and (b) is the first game information display device and the second. It is a figure which shows the display example 4 of the information displayed on the game information display device and the first image display device. It is a figure which shows the first half of the display example 5 of the information displayed on the 1st game information display device, the 2nd game information display device, and the 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the latter half of the display example 5 of the information displayed on the 1st game information display device, the 2nd game information display device, and the 1st image display device. It is a figure which shows the display example 6 of the information displayed on the 1st game information display device, the 2nd game information display device, and the 1st image display device. It is a front view of the 1st game information display device. It is a rear view of the 1st game information display device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st game information display device. It is sectional drawing of the 1st game information display device in the disassembled state. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st game information display device. It is a front view of the 1st display board. It is a rear view of the 1st display board. It is a rear view of a cover member. It is a schematic diagram which shows the control composition which concerns on the 1st game information display device. It is a front view around the 1st game information display device which concerns on a modification. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the covering member and the identification means. It is a figure which shows the display example of the 1st game information display device. It is a front view of the 1st game information display device which concerns on a modification. It is a rear view of the 1st game information display device which concerns on a modification. It is sectional drawing of the 1st game information display device which concerns on the modification. It is sectional drawing in the disassembled state of the 1st game information display device which concerns on a modification. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st game information display device which concerns on a modification. It is a schematic diagram which shows the control composition which concerns on the 1st game information display device which concerns on the modification. It is a schematic diagram which shows the control composition which concerns on the 1st game information display device which concerns on the modification. It is a perspective view from the front of the 2nd game information display device. It is a perspective view from the back of the 2nd game information display device. It is a front view of the 2nd game information display device and its periphery which concerns on a modification.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 1 in a state where the glass frame is opened in the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the back surface side of the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed in the display area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported by the outer frame 2, and a glass frame 4 rotatably supported by the game board mounting frame 3. A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a through which the game ball flows down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion opens in the front-rear direction, and is a fixing member (for example, a nail, a stopper, etc.) to the island equipment of a game store. ) Is fixed.

The game board mounting frame 3 is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism portion 6 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the first hinge mechanism portion 6 as a fulcrum. Has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 like a door, the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices provided on the back surface side of the game board mounting frame 3 are provided. It is possible to perform maintenance etc.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism portion 7 on one end side in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported with the second hinge mechanism portion 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening (window portion) 8 that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in a substantially central portion near the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) 8a is attached so as to close the opening from the rear. The game area 5a can be visually recognized through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, an audio output device 9 composed of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs), and a game ball paid out from a game ball payout device 100 described later are used. An upper saucer 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as, a lower saucer 12 for receiving and storing a game ball that has flowed into a predetermined ball flow path without being able to fit in the upper saucer 11, and a game ball are fired. A launch operation device 13 capable of the operation for the purpose is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations above the glass frame 4 at intervals, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effect), etc. to produce sound (music, voice). It has become. Further, a plurality of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and the lighting is produced by changing the light irradiation direction and the emission color of each lamp (LED).

The bottom surface of the upper tray 11 is inclined downward from the storage portion 11a of the game ball toward the direction side (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and the ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward inclination. .. When the game balls stored in the storage portion 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

Further, in the portion on the front side of the center of the upper tray 11, an effect button device 16 and a selection button device 18 functioning as input devices for performing a determination operation and a selection operation related to various effects described later are provided side by side. ing.

The effect button device 16 moves the effect button 17 capable of performing operations such as a decision operation, the effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 5) for detecting an operation on the effect button 17, and the effect button 17 in the vertical direction. An effect button drive motor 17b (see FIG. 5) is provided to enable the player to input predetermined information into the game machine 1.

The selection button device 18 is connected to a cross key 19 (see FIG. 5) capable of performing an operation such as a selection operation, and a cross key detection switch 19a for detecting an operation on the cross key 19. (See FIG. 5) is provided so that the player can input predetermined information into the game machine 1.

Further, a lending / returning operation unit 20 capable of lending a game ball and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance is provided in a portion to the right of the upper tray 11. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the game ball is lent out by subtracting the balance of the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine. When the return button (not shown) of the lending / returning operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

An overflow ball flow path (not shown) for guiding a game ball that cannot fit in the upper saucer 11 to the lower saucer 12 is formed between the upper saucer 11 and the lower saucer 12. Further, in the middle of the overflow ball flow path, a saucer full detection switch 32a for detecting that the game ball is full is provided in the lower saucer 12, and the lower saucer 12 is detected by the saucer full detection switch 32a. During that time, the payout of the game ball by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The launch operation device 13 is a touch sensor that detects that the base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, the launch handle 15 rotatably provided on the base 14, and the launch handle 15 are touched by the player's hand. A firing volume 15b (see FIG. 5) including a 15a (see FIG. 5) and a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated to feed the game balls one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting a plate member constituting the game board 5, a game ball launching device 26 for launching a game ball toward the game area 5a, and a game board mounting. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in the closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in a concave chamber shape with a front opening at substantially the center near the upper part of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided in the inner part of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices and the like provided on the back surface side of the game board 5 are provided behind the game machine 1 through this opening. Face.

The game ball launching device 26 includes a launching member 28 for launching a game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 5) for driving the launching member 28, and the launching member 28 toward the lower left portion of the game board. A launch rail 29 that inclines up and down, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a launch position that is the lower end of the incline of the launch rail 29 are provided. Then, when the game ball A sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launch member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting portion 25, and the front end portion of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed to the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame The lock of 4 is released and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, a partition member including a curved inner rail 35 and a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35 is provided, and the partition member provides a substantially circular game. The region 5a is formed. A launch ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 to guide the game ball launched by the game ball launcher 26 to the upstream portion of the game area 5a. Further, a guiding member 37 for guiding the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a is provided in the lower right portion of the game area 5a, and the game ball that has flowed down is played in the most downstream portion of the game area 5a. An out port 39 for guiding to the outside of the area (collection portion of the game board mounting frame 3) is formed.

At the substantially center of the game area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40 that regulates the entry of the game ball into the so-called center case is provided, and an effect space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 for introducing a game ball flowing down the game area 5a into the inside of the decorative frame 40 is provided on the side portion of the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is introduced at the lower portion of the decorative frame 40. A stage portion 42 is provided to roll the game ball and allow it to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the lower part of the game area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning openings 43 capable of constantly winning (winning) a game ball are provided at intervals, and the general winning openings 43 are provided. When a winning (winning) game ball is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see FIG. 5), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out as a ball.

In the left side region (first flow-down region) and the right side region (second flow-down region) of the game area 5a, a normal map gate 44 through which a game ball can pass is provided, respectively, and the game that has passed through the normal flow gate 44. When the sphere is detected by the gate detection switch 44a, a winning lottery for a normal symbol is performed. The winning lottery for ordinary symbols will be described later.

A first starting port 45, which is a lower part of the game area 5a and directly below the stage portion 42, is provided so that a game ball can always win (win), and the first starting port 45 wins (wins). When the game balls are detected by the first start port detection switch 45a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are paid out as prize balls from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery (special game determination) for the first special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Immediately below the first starting port 45, a game ball is impossible or difficult to win (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a winning lottery for a normal symbol). A variable starting portion 46 is provided, which can be converted into an open state (special mode) in which a winning (winning ball) is possible or easy.

The variable starting unit 46 includes a second starting port 47 on which the game ball can win (winning), and a second starting port detection switch 47a for detecting the winning (winning) of the game ball to the second starting port 47. A movable member 48 that converts (variablely) the second starting port 47 into a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b for opening / closing the movable member 48 are provided. Then, when the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the game ball is won (winning). (Entering the ball) is possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball winning (winning) in the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are ejected to the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). ) Is paid out as a prize ball. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a big hit lottery for the second special symbol (identification information) described later is performed.

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the normal gate 44 on the right side, a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won (winning) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a special symbol jackpot lottery). A variable winning section 49 is provided which converts the (basic aspect) into an open state (special aspect) in which a game ball can be won (winning).

The variable winning unit 49 includes a large winning opening 50 in which a game ball can be won (winning), a large winning opening detection switch 50a for detecting a winning (winning) of a game ball in the large winning opening 50, and a large winning opening detection switch 50a. An opening / closing member 51 that converts (variablely) the large winning opening 50 into a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b for opening / closing the opening / closing member 51 are provided. When the large winning opening 50 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult to win the game ball, and when the large winning opening 50 is open, the game ball is won (winning ball). ) Is possible or easy.

Further, when the game balls that have won (winned) in the large winning opening 50 are detected by the large winning opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15) are released from the game ball payout device 100 (see FIG. 3). It is paid out as a prize ball.

A game ball that has passed through the left side region (first flow-down region) of the game area 5a can enter the first start port 45, but the game ball that has passed through the right side region (second flow-down region) of the game area 5a. Is not allowed to enter the ball. On the other hand, the second starting port 47 can enter a game ball that has passed through either the left side region or the right side region of the game area 5a, but the game ball that has passed through the right side region of the game area 5a is entered by the guiding member 37. Since it is guided to the second starting port 47, it is easier to enter the second starting port 47 than the game ball passing through the left region of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the time-saving game state described later, it is better to launch the game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). Further, in the large winning opening 50, a game ball passing through the right side area of the game area 5a can enter, but a game ball passing through the left side area of the game area 5a cannot enter. There is. That is, it is possible to hit the game ball separately from the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the big winning opening 50.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is a collecting flow path (not shown) that accepts and collects the game balls that have won in the general winning opening 43, the first starting opening 45, the second starting opening 47, and the large winning opening 50. A winning confirmation detection switch 52a for detecting a game ball flowing down the collecting flow path is provided at the lower end portion of the collecting flow path. The winning confirmation detection switch 52a detects the game ball again after being detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the large winning opening detection switch 50a. It is used to determine whether or not the prize was appropriate.

In the lower left outside the game area 5a, the first special symbol 1st display 60, the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, the normal symbol 1st display 62, the 1st special symbol holding 1st display 63, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 64, normal symbol hold 1st display 65, round number display 66 displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, jackpot state (special game) Right-handed first display 67 prompting to launch a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) during the state) and during the time-saving game state described later, when the power is restored. The high-probability gaming state display 68, which displays the high-probability gaming state if the game is in the high-probability gaming state, which will be described later, and the time-saving gaming state, which is displayed when the power is restored, indicates that the game is in the short-time gaming state. A first game information display device 59 including a time-saving game state display 69 is provided.

The first special symbol 1st display 60 is variable for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the 1st special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the 1st starting port 45. The second special symbol first display 61 is a display and displays (notifies) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. ), And the normal symbol first display 62 displays (notifies) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the normal symbol gate 44. ) Is a variable display.

In the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, when the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45, the jackpot symbol determination random value is acquired, and the acquired jackpot symbol determination random value and the jackpot determination value are used. It corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing. When the big hit lottery of the first special symbol is performed, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol first display 60, and the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. Is done. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The big hit lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit symbol judgment random value and a big hit judgment value obtained by acquiring a big hit symbol determination random value when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. Corresponds to determine whether or not it is a "big hit" by comparing. When the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol is performed, the second special symbol 1st display 61 displays the variation of the second special symbol, and after a predetermined time elapses, the stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. Is done. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators in the variable display of each special symbol are at predetermined intervals or in order. Flashes with. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, one or a plurality of LEDs are lit in a mode indicating the result of each jackpot lottery (a mode indicating the type of the special symbol). That is, the type of jackpot, which will be described later, can be discriminated by the lighting mode of the LEDs of the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61.

In the present embodiment, the "big hit" means a state in which the right to execute the big hit state (special game state) is acquired in the big hit lottery of the first special symbol or the big hit lottery of the second special symbol. The "big hit state (special game state)" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning opening 50 is opened in a predetermined mode is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

Although the maximum number of open times and the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, a predetermined number of game balls are set in the large winning opening 50 even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls), one round game ends. That is, the "big hit game (special game state)" is an advantageous game state for the player who can easily obtain the prize ball. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpot states (special game states) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

In the normal symbol hit lottery, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the hit symbol determination random value is acquired, and the acquired random symbol determination random value is compared with the hit determination value to obtain a "hit". It corresponds to determining whether or not there is. When the winning lottery of the ordinary symbols is performed, the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbols is performed on the ordinary symbol first display 62, and the stop display of the ordinary symbols indicating the lottery result is performed after a lapse of a predetermined time. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol is a notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol first display 62 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in order in the variable display of the normal symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, one or a plurality of LEDs are turned on in a mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (a mode indicating the type of the normal symbol). That is, it is possible to determine the type of hit, which will be described later, depending on the lighting mode of the LED of the normal symbol first display 62. The normal symbol first display 62 may be composed of one LED.

In addition, in this embodiment, "hit" means a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of ordinary symbols. The "hit state (auxiliary game)" means a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Although the maximum number of times of opening and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the hit state (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 can be used even before the maximum number of opening times and the maximum opening time are reached. When a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) are won (winning), the winning state (auxiliary game) ends. That is, the "hit state (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is easily executed (the start condition is easily satisfied). In this embodiment, a plurality of types of hit states (auxiliary games) having different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol hold first display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The first special symbol jackpot lottery (first special) It is for displaying the number of rights (first hold) for performing (variable display of symbols), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of first hold. In addition, although the first hold is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

When there is one first hold, the LED on the left side of the first special symbol hold 1 indicator 63 lights up, and when there are two first holds, the first special symbol hold 1 display 63 is lit. Two LEDs light up. Further, when the first hold is three, the LED on the left side of the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the first hold is four, the first special The two LEDs of the symbol hold first display 63 blink.

The second special symbol hold first display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is stored when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. The second special symbol jackpot lottery (second special). It is for displaying the number of rights (second hold) for performing (variable display of symbols), and is lit or blinks in a mode indicating the number of second hold. In addition, although the second hold is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

When there is one second hold, the LED on the left side of the second special symbol hold first display 64 lights up, and when there are two second holds, the second special symbol hold first display 64 Two LEDs light up. Further, when the second hold is three, the LED on the left side of the second special symbol hold first display 64 blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the second hold is four, the second special The two LEDs of the symbol hold first display 64 blink.

In the following description, the wording "number of first hold" may be expressed as "first hold number" and the word "number of second hold" may be expressed as "second hold number".

The normal symbol hold first display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and performs a winning lottery (variable display of the normal symbol) of the normal symbol stored when the game ball wins (wins) the normal symbol gate 44. The purpose is to display the number of rights (holding a normal figure), and it lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of holdings of a normal figure. It should be noted that although the maximum number of reserved drawings is stored, it may be less than or more than four.

When there is one normal symbol hold, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold 1st display 65 lights up, and when there are two normal symbol hold, the two LEDs of the normal symbol hold 1 display 65 are lit. Lights up. In addition, when there are three normal symbol hold, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold 1 display 65 blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when there are four normal symbol hold, the normal symbol hold 1st. The two LEDs on the display 65 flash.

In the following description, the phrase "number of reserved figures" may be expressed as "number of pending figures".

The first special symbol first display 60 and / or the second special symbol first display 61 can also be configured by a 7-segment LED. For example, if you win the big hit lottery of a special symbol, "7" will be stopped and displayed, if it is lost, "-" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is in a variable display, it will be turned off and "-". It is good to repeat. Since the start of the variation display of the special symbol is from the state in which the stop result of the previous variation display is displayed, it is easy to understand that the variation display has started by starting from turning off the LED.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs, and is an LED in a predetermined mode indicating the number of rounds at the start of the jackpot game. Starts lighting, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if the number of rounds is 8 jackpot games, only the 4th LED from the left lights up, and if the number of rounds is 15 jackpot games, the 4th to 7th LEDs from the left light up. ..

The right-handed first display 67 is composed of one LED, and launches a game ball toward the right side area of the game area 5a during a big hit state (special game state) and a time-saving game state (so-called right). This is for displaying (right-handed display) prompting (hit), and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and the time-saving game state.
The right-handed first display 67 starts lighting the LED at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game, and continues to light the LED during the jackpot game, regardless of the type of jackpot. When the time-saving game state of transitioning after the end of the game ends, the LED is turned off. In addition, if a big hit is won during the short game state at that time, the LED will continue to light. If the game does not shift to the time-saving game state after the big hit game, the LED is turned off at the end of the big hit game. That is, once the LED of the right-handed first display 67 starts lighting, the LED continues to light until the game state (special game state, time-saving game state) in which the right-handed first indicator 67 should be turned on ends.

The high-probability gaming state display 68 is composed of one LED and is for displaying that the high-probability gaming state is in the state when the power is restored, and the high-probability gaming state is displayed when the power is restored. If so, the LED lights up (so-called morning lamp).
The high-probability gaming status indicator 68 starts lighting the LED if the gaming state when the power is restored is the high-probability gaming state, and continues to display the LED lighting during the high-probability gaming state. When the high-probability gaming state ends, the LED is turned off.

The time-saving game status display 69 is composed of one LED and is for displaying that the time-saving game state is reached when the power is restored. The LED lights up (so-called morning lamp).
The time-saving game status indicator 69 starts lighting the LED if the gaming state when the power is restored is the time-saving gaming state, and continues to light the LED during the time-saving gaming state. Turns off the LED when is finished.

On the lower left game board 5 inside the game area 5a, the first special symbol second display 80, the second special symbol second display 81, the normal symbol second display 82, and the first special symbol hold first. 2 Display 83, 2nd special symbol hold 2nd display 84, normal symbol hold 2nd display 85, and right to urge to shoot a game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed). A second game information display device 79 including a hit second display device 87 is provided.

The second game information display device 79 has a first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display), which will be described later, as compared with the first game information display device 59 provided outside the game area 5a. ) Is provided. As described above, the second game information display device 79 is provided in the vicinity of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) as compared with the first game information display device 59. The position is conspicuous to the player, and the second game information display device 79 is easier to recognize than the first game information display device 59.
Further, the upper portion of the second game information display device 79 provided in the game area 5a also serves as a passage path for the game ball flowing down the game area 5a. As described above, by providing the second game information display device 79 at a position forming the passage path of the game ball, the space is effectively utilized and the position is easily recognized by the player.

The first special symbol second display 80 is variable for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. The second special symbol second display 81 is a display and displays (notifies) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. ), And the normal symbol second display 82 displays (notifies) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball wins (wins) at the normal symbol gate 44. ) Is a variable display.

The first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is each composed of one LED, and the LEDs of the corresponding indicators blink at predetermined intervals in the variable display of each special symbol. Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on in a mode (big hit mode or loss mode) indicating the result of each jackpot lottery. The display of the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is the first effect displayed in the left side area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 to be described later. Since it is the fourth effect symbol following the symbol, the second effect symbol displayed in the center area, and the third effect symbol displayed in the right area, it may be called the fourth effect symbol.

Here, the first special symbol second display 80 will be described in detail. It will be described later based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the first special symbol is started and the special symbol variation display data is set. The display control data is created in step S1500, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. Based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the symbol variation display is stopped and the special symbol stop display data is set, in step S1500 described later. The display control data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the fluctuation (blinking) of the first special symbol second display 80 is stopped (turned on or off).

The display mode of the first special symbol second display 80 is as follows.
(1) With the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the LED of the first special symbol second display 80 starts blinking, and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the LED of the first special symbol second display 80 Continues to blink.
(2) When the first special symbol is stopped when the jackpot lottery is won (big hit), the LED of the first special symbol second display 80 lights up, and the next variable display is started after the jackpot game is completed. Until then, the LED of the first special symbol second display 80 continues to be lit.
(3) When the special symbol is stopped when the jackpot lottery is lost, the LED of the 1st special symbol 2nd display 80 is turned off, and the 1st special symbol 2nd until the next variable display is started. The LED of the display 80 continues to be turned off.

The timing of the fluctuation start and the timing of the fluctuation stop of the first special symbol 2nd display 80 are the fluctuation start of the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, which will be described later. It is synchronized with the timing and the fluctuation stop timing.

In addition, whether the 1st special symbol 2nd display 80 and the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81 display the variation display corresponding to the 1st special symbol or the variation display corresponding to the 2nd special symbol. Since the display timing, display mode, and the like are the same, the description of the second special symbol second display 81 will be omitted. The timing of the change start and the timing of the change stop of the second special symbol 2 display 81 are the change start of the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, which will be described later. It is synchronized with the timing and the fluctuation stop timing.

The 1st special symbol 2nd display 80 and / or the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81 only indicate whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot as a result of the jackpot lottery when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. , The first special symbol 1st display 60 or the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61 may be composed of a plurality of LEDs, and the type of the special symbol may also be displayed as a result of the jackpot lottery.

The normal symbol second display 82 is composed of one LED, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals in the variation display of the normal symbol. Then, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the LED is turned on or off in a mode (winning mode or losing mode) indicating the result of the winning lottery.

Specifically, when the normal symbol variation display is started, the effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the normal symbol variation display data is set. Based on this, the display control data is created in step S1500, which will be described later, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later. The effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the display control is performed in step S1500 described later based on the setting of the normal symbol stop display data. The data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the fluctuation (blinking) of the normal symbol second display 82 is stopped (turned on or off).

The display mode of the normal symbol second display 82 is as follows.
(1) With the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the LED of the normal symbol second display 82 starts blinking, and during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the LED of the normal symbol second display 82 continues blinking.
(2) When the normal symbol is stopped when the winning lottery is won (winning), the LED of the normal symbol 2nd display 82 lights up, and the normal symbol No. 1 until the next variable display is started after the winning game is completed. 2 The LED of the display 82 continues to light.
(3) When the normal symbol is stopped when the lottery is lost, the LED of the normal symbol 2 display 82 is turned off, and the normal symbol 2 display 82 is turned off until the next variable display is started. The LED keeps turning off.

In addition, when the normal symbol second display 82 stops and displays the normal symbol, it only displays whether or not it is a hit as a result of the winning lottery, but like the normal symbol first display 62, a plurality of LEDs. As a result of the jackpot lottery, the type of normal symbol may also be displayed.

The first special symbol holding second display 83 is composed of a plurality of LEDs like the first special symbol holding first display 63 described above, and when a game ball wins (wins) in the first starting port 45. It is for displaying the number of rights (first hold) for performing the jackpot lottery (variable display of the first special symbol) of the first special symbol stored in, and is an embodiment showing the number of the first hold. Lights or flashes. In addition, although the first hold is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

Specifically, it is based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the first hold number increases or decreases, and the first special symbol hold display data is set. The display control data is created in step S1500 described later, and the created display control data is output in step S1600 described later to display (light, blink or turn off) the first special symbol hold second display 83. Is done.

When there is one first hold, the LED on the left side of the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 lights up, and when there are two first holds, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 is lit. Two LEDs light up. Further, when the first hold is three, the LED on the left side of the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when the first hold is four, the first special The two LEDs of the symbol hold second display 83 blink.
Further, the display (lighting, blinking) timing and the erasing (off) timing of the first special symbol holding second display 83 are the first holding icons H11 to displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, which will be described later. It is synchronized with the display timing and the erasure timing of H14, and is synchronized with the numerical value change timing of the first hold number display of the first hold number display area SH1 described later.

The second special symbol holding second display 84 is composed of a plurality of LEDs like the above-mentioned second special symbol holding first display 64, and when a game ball wins (wins) in the second starting port 47. It is for displaying the number of rights (second hold) for performing the jackpot lottery (variable display of the second special symbol) of the second special symbol stored in, and is an embodiment showing the number of the second hold. Lights or flashes. In addition, although the second hold is stored up to four, it may be less than or more than four.

Specifically, it is based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of the second hold increases or decreases, and the second special symbol hold display data is set. The display control data is created in step S1500 described later, and the created display control data is output in step S1600 described later to display (light, blink or turn off) the second special symbol hold second display 84. Is done.

When there is one second hold, the LED on the left side of the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 lights up, and when there are two second holds, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 is lit. Two LEDs light up. Further, when there are three second holds, the LED on the left side of the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when there are four second holds, the second special The two LEDs of the symbol hold second display 84 blink.
Further, the display (lighting, blinking) timing and the erasing (off) timing of the second special symbol holding second display 84 are the second holding icons H21 to displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 described later. It is synchronized with the display timing and the erasure timing of H24, and is synchronized with the numerical change timing of the second hold number display displayed in the second hold number display area SH2 described later.

The normal symbol hold second display 85 is composed of a plurality of LEDs like the above-mentioned normal symbol first display, and is a normal symbol stored when a game ball wins (wins) at the normal symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of rights (holding a normal figure) for performing a winning lottery (variable display of a normal symbol), and lights or blinks in a manner indicating the number of holdings of a normal figure. It should be noted that although the maximum number of reserved drawings is stored, it may be less than or more than four.

Specifically, it will be described later based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives the normal symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the number of normal symbol hold increases or decreases, and the normal symbol hold display data is set. The display control data is created in step S1500, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the normal symbol hold second display 85 is displayed (lit, blinked, or turned off).

When there is one normal symbol hold, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 lights up, and when there are two normal symbol hold, the two LEDs of the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 are lit. Lights up. Further, when there are three normal symbol hold, the LED on the left side of the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 blinks and the LED on the right side lights up, and when there are four normal symbol hold, the normal symbol hold second indicator blinks. The two LEDs on the display 85 flash.

The right-handed second display 87 is composed of one LED like the above-mentioned right-handed first display 67, and is a right-hand region of the game area 5a in the jackpot state (special game state) and the time-saving game state. The purpose is to display (right-handed display) to encourage the firing of the game ball toward (so-called right-handed), and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the short-time game state. ..

Specifically, it will be described later based on the fact that the effect control board 130 receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the jackpot game (opening) is started and the right-handed display data is set. The display control data is created in step S1500, and the created display control data is output in step S1600 described later, so that the display (lighting) of the right-handed second display 87 is started and the gaming state is changed. If the effect control board 130 receives the game state specification command sometimes transmitted from the main control board 110 and the game state is not the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state, the right-handed erasure data is set, and in step S1500 described later. The display control data is created, and the created display control data is output in step S1600, which will be described later, so that the display (lighting) of the right-handed second display 87 ends (turns off).

The right-handed second display 87 starts lighting the LED at the start of the opening effect in the jackpot game, and continues to light the LED during the jackpot game, regardless of the type of jackpot. When the time-saving game state of transitioning after the end of the game ends, the LED is turned off. In addition, if a big hit is won during the short game state at that time, the LED will continue to light. If the game does not shift to the time-saving game state after the big hit game, the LED is turned off at the end of the big hit game. That is, once the LED of the right-handed first indicator 67 starts lighting, it continues to light until the game state (special game state, time-saving game state) in which the right-handed first indicator 67 should be turned on ends.
The lighting timing of the right-handed second display 87 is synchronized with the display timing of the image G10 “right-handed →→” display displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, which will be described later.
Further, the right-handed second display 87 is marked as “right-handed” as shown in FIG. 1, and the player recognizes the right-handed display as compared with the right-handed first display 67 in which nothing is written. It is an easy-to-use mode.

A first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 made of a liquid crystal display is provided in the back of the effect space 40a, and a second image display device (sub liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display is provided in the lower part of the effect space 40a. 71 is provided, and a movable effect member 73 that imitates the face of a character is provided in the upper part of the effect space 40a.

The first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 perform various effect displays according to the progress of the game. Examples of the effect display include a customer waiting demo effect that is executed when the special symbol variation display is not performed, a variation display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed when the special symbol variation display is performed, and the like. It is also possible to read the effect symbol as the identification information.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is formed with an effect symbol display area including a left side area, a center area, and a right side area, and the effect symbol display area is formed. By scrolling the displayed effect symbol 70a (first effect symbol, second effect symbol, third effect symbol) in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect symbol 70a is variablely displayed.

The effect symbol 70a is composed of, for example, a symbol indicating a number from "1" to "9", and is executed by the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61. The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is performed corresponding to the variation display of the symbol. That is, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is stopped in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. As the effect symbol 70a, a symbol indicating an alphabet such as "A" to "F" may be provided in addition to the symbol indicating a number.

Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the special symbol is started, and determines based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command. The variation effect pattern designation command is set, and in the data output process of step S1600 described later, the variation effect symbol 70a is displayed by being output by the image control unit 140.

In the stop display of the effect symbol 70a, the effect symbol 70a is stopped for a predetermined time in a predetermined mode (missing mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same effect symbols such as "777" or a combination of regular effect symbols such as "753", and the loss mode is another mode. be. The mode of variable display of the effect symbol 70a is not limited to this, and may be scrolling in the left-right direction or rotating (rotating) on the spot.

Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, the stop designation command is set, and the data in step S1600 described later. In the output process, the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed by being transmitted to the image control unit 140.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, and the like are displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display device according to the result of the jackpot lottery. By displaying it on the 71 (sub-liquid crystal display), the player's expectation for the occurrence of a big hit (special game state) is increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 has a first number corresponding to the number of first special symbol hold (U1), which is the current number of first hold. The first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 for displaying the hold icons H11 to H14, and the second hold icons H21 to the number corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) which is the current number of second holds. The second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4 for displaying H24 and the variable icon display for displaying the variable icon TH corresponding to (related) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed. Region 70D is formed.

The first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 are partitioned from the side closer to the variable icon display area 70D in the form of a first display unit 70B1, a second display unit 70B2, a third display unit 70B3, a fourth display unit 70B4, and the like. The first holding icons H11 to H14 corresponding to the first special symbol holding number (U1) are displayed on the display units 70B1 to 70B4. That is, the number of the first hold icons H11 to H14 also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of the first special symbol hold (U1).

The first display unit 70B1 displays the first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70B2 secondly displays the first special symbol. The first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold on which the variation display of the above is executed is displayed, and the third display unit 70B3 shows the first hold on which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed third. The hold icon H13 is displayed, and the fourth display unit 70B4 displays the first hold icon H14 indicating the first hold in which the variation display of the first special symbol is executed fourth.

Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the first start winning prize designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game ball wins in the first start opening 45, and is based on the first start prize designation command. The determined hold icon display designation command is set, and the first hold icons H11 to H14 are newly displayed by being output by the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later. Further, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure fluctuation pattern transmitted at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the hold icon change designation command is set, and in the data output process of step S1600 described later, the image control unit 140 By being output, the display of the first hold icons H11 to H14 is updated and displayed.

The second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 are partitioned from the side closer to the variable icon display area 70D in the form of a first display unit 70C1, a second display unit 70C2, a third display unit 70C3, and a fourth display unit 70C4. The second hold icons H21 to H22 corresponding to the second special symbol hold number (U2) are displayed on the display units 70C1 to 70C4. That is, the number of the second hold icons H21 to H24 also increases or decreases in accordance with the increase or decrease in the number of the second special symbol hold (U2).

The first display unit 70C1 displays the second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold on which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, and the second display unit 70C2 secondly displays the second special symbol. The second hold icon H22 indicating the second hold on which the variation display of the second is executed is displayed, and the third display unit 70C3 shows the second hold on which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed third. The hold icon H23 is displayed, and the second hold icon H24 indicating the second hold on which the variation display of the second special symbol is executed is displayed on the fourth display unit 70C4.

Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the second start winning prize designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the game ball wins in the second start opening 47, and is based on the second start prize designation command. The determined hold icon display designation command is set, and the second hold icons H21 to H24 are newly displayed by being output by the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later. Further, the effect control board 130 receives the special figure fluctuation pattern transmitted at the start of the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the hold icon change designation command is set, and in the data output process of step S1600 described later, the image control unit 140 By being output, the display of the second hold icons H21 to H24 is updated and displayed.

The variable icon display area 70D is the first hold icon H11 or the second hold icon H11 or the second hold displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display area corresponding to the start of the change display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). When the second hold icon H21 displayed on the first display unit 70C1 of the icon display area moves (shifts), the variable icon TH is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). The variable icon TH disappears (erases). The variation icon TH may be extinguished in the middle of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a).

Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol fluctuation pattern transmitted at the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the hold icon change designation command is set, and the data output in step S1600 described later is performed. In the process, the variation icon TH is displayed by being output by the image control unit 140.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 has a first special symbol display area DZ1 for variablely displaying the first special symbol (first specific identification information). , The second special symbol display area DZ2 for variable display of the second special symbol (second specific identification information) and the first reserved number for simply displaying the first special symbol reservation number (U1) with arithmetic numbers. A display area SH1 and a second reserved number display area SH2 for simply displaying the second special symbol reserved number (U2) with arithmetic numbers are formed. The first special symbol and the second special symbol may be referred to as a fourth symbol as in the case of the first special symbol second display 80 and the second special symbol second display 81. That is, there are two fourth symbols, the first special symbol second display 80, the second special symbol second display 81, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol.

In the first special symbol display area DZ1, the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped in response to the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol. Fluctuation display is stopped.

Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the special symbol variation display is started, and the special symbol variation display specification command is set, which will be described later. In the data output process of step S1600, the first special symbol is variablely displayed by being output by the image control unit 140, and is transmitted from the main control board 110 when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. The effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the stop designation command is set, and is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later, so that the stop display of the first special symbol is performed. Will be. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the execution state of the variable display of the first special symbol is changed according to the variable state of the first special symbol. Is notified (suggested) to.

In the second special symbol display area DZ2, the variation display of the second special symbol is started in response to the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, and the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped in response to the stop of the variation display of the second special symbol. Fluctuation display is stopped.

Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol variation pattern specification command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the special symbol variation display is started, and the special symbol variation display specification command is set, which will be described later. In the data output process of step S1600, the image control unit 140 outputs the data to display the variation of the second special symbol, and when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, the data is transmitted from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command, the stop designation command is set, and is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600 described later, so that the stop display of the second special symbol is performed. Will be. That is, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed in response to the variation display of the second special symbol, and the execution state of the variation display of the second special symbol is changed according to the variation state of the second special symbol. Is notified (suggested) to.

The first special symbol (first specific identification information) and the second special symbol (second specific identification information) are composed of, for example, a "○" symbol indicating a jackpot mode and an "x" symbol indicating a lost mode, and vary. During the display, the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are displayed in sequence, and when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode, the stop display is displayed with the "○" symbol. When the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, it is stopped and displayed as an "x" symbol. In addition, the stopped and displayed symbol continues to be displayed until the next special symbol change starts.
In FIGS. 69 to 74, which will be described later, when the special symbol (first special symbol (first specific identification information), second special symbol (second specific identification information)) is being displayed in a variable manner, "-" is displayed for convenience. ”Indicates that it is fluctuating.

In the first reserved number display area SH1, arithmetic numbers from "0" to "4" indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) are displayed, and the first special symbol reserved number (U1) is displayed. ) Is increased or decreased, and the displayed arithmetic number changes.

In the second reserved number display area SH2, arithmetic numbers from "0" to "4" indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2) are displayed, and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) is displayed. ) Is increased or decreased, and the displayed arithmetic number changes.

The first hold number display area SH1, the second hold number display area SH2, and the arithmetic numbers displayed in those areas are larger than the hold icon and the change icon, but the hold icon and the change. The icon may be smaller than the hold icon or the variable icon so that it is easier to see (conspicuous). In addition, the special symbol hold 1st display 63, 64 and the special symbol hold are different so that they are easier to see than the LEDs of the special symbol hold 1st display 63, 64 and the special symbol hold 2 display 83, 84. It may be smaller or larger than the LEDs of the second indicators 83 and 84.

Specifically, the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol storage designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 when the first hold number or the second hold number increases or decreases, and the special symbol hold number display designation command is set. Then, in the data output process of step S1600 described later, the hold is displayed in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) by being output by the image control unit 140. The number (first hold number, second hold number) display is updated and displayed.

In this embodiment, the hold icon (first hold icon H11 to H14, second hold icon H21 to H24), the variable icon TH, and the number of holds are displayed on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 (first hold icons H11 to H14, second hold icons H21 to H24). The first hold number display, the second hold number display), and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed, but they are displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal display). You may do so.

The movable effect member 73 can produce a light emission effect by emitting light by a panel lighting device 74 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs and the like), and the panel drive device 75 composed of a solenoid, a motor, or the like. It is possible to perform a movement effect by moving in the vertical direction.

Specifically, during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a executed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, it emits light with a predetermined emission color, or the effect position is located below the standby position located above. By moving to, you can create a light emission effect or move effect. It should be noted that the effect may be configured to perform a light emission effect or a movement effect by operating the effect button 17.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, a main control device 110A having a built-in main control board 110 that comprehensively controls the progress of the game, and a game ball according to a payout control command from the main control board 110. A payout control device 120A having a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100, and an effect control device 130A having a built-in effect control board 130 that controls the effect according to an effect control command from the main control board 110. A power supply device 180A having a built-in power supply board 180 for supplying power supply voltage to various control devices, and a game information output terminal board 90 for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the game machine are provided.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention.

The main control board 110 comprehensively controls the progress (basic operation) of the game. The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores a game control program, and a main control one-chip microcomputer 110m having a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an input for main control. It is equipped with a port and an output port. The main CPU 110a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c to control the controlled device or the result of the arithmetic processing. A predetermined command based on the above is transmitted to the payout control board 120, the effect control board 130, and the like.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130 is the main control board. The command (data) can be communicated in only one direction from the 110 to the effect control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 has a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a large winning opening detection switch 50a, and a winning confirmation detection switch 52a. , Magnetic detection switch 53a, radio wave detection switch 54a, payout control board 120 and the like are connected. Detection signals and the like from various detection switches are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, and control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output port of the main control board 110 has a second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol first display 60, a second special symbol first display 61, and a normal symbol first display. Instrument 62, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 63, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 64, normal symbol hold 1st display 65, round number display 66, right-handed 1st display 67, high probability A game status display 68, a time-saving game status display 69, and a game information output terminal board 90 are connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and game information to be notified to the outside of the game machine (hall computer, etc.) from the game information output terminal board via the output port, etc. Is output.

The payout control board 120 controls the payout of the game ball based on the reception of the payout control command from the main control board 110, and also controls the launch of the game ball. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of the game ball, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the game ball launcher 26 to control the launch of the game ball.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs arithmetic processing, a payout ROM 121b in which a payout program and the like are stored, a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an input port and an output port for payout control, and the like. The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads out a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs arithmetic processing related to payout of the game ball while utilizing the payout RAM 121c, thereby performing a game ball payout device 100. Is controlled, and a predetermined command based on the result of arithmetic processing is transmitted to the main control board 110, the effect control board 130, and the like.

An open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and the like are connected to the input port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 inputs an openness detection signal indicating that the glass frame 4 is open from the openness detection switch 31a, the payout control unit 121 transmits an error designation command for opening the frame to the effect control board 130 to transmit the openness detection signal. When the input is stopped, the frame opening error release designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives the frame opening error designation command, the opening error notification is performed, and when the frame opening error release designation command is received, the opening error notification ends.

A payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121. When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, the payout control unit 121 drives the payout motor 100b to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and the payout ball detection switch 100a pays out a predetermined number of game balls. When it is detected, the control to pay out the game ball is terminated.

The launch control unit 122 includes a control circuit (not shown), an input port, an output port, and the like. A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to the input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feed solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, and the like are connected to the output port of the firing control unit 122.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 by the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the launch solenoid 28b to be energized and detects it from the launch volume 15b. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 has changed due to the signal, the launch solenoid 28b is driven so as to have the launch intensity according to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 to launch the game ball. There is.

The launching solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates to launch the game ball A. .. Since the operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to about 99.9 (times / minute) from the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, the launch of the game ball in one minute. The number is about 99.9 (pieces / minute). That is, the game ball is fired about every 0.6 seconds.

The effect control board 130 controls the effect related to the game by receiving a command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub ROM 130b that stores an effect control program, an effect control unit 130m that includes a sub RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a first image display device (main liquid crystal display). ) 70, an image control unit 140 that controls a second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, a sound control unit 150 that controls an audio output device (speaker) 9, a frame lighting device 10 and a panel lighting device 74. It includes a lamp control unit 160, a drive control unit 170 that controls an effect button drive motor 17b, a panel drive device 75, an input port and an output port for effect control, and the like.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the production while utilizing the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby receiving a command received from the main control board 110. And effect button Various effects are executed on various control units (image control unit 140, sound control unit 150, lamp control unit 160, drive control unit 170) according to the input signal from the cross key detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a. Control to make it output (output data and commands).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, and the like are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. On the effect control board 130, an effect button detection signal indicating that the effect button 17 has been operated is input from the effect button detection switch 17a, or a cross key detection indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated from the effect key detection switch 19a is detected. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

In the output port of the effect control board 130, the first special symbol second display 80, the second special symbol second display 81, the normal symbol second display 82, the first special symbol hold second display 83, and the first 2 The special symbol hold second indicator 84, the normal symbol hold second indicator 85, and the right-handed second indicator 87 are connected. Display control signals for controlling various indicators are output via the output port.

The image control unit 140 controls to display a predetermined image on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 in response to a command from the effect control unit 130m. The image control unit 140 is a drawing composed of a display control CPU 140a for performing arithmetic processing, a display control ROM 140b in which a display control program is stored, a display control RAM 140c serving as a work area during arithmetic processing, and VDP (Video Display Processor) as an image processor. It includes a control unit 141, a CGROM 142 in which image data and the like are stored, a VRAM 143 having a frame buffer and the like for temporarily storing drawing data generated from the image data, an output port, and the like.

The display control CPU 140a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the display control ROM 140b, and utilizes the display control RAM 140c to display the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display device. Control is performed to display an image on the (sub liquid crystal display) 71.

The display control ROM 140b is composed of a mask ROM, and is a display control program for displaying an image, a display list generation program for generating a display list, an animation pattern for displaying an animation of an effect pattern, and animation scene information. Etc. are remembered.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying an animation constituting a specific content of an effect by an image, and the animation pattern is associated with animation scene information, a display order of each animation scene, and the like. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), drawing method. , The duty ratio which is a parameter of the brightness of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is included.

The drawing control unit (VDP) 141 is connected to the CGROM 142 in which the image data is stored, and generates drawing data that is the source of the video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the command from the display control CPU 140a and the image data. do. The image data is an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, for example, an effect symbol image, a landscape image constituting the background of the effect symbol, and a character. Material data representing individual images such as images and dialogue images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame composed of composite (superimposed) individual images.

The CGROM 142 is composed of a flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie) or the like consisting of a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels). ing. The pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. The CGROM 142 is read out in units of image data by the drawing control unit (VDP) 141, and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 142 stores the palette data in which the color number information for designating the color number and the display color information for actually displaying the color are associated with each other without compression. The CGROM 142 may be configured to compress only a part of the image data without compressing all the image data.
Further, as the movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 143 is composed of an SRAM having a high speed of writing or reading image data. The VRAM 143 is a frame buffer corresponding to a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the display control CPU 140a, a first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and a second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. It has an area and the like.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying an image, and further has a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched between the "drawing frame buffer" and the "display frame buffer" at each start of drawing.

Therefore, the drawing control unit (VDP) 141 draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 142 in the "drawing frame buffer" of the frame buffer area of the VRAM 143 based on the instruction (display list) from the display control CPU 140a, and draws a frame. Drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the buffer area, video signals (LVDS signals, RGB signals, etc.) are generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second It is output to an image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 to display various images.

An operating clock is supplied to the drawing control unit (VDP) 141 from the crystal oscillator, and by dividing the operating clock, the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display device ( A synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal / vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the sub liquid crystal) 71 is generated and output to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71.

Further, between the image control unit 140 and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, a general-purpose board 72 that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs the data. Is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function for converting into an image format corresponding to the performance of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 for displaying image data, for example. , Absorbs the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch liquid crystal display device of SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) is connected and when a 17-inch liquid crystal display device of XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) is connected. ..

The sound control unit 150 is connected to the voice output device 9, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image are based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m. Control is performed to output audio data, music data, and the like from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display of the display device (sub liquid crystal) 71.

The lamp control unit 160 is connected to the frame lighting device 10 and the panel lighting device 74, and is based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m (sub CPU 130a) to illuminate the frame. The light emission effect is performed by performing lighting control such as turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs of the device 10 and the panel lighting device 74.

The drive control unit 170 is connected to the effect button drive motor 17b and the panel drive device 75, and drives the effect button based on various effect data (including commands) transmitted from the effect control unit 130 m (sub CPU 130a). The operation is produced by controlling the drive of a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the motor 17b and the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 180 supplies a power supply voltage to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, effect control board 130, and various electronic components). The power supply board 180 includes a power failure detection circuit 182 that detects whether or not a power failure (power failure) has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of the power failure (power failure). A backup power supply circuit 183 for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 in the event of a power failure (power failure) is provided.

The power failure detection circuit 182 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less. More specifically, the main CPU 110a in which the power failure detection signal is at a high level is in an operable state, and when the power failure detection signal is in a low level, the main CPU 110a is in an operation stopped state.

The backup power supply circuit 183 is provided with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and when a power failure (power failure) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is used in the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110 or for payout control. It is supplied to the payout RAM 121c of the substrate 120. As a result, the stored contents of the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c are retained even in the event of a power failure (power failure), and the control state of the game is changed to the state before the power failure (power failure) after the recovery from the power failure (power failure). It can be restored. The backup power may be supplied to the effect control board 130.

Although the effect control board 130 (specifically, the effect control unit 130 m) and the second game information display device 79 are directly connected via wiring, the effect control board 130 and the second game information display are displayed. A relay board may be provided between the device 79 and the effect control board 130 and the second game information display device 79 may be indirectly connected via the relay board. Further, the second game information display device 79 is not connected to the effect control unit 130 m, but is connected to the lamp control unit 160, and the lamp control unit 160 is connected to the lamp control unit 160 based on the instruction information (effect data) from the effect control unit 130 m. 2 The game information display device 79 may be controlled. Further, a relay board may be provided between the lamp control unit 160 and the second game information display device 79.

(Explanation of game status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In the present embodiment, there are a "low-probability gaming state" and a "high-probability gaming state" as states relating to the jackpot lottery of special symbols, and a "non-time-saving gaming state" as a state relating to the movable member 48 possessed by the second starting port 47. "And" time-saving game state ". The state related to the jackpot lottery (low-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state) and the state related to the movable member 48 (non-time-saving game state, time-saving game state) can be related to each other or can be made independent. .. in short,
(1) In the case of "low probability gaming state" and "time saving gaming state" (first specific gaming state),
(2) In the case of "low probability gaming state" and "non-time saving gaming state" (normal gaming state),
(3) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "time saving gaming state" (second specific gaming state),
(4) In the case of "high probability gaming state" and "non-time saving gaming state" (third specific gaming state),
Can be provided.
The game state when the game is started, that is, the initial game state of the game machine 1, is set to the "low-probability game state" and the "non-time-saving game state", and this game state is set to the present embodiment. In the above, it is referred to as "normal gaming state".

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means that the jackpot winning probability is the jackpot winning probability in the jackpot lottery of the special symbol performed on the condition that the gaming ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. , For example, a gaming state set as low as 1/299. On the other hand, the "high probability gaming state" means a gaming state in which the jackpot winning probability is improved as compared with the low probability gaming state, and the jackpot winning probability is set as high as, for example, 1 / 59.8. .. Therefore, in the "high-probability gaming state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low-probability gaming state". It should be noted that the change from the low-probability gaming state to the high-probability gaming state is performed after the jackpot game described later is completed.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as "probability variation jackpot", and the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low-probability gaming state is referred to as "normal jackpot".

In the present embodiment, the "non-time saving game state" is the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. Is a game state in which is set longer than the "time saving game state", and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is easily set to be short. For example, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, and the normal symbol variation display is performed on the normal symbol first display 62, but the normal symbol variation display is started. Therefore, for example, the stop display is displayed after 30 seconds. Then, when the lottery result is a hit, the second start port 47 is controlled in the open mode for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the stop display of the normal symbol. In other words, in the "non-time saving game state", if a right-handed hit is made, the game ball does not win in the first starting port 45, and it is difficult for the game ball to win in the second starting opening 47. This allows the player to proceed with the game more advantageously than when hitting right.

On the other hand, the "time saving game state" is the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbol performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44. A gaming state that is set shorter than the "non-time saving game state" and that the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set to be, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time saving game state". To say. Further, in the "non-time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as 1/128, for example, and in the "time saving game state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is, for example 127. It is set as high as / 128. Therefore, in the "time saving game state", when the game ball passes through the normal drawing gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more likely to be controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving gaming state". As a result, in the "short-time game state", the player can advance the game advantageously without consuming the game ball by hitting right.

In the embodiment, the "time saving game state" is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the "non-time saving gaming state". Has been done. However, the "time saving game state" may be set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. Further, in the non-time saving game state, the probability of winning in the winning lottery of the normal symbol may be, for example, 0/128.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 to 16, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be described.

(Big hit judgment table of big hit lottery of special symbols)
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table. Specifically, FIG. 6A is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 45, and FIG. 6B is the second start. This is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the mouth 47. In the tables of FIGS. 6 (a) and 6 (b), the jackpot probabilities are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, the jackpot determination table shows the probability game state, the jackpot determination acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. The jackpot determination value for determining the random number value for use and the determination result of the jackpot lottery are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, and refers to the current stochastic gaming state and the acquired jackpot. Based on the judgment random value, it is judged whether it is a "big hit" or a "miss".

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 6A, it is determined that the two jackpot determination random values "7" and "8" are jackpots in the low probability gaming state. Will be done. On the other hand, in the high-probability gaming state, 10 jackpot determination random numbers from "7" to "16" are determined to be jackpots. If the random value is other than the above, it is determined to be "missing".

Therefore, since the random number range of the random number value for jackpot determination is 0 to 598, the probability of being determined to be a jackpot in the low probability gaming state is 1/299, and it is determined to be a jackpot in the high probability gaming state. The probability is increased by 5 times to 1 / 58.9. The probability of being determined to be a big hit is not limited to 5 times, and may be set to any value such as 3 times or 10 times.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a special symbol determination table for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot lottery. Specifically, FIG. 7 (a) is a special symbol determination table for a jackpot that is referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when a jackpot is won, and FIG. 7 (b) is a loss winning. It is a symbol determination table for loss that is sometimes referred to for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 7A, the special symbol determination table for big hits includes the type of starting port in which the game ball has won, and when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. The jackpot symbol judgment value for determining the acquired jackpot symbol determination random value, the determination result (type of special symbol), the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the information indicating the type of the special symbol are produced. An effect symbol designation command transmitted to the control board 130 is associated with the effect symbol designation command.

As shown in FIG. 7B, the special symbol determination table for loss includes the type of starting port in which the game ball has won, and when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. The jackpot symbol judgment value for determining the acquired jackpot symbol determination random value, the determination result (type of special symbol), the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the information indicating the type of the special symbol are produced. An effect symbol designation command transmitted to the control board 130 is associated with the effect symbol designation command. It should be noted that a plurality of lost special symbols and special symbol determination values may be associated with each other so that a plurality of lost special symbols can be determined even in the case of loss.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 7, and determines the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) based on the type of the starting port in which the game ball has won and the random value for determining the jackpot symbol. It will be decided.
Then, at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect symbol designation command as the information indicating the type of the special symbol is determined based on the determined type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). Here, in the effect symbol specification command, one command is composed of two bytes of data, one byte of MODE data for identifying the classification of the control command, and one byte of DATA indicating the content of the control command to be executed. It consists of data. This also applies to the fluctuation pattern specification command and the like, which will be described later.

Here, as will be described later, the type of the jackpot game (see FIG. 8) and the game state after the jackpot game is completed (see FIG. 11) are determined by the type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data). It can be said that the type of special symbol determines the type of jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game is completed.

(Big hit game control table)
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a jackpot game control table for determining the progress of a jackpot state (special game state) when a jackpot win is obtained as a determination result of the jackpot lottery. In the jackpot game control table, the type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), the opening time of the jackpot state (special game state), the opening designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the opening, and the jackpot 50 The big winning opening opening / closing control table for determining the opening / closing mode of the game, the ending time of the big hit state (special game state), and the ending designation command to be transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the ending are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a will refer to the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8 and determine the opening time, the winning opening opening / closing control table, and the ending time based on the special figure stop symbol data. Since the number of rounds in the jackpot state (special gaming state) is determined by determining the type of the jackpot opening / closing table, FIG. 8 shows the number of rounds in the jackpot state (special gaming state), etc. Is supplementarily described.

(Big prize opening opening / closing control table for big hit games)
9 and 10 are diagrams showing a large winning opening opening / closing control table that is referred to when a big hit is won. The large winning opening open / close control table has a table number (TBL.No), a round number indicating the number of rounds of the big hit game (special game state), and a special electric power indicating the number of times the large winning opening 50 is opened in one round. The operation number (K), the opening time of the large winning opening 50, and the closing time (interval time) for closing the large winning opening 50 between rounds or during the round are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a specifies the opening / closing mode (opening / closing pattern) of the large winning opening 50 with reference to the large winning opening opening / closing control table shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, and is based on the first large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No01). The first big hit game is executed, the second big hit game is executed based on the second big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No02), and the second big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No03) is used. The 3 big hit games are executed, the 4th big hit game is executed based on the 4th big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No04), and the 5th big hit is executed based on the 5th big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No05). The game is executed, the 6th big hit game is executed based on the 6th big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No06), and the 7th big hit game is executed based on the 7th big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No07). Execute.

According to the first large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No = 01), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the large winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a in one round from the first round to the fourth round. The first big hit game is executed in which the player opens up to 29.5 seconds per round and opens up to 0.18 seconds per round from the 5th round to the 8th round.

However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 50 by the time the opening time elapses, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the eight rounds of the game are completed, the first big hit game is completed. From the 5th round to the 8th round, the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to win the prize ball. Therefore, it can be said that the first big hit game is substantially a 4-round probability variable big hit game.

According to the second big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 02), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from the 1st round to the 4th round and from the 6th round. Up to 8 rounds, open up to 29.5 seconds per round, and in 5 rounds, open and close operations (K = 5) multiple times per round (large winning opening 50 opens for 0.18 seconds and 7). Execute the second jackpot game (repeating closing for 32 seconds and opening for 25.0 seconds at the end).

However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large prize opening 50 by the time the maximum number of open times (K) is reached, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the eight rounds of the game are completed, the second big hit game is completed. Since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is long from the 1st round to the 8th round and it is easy to win the prize ball, it can be said that the 2nd big hit game is substantially a probability variation big hit game of 8 rounds.

Since the opening and closing modes of the big winning opening 50 up to the middle of the 5th round are the same in the first big hit game and the second big hit game, it is not possible to grasp which big hit game is up to the middle. Therefore, in the first jackpot game, during the closing time of 5 to 8 rounds, and in the second jackpot game, during the 4th closing time of the big winning opening 50 of 5 rounds, a round game in which a prize ball can be obtained. For example, the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 executes a promotion effect as to whether or not the number increases. Specifically, in the first jackpot game, the jackpot game ends after executing the promotion failure effect that makes it appear that the increase in the round games that can acquire the prize ball has failed in the final phase of the promotion effect. In the second jackpot game, after performing a promotion success production that makes it appear that the number of round games that can win prize balls has been successfully increased in the final phase of the promotion production, the fifth round of the big prize opening 50 is opened. , The jackpot game is advanced after the 6th round in which the prize ball can be obtained. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion production is raised.

According to the third big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No = 03), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from 1 round to 15 rounds per round. Open up to 29.5 seconds and execute the third big hit game. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 50 by the time the opening time elapses, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the 15 rounds of the game are completed, the third big hit game is completed. Since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is long from the 1st round to the 15th round and it is easy to win the prize ball, it can be said that the 3rd big hit game is substantially a probabilistic big hit game of 15 rounds.

According to the 4th big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No = 04), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from 1 round to 8 rounds per round. The fourth big hit game that opens up to 0.18 seconds is executed. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 50 by the time the opening time elapses, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the eight rounds of the game are completed, the fourth big hit game is completed. From the 1st round to the 8th round, the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to win the prize ball. Therefore, the 4th big hit game can be said to be a sudden probability change big hit game of 0 rounds.

According to the fifth large winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL. No = 05), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the large winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a in one round from the first round to the eighth round. Open up to 29.5 seconds per hit and execute the 5th big hit game. However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 50 by the time the opening time elapses, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the game of 8 rounds is completed, the 5th big hit game is completed. Since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is long from the 1st round to the 8th round and it is easy to win the prize ball, the 5th big hit game can be said to be a normal big hit game of 8 rounds.

According to the 6th big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 06), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a in one round from the first round to the fourth round. The sixth big hit game is executed, in which the player opens up to 29.5 seconds per round and opens up to 0.18 seconds per round from the 5th round to the 15th round.

However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large winning opening 50 by the time the opening time elapses, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the 15 rounds of the game are completed, the sixth big hit game is completed. From the 5th round to the 15th round, the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is extremely short and it is difficult to win the prize ball. Therefore, it can be said that the 6th big hit game is substantially a 4-round probability variable big hit game.

According to the 7th big winning opening opening / closing control table (TBL.No = 07), the opening / closing member 51 is operated to open the big winning opening 50 on the right side of the game area 5a from the 1st round to the 4th round and from the 6th round. Up to the 15th round, open up to 29.5 seconds per round, and in the 5th round, open and close multiple times (K = 12) per round (the big winning opening 50 opens for 0.18 seconds and 2). .Repeat closing for 548 seconds and finally opening for 25.0 seconds) Execute the 7th jackpot game.

However, if a specified number (9) of game balls win the large prize opening 50 by the time the maximum number of open times (K) is reached, one round of games will be completed. Then, when the 15 rounds of the game are completed, the 7th big hit game is completed. Since the opening time of the big winning opening 50 is long from the 1st round to the 15th round and it is easy to win the prize ball, the 7th big hit game can be said to be a probabilistic big hit game of 15 rounds.

In the 6th big hit game and the 7th big hit game, since the opening and closing modes of the big winning opening 50 up to the middle of the 5th round are the same, it is not possible to grasp which big hit game is up to the middle.

Therefore, in the sixth big hit game, for example, the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is used to perform a promotion effect as to whether or not the number of rounds in which prize balls can be obtained increases between the 5th and 15th rounds. In the 7th jackpot game, for example, the first image shows a promotion effect as to whether or not the number of rounds in which prize balls can be obtained increases between the first opening of the fifth round of the big winning opening 50 and the closing of the eleventh. This is executed on the display device (main liquid crystal display) 70.

Then, in the 6th jackpot game, after executing the promotion failure effect described above in the final phase of the promotion effect, the jackpot game is terminated, and in the 7th jackpot game, the promotion success effect described above is executed in the final phase of the promotion effect. Later, the 12th opening of the big prize opening 50 in the 5th round was opened, and the big hit game is advanced after the 6th round in which the prize ball can be won. By doing so, the player's expectation for the promotion production is raised.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 11 is a game state setting table for determining the game state after the jackpot game (special game state) is completed. As shown in FIG. 11, the type of the start opening in which the game ball has won, the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the time-saving game state, the time-saving game count (J), the probability game state, and the high-probability game count (X). Is associated with.

The main CPU 110a refers to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, and at the end of the jackpot, based on the type of the start port and the stop symbol data of the special symbol, the time-saving game state, the number of time-saving games (J), the probability game state, and the high. The number of stochastic games (X) is determined. When the low-probability gaming state is determined as the stochastic gaming state, the high-probability gaming number (X) is not determined.

The features of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11 in the present embodiment are the number of time-saving games (J) and the number of high-probability games (X) in the case of the special symbols 10 to 13 and the special symbols 20 to 22. The point is that it is set to 10,000 times instead of being set infinitely. However, in the high-probability gaming state, the probability of winning the jackpot by the time the jackpot lottery is performed 10,000 times is extremely high, so in reality, the time-saving gaming state and the high-probability gaming state will continue until the next jackpot lottery is won. I can say.

(Variation pattern determination table)
12 and 13 are diagrams showing a variation pattern determination table referred to when performing variation display of a special symbol. FIG. 12 is a variation pattern determination table referred to when the variation display of the special symbol is performed by entering the game ball into the first starting port 45, and FIG. 13 shows the gaming ball to the second starting port 47. It is a fluctuation pattern determination table referred to when the fluctuation display of a special symbol is performed by entering a ball.

In the variation pattern determination table of FIGS. 12 and 13, the judgment result of the jackpot lottery, the type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the game ball enter the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47. The reach determination random number value acquired at the time of The number of reserved balls indicating the above, the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation pattern acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, and the fluctuation pattern (number) of the special symbol. The fluctuation time of the special symbol is associated with the fluctuation pattern specification command indicating the fluctuation pattern (number).

Therefore, it can be said that the "variation pattern of the special symbol" can at least specify the determination result of the jackpot lottery and the variation time of the special symbol. Also, if the judgment result of the big hit lottery is lost, the reach judgment random number is referred to, but in the case of a big hit, reach occurs except in special cases, so it is configured not to refer to the reach judgment random number. There is. The random number range of the reach determination random number value and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random number value is set to 100 (0 to 99).

Further, in the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, variation pattern 1 (normally) so that the average variation time of the special symbol becomes shorter as the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases. The fluctuation pattern 2 (shortened fluctuation: fluctuation time 3 seconds) is easier to determine than the fluctuation: fluctuation time 12 seconds). Further, in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 12, when the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol increases, the fluctuation pattern 4 (normal fluctuation: fluctuation time 10 seconds) is higher than the fluctuation pattern 3 (normal reach: fluctuation time 20 seconds). ) Is easier to determine.

Although a maximum of "4" may be stored as the number of reserved balls (U1 or U2) of the special symbol, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined after subtracting 1 from the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. Therefore, "4" is not set as the number of reserved balls.

The main CPU 110a refers to the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, and determines the determination result of the jackpot lottery, the type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), the random value for reach determination, and the reservation of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the fluctuation time of the special symbol are determined based on the number of balls (U1 or U2) and the random value for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern. Then, based on the determined variation pattern of the special symbol, the variation pattern designation command of the special symbol is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Here, the variation pattern designation command of the special symbol is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the classification of the command and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is "E6H", a command for designating a variation pattern of the special symbol of the first special symbol 1st display 60 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 is shown, and the MODE is shown. When the data is "E7H", a command for designating a variation pattern of the special symbol of the second special symbol 1st display 61 corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 47 is shown.

Further, in the effect control board 130, as will be described later, the effect content and the like related to the variation display of the effect symbol 70a are determined based on the variation pattern (variation pattern designation command) of the special symbol. In the rightmost column of the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the effect content (variation effect pattern) such as the effect symbol 70a is described as a reference.

Here, as the content of the effect, here, "normal variation" and "shortened variation" mean that the plurality of effect symbols 70a fluctuate apart at high speed and stop without reaching. The difference between normal fluctuation and shortened fluctuation is that the shortened fluctuation ends in a shorter fluctuation time than the normal fluctuation.

Further, "reach" is a variation mode that gives the player a sense of expectation of a jackpot, such that a part of the combination of the effect symbols 70a for notifying the jackpot is temporarily stopped and the other effect symbols 70a fluctuate. Means. For example, when a combination of three-digit effect symbols 70a of "777" is set as a combination of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot (big hit result mode), two effect symbols 70a are set in the left side region and the right side region. 7 ”is a mode in which the remaining effect symbol 70a is fluctuating in the central region after being temporarily stopped.

In addition, "temporary stop" means that the effect symbol 70a sways slightly or the effect symbol 70a is deformed slightly to make the player appear as if the effect symbol 70a is stopped (completely stopped). (Not).

Further, the "normal reach" means a reach in which two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left side region and the right side region, and the remaining one effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the central region, and the expectation of a jackpot is low. In addition, in this embodiment, although it is not a big hit by "normal reach", it may be configured to be a big hit by "normal reach".

Further, "SP reach" means a super reach with a higher expectation of a big hit than a normal reach. For example, it refers to a mode in which the effect symbol 70a in the central region that has not been temporarily stopped makes a special change or a special character is displayed.

Further, "SPSP reach" means a special reach that is performed after the super reach and has a higher expectation of a big hit than the super reach.
Further, the "full rotation reach" means a mode in which the combination of a plurality of effect symbols 70a for notifying a jackpot changes at a low speed in a state where all the combinations are aligned, and in the present embodiment, only when the jackpot lottery is won. It means the reach to be executed.

The variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is referred to regardless of the gaming state, but a variation pattern determination table in which the selection mode of the variation pattern is different for each of a plurality of gaming states is provided. The variation pattern determination table to be referred to may be changed according to the gaming state at that time.

(Preliminary judgment table for big hit lottery)
14 and 15 are diagrams showing a pre-judgment table for preliminarily determining a determination result of a big hit lottery of a special symbol. FIG. 14 is a pre-judgment table referred to when the special symbol is variablely displayed by the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 45, and FIG. 15 shows the entry of the game ball into the second start opening 47. It is a pre-judgment table that is referred to when the variation display of a special symbol is performed by a sphere.

In the pre-judgment table of FIGS. 14 and 15, the judgment result of the big hit lottery, the type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the game ball entered the first start opening 45 or the second start opening 47. The reach determination random value acquired at that time, the special figure variation pattern determination random value acquired when the game ball enters the first start port 45 or the second start port 47, and the planned variation pattern (number). ) Is associated with the start opening winning designation command.

Here, it is possible to determine in advance whether the game is "big hit" or "missing" based on the big hit determination random value acquired when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting opening 47, and is used for determining the big hit symbol. The type of special game and the presence or absence of transition to a high-probability game state can also be determined in advance by the random value.
Furthermore, since the production content (whether or not reach has occurred, the type of reach) and the like can be determined in advance by the reach determination random value and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value, the start winning information (DATA of the start winning designation command) can be determined in advance. In), information on the type of jackpot and the content of the production (planned fluctuation pattern) can be determined.

The main CPU 110a refers to the pre-judgment table shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, and is based on the jackpot determination random value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure variation pattern determination random value. "Starting prize information" is decided. Then, based on the determined start prize information, a start prize designation command for determining the result of the big hit lottery in advance is generated and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

This start winning designation command is composed of 1-byte MODE data for identifying the command classification and 1-byte DATA data indicating the content (function) of the command. In the present embodiment, when the MODE data is "E8H", the start winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 45 is shown, and when the MODE data is "E9H", the second starting port is shown. In 47, a start winning designation command corresponding to the winning of the game ball is shown.

The preliminary determination table shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is similar to the variation pattern determination table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 12 and 13. However, while the pre-judgment table shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is used when the game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47, the variation pattern of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 12 and 13 is used. The decision table differs in that it is used at the beginning of the change of the special symbol. In addition, it is different whether or not to refer to the "number of reserved balls".

Therefore, in the pre-judgment table shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the type of jackpot and the type of fluctuation pattern can be discriminated, but the determination result of the jackpot lottery is "missing" and the random value for reach determination is "0". In the case of "~ 89", the planned fluctuation patterns are fluctuation patterns 1 to 4, but it is impossible to determine whether the scheduled fluctuation pattern is "normal fluctuation", "shortened fluctuation", or "normal reach".

The pre-determination table of the special symbol shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 is referred to regardless of the gaming state at that time, but a pre-determination table in which the selection mode of the variation pattern is different for each of a plurality of gaming states is provided. , The pre-judgment table to be referred to may be changed according to the game state at that time.

FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a table relating to a normal symbol and a movable member 48 of the second starting port 47. Specifically, FIG. 16 (a) is a diagram showing a hit determination table for ordinary symbols used for a winning lottery of ordinary symbols, and FIG. 16 (b) is a diagram corresponding to a winning lottery result of ordinary symbols. It is a figure which shows the stop symbol determination table of a symbol, FIG. 16C is a figure which shows the variation pattern determination table of a normal symbol for determining the variation time of a normal symbol, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the opening mode determination table of the 2nd start opening for determining the opening mode of the movable member 48 in the hit state (auxiliary game) which occurs when the winning lottery of a symbol is won.

(Collision detection table for ordinary symbols)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the hit determination table contains the presence / absence of the time-saving game state, the hit determination random value acquired when the game ball passes through the normal gate 44, and the determination result of the hit lottery. It is associated. The main CPU 110a refers to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 16A, and determines whether the game is “hit” or “missing” based on the current time-saving game state and the acquired random value for hit determination.

For example, according to the hit determination table shown in FIG. 16A, one hit determination random value of "127" is determined to be a hit in the non-time saving game state, and "1" is determined in the time saving game state. To "127", 127 hit determination random values are determined to be hits. Therefore, the probability of being determined to be a hit in the non-time-saving gaming state is 1/128, and the probability of being determined to be a hit in the time-saving gaming state is 127/128.

(Stop symbol determination table for normal symbols)
In the stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 16B, the presence / absence of a time-saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, the random value for the winning symbol acquired when the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44, and The type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) is associated with the normal symbol designation command transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the type of the normal symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the stop symbol determination table shown in FIG. 16B, and displays the normal symbol first based on the current time saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the acquired random number value for the winning symbol. The normal symbol and the normal symbol stop symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the device 62 are determined.
Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol designation command as information indicating the type of the normal symbol is determined based on the determined type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) and transmitted to the effect control board 130. ..

(Fluctuating pattern determination table for ordinary symbols)
In the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16 (c), the presence / absence of a time-saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the normal map fluctuation pattern determination random acquired when the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44. A numerical value, a fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and a command for specifying a normal symbol fluctuation pattern transmitted to the effect control board 130 as information indicating the fluctuation time of the normal symbol are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16 (c), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is based on the current time-saving game state, the lottery result of the winning lottery, and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal map. Will be decided.
Then, at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, a command for designating the normal symbol fluctuation pattern as information indicating the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined based on the determined fluctuation time and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

As a feature of the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 16C, the variation time of the time-saving gaming state (3 seconds or 5 seconds) is shorter than the variation time of the non-time-saving gaming state (30 seconds or 40 seconds). It is configured.

(Opening mode determination table for the second starting port)
In the opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 16D, a normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data), a maximum number of times (S) of opening the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and a second starting port 47 ( The first opening time and closing time of the movable member 48), the interval time between the first closing time and the second opening time, and the second opening time and closing time are associated with each other.

The main CPU 110a refers to the opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 16D, and based on the normal drawing stop symbol data, the maximum number of times the second starting port 47 (movable member 48) is opened, the first opening time, and the closing. Determine the time, the second opening time and the closing time.

In the opening mode determination table shown in FIG. 16D, the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2) is more game than the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 01 (normal symbol 1). It is an opening mode that is advantageous to the player, and the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 03 (normal symbol 3) is more suitable for the player than the opening mode based on the normal symbol stop symbol data = 02 (normal symbol 2). It is an advantageous opening mode.

As shown in the stop symbol determination table of FIG. 16B, the most advantageous normal symbol stop symbol data = 3 (ordinary symbol 3) for the player is determined when a hit occurs in the time-saving gaming state. .. As a result, in the time-saving gaming state, the second starting port 47 (movable member 48) is operated so as to be more advantageous to the player than in the non-time-saving gaming state.

(Various storage areas)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing various storage areas set in the main RAM 110c. Specifically, FIG. 17A is a diagram showing a special symbol holding storage area in which various information is stored when a game ball enters the first start port 45 and / or the second start port 47. FIG. 17 (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the special symbol storage area, and FIG. 17 (c) stores various information when the game ball passes through the normal figure gate 44. It is a normal symbol holding storage area, and FIG. 17D is a diagram showing the configuration of each storage unit of the normal symbol holding storage area.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the special symbol hold storage area is divided into a first special symbol hold storage area, a second special symbol hold storage area, and a special symbol hold storage area, and the first special symbol hold storage area. The storage unit and the second special symbol reservation storage area are each divided from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit, and the special symbol storage area is composed of the 0th storage unit.

As shown in FIG. 17B, each storage unit has a jackpot determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot determination random number value and a jackpot symbol determination random number storage area for storing a jackpot symbol determination random number value. It is divided into a reach determination random number storage area for storing the reach determination random number value and a special figure variation pattern determination random number storage area for storing the special figure variation pattern determination random number value.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the special symbol determination information (big hit) is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number among the storage units in which the random numbers are not stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area. Random numbers for judgment, random numbers for jackpot symbol judgment, random numbers for reach judgment, random numbers for special figure fluctuation pattern judgment) are stored. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 47, the special figure determination information (special figure determination information) is stored in the storage unit having the smallest number among the storage units in which the random numbers are not stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area. Random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbol determination, random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for determination of special figure fluctuation patterns) are stored.

The 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area is the first storage unit of the storage area of the 1st special symbol reservation storage area or the 2nd special symbol reservation storage area, whichever of the storage areas where the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. By shifting the stored special symbol determination information, the special symbol determination information regarding the current special symbol variation display is stored.

As shown in FIG. 17 (c), the normal symbol reservation storage area is divided from the 0th storage unit to the 4th storage unit, and as shown in FIG. 17 (d), each storage unit is used for hit determination. A random number storage area for hit judgment for storing numerical values, a random number storage area for hit symbol judgment for storing random values for hit symbol judgment, and a normal map fluctuation for storing random value for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment. It is divided into a random number storage area for pattern determination.

Then, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, the memory unit having the smallest number among the storage units in which the random numbers are not stored is selected from the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area. The normal figure judgment information (random number for hit judgment, random number for hit symbol judgment, random number for normal figure fluctuation pattern judgment) is stored. The 0th storage unit shifts the normal symbol determination information stored in the 1st storage unit when the start condition for the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, so that the normal symbol determination regarding the current variable display of the normal symbol is performed. Information will be stored.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 180, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, in step S1, the main CPU 110a is set to allow access to the main RAM 110c.

In step S2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch is ON (whether the RAM clear switch is pressed), and when the RAM clear switch is ON (S2: Yes). Goes to step S8, and if the RAM clear switch is not ON (S2: No), goes to step S3.

In step S3, the main CPU 110a creates a checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is turned on.

In step S4, the main CPU 110a compares the created checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is turned on with the checksum of the main RAM 110c when the power is turned off. Here, the main CPU 110a proceeds to step S5 when the compared checksums match (S4: Yes), and steps when the compared checksums do not match (S4: No). Move to S8.

In step S5, the main CPU 110a loads the backup data stored in the backed up main RAM 110c, and performs the setting process of the main RAM 110c for setting the backup data in the work area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a performs initial settings for devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 130, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a sets the power restoration designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmits it to the effect control board 130.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a sets the RAM clear designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmits it to the effect control board 130.

In step S9, the main CPU 110a waits until the RAM clear switch is turned ON (pressed operation) again, and when the RAM clear switch is turned ON (pressed operation) again, the process shifts to step S10.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a clears the used area of the main RAM 110c, and performs the setting process of the main RAM 110c for setting the initial value in the work area of the main RAM 110c that requires the initial value at the time of initialization.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a performs initial settings for devices around the CPU. Specifically, the output setting to the effect control board 130, the setting of the CTC (Counter Timer Circuit) to be used, the interrupt timer (4 milliseconds) of the CTC to be used, and the like are set.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a sets the power-on power-on designation command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmits it to the effect control board 130.

In step S13, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of special symbol reservations in the effect transmission data storage area, and transmits the command to the effect control board 130.

In step S14, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of normal symbol reservations in the effect transmission data storage area, and transmits the command to the effect control board 130.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the reach determination random value and the jackpot symbol determination random value for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol.

In step S30, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot determination initial value random number, the jackpot symbol determination initial value random number, the hit determination initial value random number, and the hit symbol determination initial value random number.

In step S40, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 180, and if the power failure detection signal has not been input (S40: No), the process proceeds to step S20. Then, when the power failure detection signal is input (S40: Yes), the process proceeds to step S41.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition for prohibiting timer interruption in step S41, performs a process of clearing the output port in step S42, calculates a checksum of the main RAM 110c in step S43, and stores it in a predetermined storage area. In step S44, a process of turning on the backup flag to be referred to when recovering from a power failure is performed, a process of prohibiting RAM access is performed in step S45, and the process waits until the power supply voltage supply is completely cut off. ..

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process on the main control board 110. The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the main control board 110 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds), so that the timer interruption process described below is executed.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register of the main CPU 110a to the stack area.

In step S110, the main CPU 110a updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric accessory, the normal symbol time counter, and the opening / closing time of the movable member 48. Performs time control processing to update various timer counters such as processing. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter, the normal symbol time counter, the start / open timer counter, and the start / close timer counter is performed.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a includes a random number value for jackpot determination, a random number value for jackpot symbol determination, a random number value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for hit determination, a random number value for hit symbol, and a random number value for determining a normal figure fluctuation pattern. Performs specific random number update processing such as.

Specifically, each random number value and random number counter are added by +1 and updated. If the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter makes one round), the random number counter is returned to 0, and the corresponding initial value random number value is set as a new round initial value. And update the random number value newly.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a updates the jackpot determination initial value random value, the jackpot symbol determination initial value random value, the winning symbol determination initial value random value, and the winning symbol determination initial value random value, as in step S30. Initial random number update processing is performed.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a performs an input control process. In this process, the main CPU 110a includes various types of the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the large winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, and the winning confirmation detection switch 52a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch, and if there is an input, an input control process for setting predetermined data is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure special electric control process for performing a big hit lottery, a display control of a special symbol, an opening / closing control of a big winning opening 50 (opening / closing member 51), a game state control, and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal drawing control process for performing a winning lottery, a display control of a normal symbol, an opening / closing control of a second starting port 47 (movable member 48), and the like. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

In step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process. In this payout control process, the main CPU 110a refers to each prize ball counter, generates a payout number designation command corresponding to various winning openings, and transmits the generated payout quantity designation command to the payout control board 120.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination processing. In this magnetic / radio wave abnormality determination process, the main CPU 110a detects the occurrence of a magnetic error or a radio wave error based on the input signals from the magnetic detection switch 53a and the radio wave detection switch 54a, and if detected, an error for magnetic abnormality. A designation command or an error designation command for radio wave abnormality is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When the effect control board 130 receives the error designation command for magnetic abnormality or the error designation command for radio wave abnormality, the radio wave error notification or the magnetic error notification is executed to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a has external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal plate 90, drive control data output to the second start opening opening / closing solenoid 48b, the winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b, and the first special symbol. 1st display 60, 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, normal symbol 1st display 62, 1st special symbol hold 1st display 63, 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 64, normal symbol hold 1st Data creation processing such as various display control data to be output to the 1 display 65, the round number display 66, the right-handed first display 67, the high-probability game state display 68, and the time-saving game state display 69 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs an output control process. In this process, a port output process for outputting signals such as external information data and drive control data created in S700 is performed. In addition, display processing for outputting a signal such as display control data created in S700 is performed. Further, a command output process for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board is also performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.
The types of commands transmitted to the effect control board 130 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a.

(Input control processing of the main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an input control process on the main control board 110.

In step S210, the main CPU 110a performs a general winning opening detection switch input process. In this general winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, predetermined data is added to and updated from the winning ball counter for the general winning opening, and the winning ball counter indicating the number of game balls entered in the winning opening. After adding "1" to (D) and updating (D ← D + 1), the process moves to the next step.

In step S220, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening detection switch input process. In this big winning opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a. If there is no detection signal input from the large winning opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to the next step as it is.

When the detection signal from the large winning opening detection switch 50a is input, predetermined data is added to the winning ball counter for the large winning opening and updated to indicate the number of game balls entered in the winning opening. "1" is added to the counter (D) to update (D ← D + 1), and 1 is added to the large winning opening number of balls (C) storage area for counting the game balls that have won the large winning opening 50. After updating (C ← C + 1), the process moves to the next step.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first start port detection switch input process. In this first start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the first start port 45, and a predetermined value is determined. Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start port detection switch input process. In this second start port detection switch input process, it is determined whether the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a is input, that is, whether or not the game ball has won the second start port 47, and a predetermined value is determined. Set the data. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S250, the main CPU 110a performs a gate detection switch input process. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44, and predetermined data is set. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

In step S260, the main CPU 110a performs a winning confirmation detection switch input process. In this prize confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the prize confirmation detection switch 52a has been input, and 1 is subtracted from the ball entry counter (D) to update (D ← D-1). It is determined whether or not the value of the ball entry counter (D) is within the range of the predetermined judgment value (lower limit value <D <upper limit value), and if it is outside the range of the judgment value, an abnormal winning occurs. The error specification command for abnormal winning is set in the transmission data storage area for production. If it is within the range of the determination value, the winning confirmation detection switch input process is terminated.

As a result, the error designation command for abnormal winning is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for abnormal winning notifies the abnormal winning error and indicates that the abnormal winning error has occurred. Notify.

(First start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The first start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a first start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a has been input. When the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a was input (S230-1: Yes), the process was transferred to step S230-2, and the detection signal from the first start port detection switch 45a was not input. In the case (S230-1: No), the first start port detection switch input process of this time is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating predetermined data to the starting opening prize ball counter used for the prize ball.

In step S230-3, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the ball entry counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning slot and updates (D ← D + 1).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area is less than 4. If the data set in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area is less than 4, the process is transferred to step S230-5 and the data is set in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area. If the data is not less than 4, the first start port detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area and updating (U1 ← U1 + 1).

In step S230-6, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for jackpot determination, searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and vacant storage units. The jackpot judgment random value acquired in the unit is stored.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a jackpot symbol, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and is vacant. The jackpot symbol determination random value acquired is stored in the storage unit.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a acquires the reach determination random value and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value, and sequentially vacates the storage unit from the first storage unit in the first special symbol reservation storage area. The search is performed, and the reach determination random value and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value acquired are stored in a vacant storage unit.

As described above, the jackpot determination random value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the first special symbol reservation storage area. It becomes.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a performs the first pre-determination process. In this first pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 14 is referred to, and the jackpot determination random value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination acquired this time are used. Based on the random number value, the first start winning information for showing the determination information of the first start port in advance is determined.

In step S230-10, the main CPU 110a sets the first start opening winning designation command based on the first start winning information determined in the first pre-determination process of step S230-9 in the transmission data storage area for effect. ..

As a result, the first start prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the first start prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the first start prize designation command is designated as the first start prize. A series of commands that analyze the command and execute a predetermined advance notice effect over one or more variable displays executed before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first start prize designation command is started. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a notice effect or a hold change notice that changes the display mode of an icon (hold icon, the variable icon).

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area, and corresponds to the first special symbol hold number (U1) updated in step S230-4. The first special symbol storage designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

In step S230-12, the main CPU 110a puts the first special symbol hold display data for displaying the first hold number (LED lighting or blinking) on the first special symbol hold first display 63 in a predetermined processing area. It is set, and the input process of the first start port detection switch this time is completed. As a result, when the first special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the first special symbol is output. The first hold number is displayed on the symbol hold first display 63.

(Second start port detection switch input process on the main control board)
The second start port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a second start port detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a has been input. When the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a was input (S240-1: Yes), the process was transferred to step S240-2, and the detection signal from the second start port detection switch 47a was not input. In the case (S240-1: No), the second start port detection switch input process of this time is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding and updating predetermined data to the starting opening prize ball counter used for the prize ball.

In step S240-3, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the ball entry counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning slot and updates (D ← D + 1).

In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game (hit state) is in progress. When the auxiliary game (hit state) is in progress (S240-4: Yes), the process is transferred to step S240-9, and when the auxiliary game (hit state) is not in progress (S240-5: No), step S240- Move the process to 5.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the illegal entry counter (E) for monitoring the illegal entry into the second starting port 47 and updates (E ← E + 1).

In step S240-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the illegal entry counter is larger than the specified number (10). If the number is greater than the specified number (S240-6: Yes), the process is transferred to step S240-7, and if the number is less than the specified number (S240-6: No), the process is transferred to step S240-10.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a sets the error designation command for illegal entry in the transmission data storage area for effect, assuming that an illegal entry has occurred.

As a result, the error designation command for illegal entry is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the error designation command for illegal entry issues an illegal entry error notification and makes an illegal entry error. Notifies that has occurred.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a clears the value of the illegal entry counter (E) to 0.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a adds "1" to the second start port entry counter (L) and updates (L ← L + 1).

In step S240-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area is less than 4. If the data set in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area is less than 4 (S240-10: Yes), the process is transferred to step S240-11, and the second special symbol hold number (U2) U2) If the data set in the storage area is not less than 4 (S240-10: No), the second start port detection switch input process this time is terminated.

In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area and updating (U2 ← U2 + 1).

In step S240-12, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for jackpot determination, searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol reservation storage area, and vacant storage units. The jackpot judgment random value acquired in the unit is stored.

In step S240-13, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a jackpot symbol, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the second special symbol reservation storage area, and is vacant. The jackpot symbol determination random value acquired is stored in the storage unit.

In step S240-14, the main CPU 110a acquires the reach determination random value and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value, and sequentially vacates the storage unit from the first storage unit in the second special symbol reservation storage area. The search is performed, and the reach determination random value and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value acquired are stored in a vacant storage unit.

As described above, the jackpot determination random value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special symbol variation pattern determination random value are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the second special symbol reservation storage area. It becomes.

In step S240-15, the main CPU 110a performs the second pre-determination process. In this second pre-judgment process, the pre-judgment table of the jackpot lottery shown in FIG. 15 is referred to, and the jackpot determination random value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination acquired this time are used. Based on the random number value, the second start winning information for showing the determination information of the second start opening in advance is determined.

In step S240-16, the main CPU 110a sets the second start winning designation command based on the second start winning information determined in the second pre-determination process of step S240-14 in the production transmission data storage area.

As a result, the second start prize information can be transmitted to the effect control board 130 as the second start prize designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the effect control board 130 that has received the second start prize designation command is designated as the second start prize. A continuous notice or icon that analyzes the command and executes a predetermined notice effect over one or more variable displays before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the second start prize designation command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect such as a hold change notice that changes the display mode of (hold icon, change icon).

In step S240-17, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area, and corresponds to the second special symbol hold number (U2) updated in step S240-9. The second special symbol storage designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

In step S240-18, the main CPU 110a puts the second special symbol hold display data for displaying the second hold number (LED lighting or blinking) on the second special symbol hold first display 64 in a predetermined processing area. Set it and finish the second start port detection switch input process this time. As a result, when the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the second special symbol is output. The second hold number is displayed on the symbol hold first display 64.

(Gate detection switch input processing on the main control board)
The gate detection switch input of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a gate detection switch input process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S250-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input. When the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is input (S250-1: Yes), the process is transferred to step S250-2, and when the detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a is not input (S250-1: Yes). In No), the current gate detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S250-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the data set in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is less than 4. If the data set in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is less than 4 (S250-2: Yes), the process is transferred to step S250-3, and the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is used. If the data set in is not less than 4 (S250-2: No), the current gate detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S250-3, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the normal symbol hold number (G) and updating (G ← G + 1).

In step S250-4, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for hit determination, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol hold storage area, and makes the vacant storage unit. The acquired random value for collision detection is stored.

In step S250-5, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for hit symbol determination, searches for vacant storage units in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and vacant storage units. The winning symbol determination random value acquired in is stored in.

In step S250-6, the main CPU 110a acquires a random value for determining a normal symbol fluctuation pattern, searches for a vacant storage unit in order from the first storage unit in the normal symbol reservation storage area, and is vacant. The acquired random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern of the normal map is stored in the storage unit.

As described above, the hit determination random value, the hit symbol random value, and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination random value are stored in the predetermined storage unit of the normal symbol holding memory area.

In step S250-7, the main CPU 110a refers to the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area, and specifies the normal symbol storage corresponding to the normal symbol hold number (G) updated in step S250-3. Set the command in the transmission data storage area for production.

In step S250-8, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol hold display data for displaying (lighting or blinking the LED) the normal symbol hold number on the normal symbol hold first display 65 in a predetermined processing area. The gate detection switch input process this time is terminated. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the normal symbol hold first. The number of reserved figures is displayed on the display 65.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric processing data loaded in step S302, and if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the special symbol The process is transferred to the storage determination process (step S310), the process is transferred to the special symbol variation process (step S320) if the special figure special electric process data = 1, and the special symbol stop process (step S320) if the special figure special electric process data = 2. If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the process is transferred to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric process data = 4, the process is transferred to the big hit game end process (step S350). To move.

This "special figure special electric processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control processing as described later, so that the subroutine necessary for the game is appropriately processed. ..

In the special symbol storage determination process of step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process, a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed, a special symbol variation pattern determination process for determining the variation time of the special symbol, and the like. .. The special symbol memory determination process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 25.

In the special symbol variation processing in step S320, the main CPU 110a performs a process of determining whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and if the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the special symbol stop in step S330. Perform the process to shift to the process. This special symbol variation process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 28.

In the special symbol stop process of step S330, the main CPU 110a performs a process corresponding to the stop-displayed special symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol), and also performs a time-saving game count (J), a time-saving game flag, and a high-probability game count. (X), the high-probability game flag setting process is performed. The special symbol stop processing will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 29.

In the jackpot game process of step S340, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the jackpot game. The details of this jackpot game process will be described later with reference to FIG. 30.

In the jackpot game end process of step S350, the main CPU 110a determines the probability game state of either the high-probability game state or the low-probability game state, and determines the game state of either the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state. Perform the process to determine. The big hit game end process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 31.

(Special symbol memory judgment processing of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a special symbol storage determination process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. Here, when the variation of the special symbol is being displayed (special symbol time counter ≠ 0), the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated and the variation of the special symbol is not being displayed (special symbol time counter = 0). In (S310-1: No), the process is transferred to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, when the main CPU 110a is not in the process of changing the special symbol (S310-1: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved number (U2) storage area that stores the second reserved number. Is 1 or more. If it is determined that the value of the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area is 1 or more (S310-2: Yes), the process is transferred to step S310-3, and the second special symbol hold number (U2). If the value of the storage area is not 1 or more (S310-2: No), the process is transferred to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a is updated (U2 ← U2-1) by subtracting “1” from the value stored in the second special symbol hold number (U2) storage area.

In step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the value of the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area that stores the first hold number is 1 or more. When it is determined that the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is 1 or more (S310-4: Yes), the process is transferred to step S310-5, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area is stored. If the value of is not 1 or more (S310-4: No), the process is transferred to step S319-1.

In step S310-5, the main CPU 110a is updated (U1 ← U1-1) by subtracting “1” from the value stored in the first special symbol hold number (U1) storage area.

In step S310-6, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the special symbol hold number (U) storage area subtracted from step S310-2 in S310-5. .. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the first special symbol random value storage area or the second special symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is stored in the special symbol hold storage. It will be erased from the area. As a result, the jackpot determination random value, the jackpot symbol determination random value, the reach determination random value, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted.

In the present embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-6, the second special symbol reserved storage area is prioritized over the first special symbol reserved storage area to be shifted (digested), but the starting port is won. The first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted in the order of the above, or the first special symbol reserved storage area may be shifted in preference to the second special symbol reserved storage area. You may.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a is based on the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area or the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area subtracted in step S310-2 or step S310-4. , The special symbol storage designation command is determined, and the determined special symbol storage designation command is set in the transmission data storage area for effect.

In step S310-8, the main CPU 110a is based on the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area or the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area subtracted in step S310-2 or step S310-4. , Set the special symbol hold display data in the predetermined processing area. As a result, when the first special symbol hold display data or the first special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. By doing so, the number of holds (the number of first hold, the number of second hold) is displayed on the first display 63 for holding the first special symbol or the first display 64 for holding the second special symbol.

In step S311, the main CPU 110a is based on the data (big hit determination random value, jackpot symbol determination random value) written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) of the special symbol hold storage area in step S310-6. Then, the jackpot determination process is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a performs a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process. The variation pattern determination process refers to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 12 or 13, as a result of the jackpot lottery, the type of special symbol, the number of special symbol reservations (U), the acquired random number value for reach determination, and the special diagram. The special figure fluctuation pattern is determined based on the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the effect transmission data storage area.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state at the start of the fluctuation, and sets the game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the transmission data storage area for effect.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time (counter value) of the special symbol based on the variation pattern determined in step S312 in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in S110.

In step S316, the main CPU 110a determines special symbol variation display data for causing the first special symbol first display 60 or the second special symbol first display 61 to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED). Set in the processing area of. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the LED lighting or extinguishing data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800. 1 The variable display of the special symbol 1st display 60 or the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61 is started.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a sets "00H" in the customer waiting state determination flag, sets "1" in the special figure special electric processing data in step S318, and prepares to move to the special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 28. , Ends the special symbol memory determination process this time.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the customer waiting state determination flag is "01H". When the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" is not set in the customer waiting state determination flag storage area (S319-1: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S319-2 and shifts the processing to the customer waiting state determination flag. When the customer waiting state determination flag "01H" is set in the storage area (S319-1: No), the special symbol storage determination process this time is terminated. On the other hand, in step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets the customer waiting state determination flag to "00H", sets the customer waiting state specification command in the production transmission data storage area, and ends the special symbol storage determination process this time. do.

(Big hit judgment process of main control board)
The jackpot determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a jackpot determination process on the main control board 110.

In step S311-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot determination process is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 45. When the main CPU 110a determines that it is the first starting port (S311-1: Yes), it shifts the process to step S311-2 and determines that it is not the first starting port (it is the second starting port). In (S311-1: No), the process is transferred to step S311-3.

In step S311-2, the main CPU 110a selects a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S311-3, the main CPU 110a selects the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol.

Next, in step S311-4, the main CPU 110a collates the current stochastic gaming state and the jackpot determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area with the selected jackpot determination table. Then, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

In step S311-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot has been won. When the main CPU 110a determines that the jackpot has been won (S311-5: Yes), the process is transferred to step S311-6, and when it is determined that the jackpot has not been won (S311-5: No), the main CPU 110a shifts the process. , Step S311-7.

In step S311-6, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for winning a big hit. On the other hand, in step S311-7, the main CPU 110a selects a special symbol determination table for loss.

In steps S311-8, the main CPU 110a includes the type of the starting port from which the jackpot lottery (determination) is to be performed, the special symbol, the random value for jackpot symbol determination stored in the 0th storage unit of the storage area, and the random value for determining the jackpot symbol. The type of special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data) is determined by collating with the selected table.

The determined special symbol is used to determine whether or not it is a big hit in the special symbol stop process of FIG. 29, as will be described later, and also determines the operation mode of the big winning opening in the big hit game process of FIG. 30. It is also used to determine the game state after the end of the jackpot in the jackpot game end process of FIG. 31.

In step S311-9, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol stop symbol data determined in step S311-8 in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area.

In step S311-10, the main CPU 110a specifies the effect symbol designation command based on the special symbol stop symbol data of the jackpot determined in step S311-8, and the specified effect symbol designation command is used as the effect transmission data storage area. Set to. As a result, the effect symbol designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing of the main control board)
The special figure variation pattern determination process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

In step S312-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 45. When the main CPU 110a determines that it is the first starting port (S312-1: Yes), it shifts the process to step S312-2 and determines that it is not the first starting port (it is the second starting port). In (S3121: No), the process is transferred to step S312-3.

In step S312-2, the main CPU 110a selects a variation pattern determination table for the first special symbol. On the other hand, in step S312-3, the main CPU 110a selects the variation pattern determination table for the second special symbol.

Next, in step S312-4, the main CPU 110a determines the determination result of the jackpot lottery, the type of the special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data), and the reach determination stored in the 0th storage unit of the special symbol storage area. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined by collating the random value for determination and the random value for determining the special symbol fluctuation pattern with the current number of reserved balls and the selected fluctuation pattern determination table.

In step S312-5, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312-4 to the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in the above S110.

In step S312-6, the main CPU 110a sets the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in step S312-4 in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Special symbol variation processing of the main control board)
The special symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

In step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time set in step S312-5 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the special symbol fluctuation processing is terminated.

In step S320-2, when the main CPU 110a determines that the set time has elapsed, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) determined in step S311-8 is first special. The special symbol stop display data for causing the symbol 1st display 60 or the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61 to stop and display is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 60 or the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, and the player is informed of the judgment result of the jackpot lottery. It will be notified.

In step S320-3, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the special symbol determination command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S320-4, when the main CPU 110a starts the stop display of the special symbol as described above, the symbol stop time (0.5 seconds = 125 counter) is set in the special symbol time counter. The special symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in S110.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a sets "2" in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move to the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 29, and ends the current special symbol variation processing.

(Special symbol stop processing of main control board)
The special symbol stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process in the main control board 110.

In step S330-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the symbol stop time set in step S320-4 has elapsed (special symbol time counter = 0?). As a result, if it is determined that the symbol stop time has elapsed, the process is moved to step S330-2, and if it is determined that the symbol stop time has not elapsed, the special symbol stop process this time is terminated. do.

In step S330-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is set (ON) in the time saving game flag storage area. When the time saving game flag is set (S330-2: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S330-3, and when the time saving game flag is not set (S330-2: No), the main CPU 110a shifts the process. , Step S330-8.

In step S330-3, the main CPU 110a is updated (J ← J-1) by subtracting “1” from the number of time-saving games (J) stored in the time-saving game number (J) storage area, and is updated (J ← J-1). In 4, it is determined whether or not the new number of time-saving games (J) is "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the number of time-saving games (J) is "0" (S330-4: Yes), the process shifts to step S330-5, and the number of time-saving games (J) is not "0". If it is determined (S330-4: No), the process is transferred to step S330-8.

In step S330-5, the main CPU 110a clears (OFF) the time-saving game flag set in the time-saving game flag storage area. As a result, the time-saving game state ends and the game shifts to the non-time-saving game state.

In step S330-6, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving game state erasing data for erasing the display (LED on) of the time-saving game state display 69 (LED off) in the predetermined processing area. As a result, when the time-saving game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the time-saving game state indicator is displayed. The display of 69 is erased.

In step S330-7, the main CPU 110a sets the right-handed erasure data for erasing (turning off the LED) the display (LED on) of the right-handed first display 67 in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the right-handed erase data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the right-handed first display is displayed. The display of 67 is erased.

In step S330-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. When the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area (S330-8: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S330-9 and moves the process to the high-probability game flag storage area. If the flag is not set (S330-8: No), the process is transferred to step S330-13.

In step S330-9, the main CPU 110a updates (X ← X-1) by subtracting “1” from the high-probability game count (X) stored in the high-probability game count (X) storage area, and steps. In S330-10, it is determined whether or not the new high-probability game count (X) is "0". When the main CPU 110a determines that the high-probability game count (X) is "0" (S330-10: Yes), the process shifts to step S330-11, and the high-probability game count (X) is "0". If it is determined that it is not (S330-10: No), the process is transferred to step S330-13.

In step S330-11, the main CPU 110a clears (OFF) the high-probability game flag set in the high-probability game flag storage area. As a result, the high-probability gaming state ends and the game shifts to the low-probability gaming state.

In step S330-12, the main CPU 110a sets the high-probability gaming state erasing data for erasing the display (LED on) of the high-probability gaming state indicator 68 (LED off) in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the high-probability game state erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the high-probability game state is obtained. The display of the display 68 is erased.

In step S330-13, the main CPU 110a confirms the current game state, and sets the game state designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S330-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop-displayed special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop symbol data stored in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area is for the jackpot special symbol (special symbol stop symbol data = 10 to 16, 20 to 23). .. When the main CPU 110a is determined to be a jackpot special symbol (S330-14: Yes), the process is transferred to step S330-15, and when it is determined that the main CPU 110a is not a jackpot special symbol (S330-14: No). Moves the process to step S330-26.

In step S330-15, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the time saving game flag is set (ON) in the time saving game flag storage area. When the time saving game flag is set (S330-15: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S330-16, and when the time saving game flag is not set (S330-15: No), the main CPU 110a shifts the process. , Step S330-17.

In step S330-16, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving game state erasing data in a predetermined processing area.

In step S330-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area. When the high-probability game flag is set in the high-probability game flag storage area (S330-17: Yes), the main CPU 110a shifts the process to step S330-18 and moves the process to the high-probability game flag storage area for the high-probability game. If the flag is not set (S330-17: No), the process is transferred to step S330-19.

In step S330-18, the main CPU 110a sets the high-probability gaming state erasing data in a predetermined processing area.

In step S330-19, the main CPU 110a sets 3 in the special figure special electric processing data and prepares to move to the jackpot game processing shown in FIG.

In step S330-20, the main CPU 110a resets the gaming state and the number of time reductions. Specifically, the data stored in the high-probability game flag storage area, the high-probability game number (X) storage area, the time-saving game flag storage area, and the time-saving game number (J) storage area are cleared.

In step S330-21, the main CPU 110a sets the large winning opening open / close control table. Specifically, the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 8 is referred to, and the jackpot opening / closing control table (TBL.No) corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data is set (set).

In step S330-22, the main CPU 110a sets the opening time in the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the stop symbol data of the special symbol. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S330-23, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special game (first big hit game to tenth big hit game) based on the big winning opening open / close control table set in step S330-17, and the big hit game. Set the opening specification command according to the type of (special game state) in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the opening designation command of the special game is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S330-24, the main CPU 110a sets the round number display data for displaying the round number of the jackpot game (LED lighting) on the round number display 66 in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the round number display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800 to the round number display 66. The number of rounds is displayed.

In step S330-25, the main CPU 110a sets the right-handed display data for causing the right-handed first display 67 to display the right-handed display (LED lighting) in a predetermined processing area, and performs the special symbol stop processing this time. finish. As a result, when the right-handed display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the right-handed first display is displayed. Right-handed display is performed on 67.

On the other hand, in step S330-26, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special symbol special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 25, and ends the current special symbol stop processing. do.

(Big hit game processing of the main control board)
The jackpot game process will be described with reference to FIG. 30. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S340-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not it is currently opening. Specifically, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the round game count (R) storage area. If it is determined that the opening is currently in progress (S340-1: Yes), the process is transferred to step S340-2, and if it is determined that the opening is not currently in progress (S340-1: No), step S340-6 Move the process to.

In step S340-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening time set in step S330-14 has elapsed. If it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S340-2: Yes), the process is transferred to step S340-3, and if it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the current jackpot game process is terminated. ..

In step S340-3, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot game start process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of round games (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area to update (R ← R + 1). Here, since the round game has not been performed even once, "1" is stored in the round game number (R) storage area.

In step S340-4, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area (K) to update (K ← K + 1). Here, since the large winning opening 50 has not been opened yet, “1” is stored in the open number (K) storage area. Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the large winning opening 50, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 50 is opened. Further, with reference to the large winning opening opening mode determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the large winning opening 50 is special based on the current number of round games (R) and opening number (K). Set in the game timer counter.

In step S340-5, the main CPU 110a sets the round designation command corresponding to the round game count (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Here, since it is the first round of the jackpot game, the round designation command for the first open round is set. When this process is completed, the jackpot game process this time is completed.

In step S340-6, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the large winning opening 50 is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. When it is determined that the large winning opening 50 is open (S340-6: Yes), the process is transferred to step S340-7, and when it is determined that the large winning opening 50 is not open (S340-6: No). ), The process is transferred to step S340-9.

In step S340-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition of the large winning opening is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the large winning opening ball entry counter (C) has reached the specified number (9), or the opening time in the current number of opening times (K) has elapsed (special game timer counter = 0). Applies to. When it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied (S340-7: Yes), the process is transferred to step S340-8, and when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S340-7: No). , End this jackpot game process.

In step S340-8, the main CPU 110a performs an interval (large winning opening closing) process. Specifically, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization stop data for converting the opening / closing member 51 of the large winning opening 50 into the closed state is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the large winning opening 50 is closed. Further, with reference to the large winning opening opening mode determination table set in step S330-21, the closing time of the large winning opening 50 is special based on the current number of round games (R) and opening number (K). Set in the game timer counter. When this process is completed, the jackpot game process this time is completed.

In step S340-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the interval (large winning opening is closed) is currently in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. If it is determined that the interval (large winning opening is closed) (S340-9: Yes), the process is transferred to step S340-10, and if it is determined that the interval (large winning opening is closed) is not in progress (S340-9). : No), the process is transferred to step S340-19.

In step S340-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the large winning opening 50 has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special game timer counter is "0". When it is determined that the closing time has ended (S340-10: Yes), the process is transferred to step S340-11, and when it is determined that the closing time has not ended (S340-10: No), this time. End the jackpot game process.

In step S340-11, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not this round has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening entry counter (C) has reached the specified number (9) or the number of openings (K) has reached the maximum number of openings. When it is determined that the current round is completed (S340-11: Yes), the process is transferred to step S340-13, and when it is determined that the current round is not completed (S340-12: No), the process is transferred to step S340-13. , Step S340-12.

In step S340-12, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the large winning opening 50, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 50 is opened. Further, with reference to the large winning opening opening mode determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the large winning opening 50 is special based on the current number of round games (R) and opening number (K). Set in the game timer counter. When this process is completed, the jackpot game process this time is completed.

In step S340-13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the final round is over. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of round games (R) stored in the number of round games (R) storage area has reached the maximum number of round games of the current jackpot game. If it is determined that the final round is over (S340-13: Yes), the process is transferred to step S340-17, and if it is determined that the final round is not over (S340-13: No), step S340 is performed. Move the process to -14.

In step S340-14, the main CPU 110a performs a round data setting process. Specifically, "0" is set in the open count (K) storage area and the large winning opening number of balls (C) storage area, and the round game count (R) is stored in the round game count (R). Is added by "1" and updated (R ← R + 1).

In step S340-15, the main CPU 110a performs a large winning opening opening process. Specifically, first, "1" is added to the number of times of opening (K) stored in the number of times of opening (K) storage area (K) to update (K ← K + 1). Further, in order to open the opening / closing member 51 of the large winning opening 50, the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b is set. As a result, the opening / closing member 51 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the large winning opening 50 is opened. Further, with reference to the large winning opening opening mode determination table set in step S330-21, the opening time of the large winning opening 50 is special based on the current number of round games (R) and opening number (K). Set in the game timer counter.

In step S340-16, the main CPU 110a sets the round designation command corresponding to the round game count (R) stored in the round game count (R) storage area in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the round designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process is completed, the jackpot game process this time is completed.

In step S340-17, the main CPU 110a performs an ending transition process. Specifically, "0" is set in the open number (K) storage area, the large winning opening number of balls (C) storage area, and the round game number (R) storage area to clear the value of each storage area. In addition, the ending time is set in the special game timer counter based on the jackpot game control table and the special figure stop symbol data. The special game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S340-18, the main CPU 110a sets the ending designation command corresponding to the special figure stop symbol data in the transmission data storage area for effect. As a result, the ending designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. When this process is completed, the jackpot game process this time is completed.

In step S340-19, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending is currently in progress. If the ending is in progress (S340-19: Yes), step S
If the process shifts to 340-20 and the ending is not in progress (S340-19: No), the jackpot game process this time is terminated.

In step S340-20, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed. When it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (S340-20: Yes), the process proceeds to step S340-21, and when it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (S340-20: No), this time. End the jackpot game process.

In step S340-21, the main CPU 110a sets 4 in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the big hit game end processing shown in FIG. 31, and ends the current big hit game processing.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game end process will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game end process on the main control board 110.

In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol stop symbol data storage area and the game state setting table.

In step S350-2, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, when the special figure stop symbol data is for setting the high probability game flag, the high probability flag is set in the high probability flag storage area. If the special figure stop symbol data does not set the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game flag is not set in the high-probability flag storage area or the high-probability game flag storage area is cleared. For example, if the special symbol stop symbol data is "10", the high probability flag is set in the high probability game flag storage area, and if the special symbol stop symbol data is "14", the high probability game flag is not set.

In step S350-3, the main CPU 110a performs a high-probability game number setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, when the special figure stop symbol data sets the high probability game number, the remaining fluctuation number (X) storage area of the high probability game state. Is set to a predetermined number of times. For example, if the special symbol stop symbol data is "10", 10000 is set in the remaining number of fluctuations (X) storage area of the high probability gaming state, and if the special symbol stop symbol data is "14", the high probability game is played. Remaining number of fluctuations in the state (X) Nothing is set or 0 is set in the storage area.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a performs the time saving game flag setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, when the special figure stop symbol data is for setting the time-saving game flag, the time-saving game flag is set in the time-saving game flag storage area, and the special figure stop symbol data is set. If the figure stop symbol data does not set the time-saving game flag, the time-saving game flag is not set in the time-saving game flag storage area or the time-saving game flag storage area is cleared. In the embodiment of the present invention, the time saving game flag is set regardless of any special figure stop symbol data.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a performs a time-saving game number setting process. Specifically, referring to the game state setting table shown in FIG. 11, when the special figure stop symbol data sets the number of times of the time-saving game, it is predetermined in the remaining number of fluctuations (J) storage area of the time-saving game state. Set the number of times. For example, if the special symbol stop symbol data is "10", 10000 is set in the remaining number of fluctuations (J) storage area of the time saving game state, and if the special symbol stop symbol data is "14", the time saving gaming state is set. Remaining number of fluctuations (J) Set 100 in the storage area.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a confirms the game state with reference to the high-probability game flag storage area and the time-saving game flag storage area, and issues a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state to the transmission data storage area for production. Set to. As a result, the game state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S350-7, the main CPU 110a sets the round number erasing data for erasing the display (LED lighting) of the round number display 66 (LED turning off) in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the round number erasure data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the round number display 66 The display is erased.

In step S350-8, the main CPU 110a sets "0" in the special figure special electric processing data, prepares to move the processing to the special symbol storage determination processing shown in FIG. 25, and ends the current jackpot game end processing.

(Fundamental control processing of the main control board)
FIG. 32 will be used to explain the Fuzu Fuden control process. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a general-purpose electric power control process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S401, the CPU 110a loads the Fuzu Fuden processing data, refers to the branch destination address from the Fuzu Fuden processing data loaded in step S402, and is normal if the Fuzu Fuden processing data = 0. The process is transferred to the symbol variation process (step S410), and if the normal figure and normal electric processing data = 1, the process is transferred to the auxiliary game process (step S420).

As will be described later, this "Fuzu Fuden processing data" is set in each subroutine of the Fuzu Fuden control processing as needed, so the subroutines required for the game are processed as appropriate. It becomes.

In the normal symbol variation processing in step S410, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process, a normal symbol determination process for determining a normal symbol to be stopped and displayed, a normal symbol variation pattern determination process for determining the variation time of the normal symbol, and the like. The details of this normal symbol variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

In the auxiliary game process of step S420, the main CPU 110a performs a process of controlling the auxiliary game (hit game). The details of this auxiliary game process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

(Ordinary symbol fluctuation processing of main control board)
The normal symbol variation processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process on the main control board 110.

First, in step S410-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation display of the normal symbol is in progress. When the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is being performed (normal symbol time counter ≠ 0) (step S410-1: Yes), the process is transferred to step S410-12, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is not being performed (step S410-1). : No), the process is transferred to step S410-2.

In step S410-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area that stores the normal symbol hold number is 1 or more. When it is determined that the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is 1 or more (S410-2: Yes), the process is transferred to step S410-3, and the value of the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is set. If it is determined that is not 1 or more (S410-2: No), the current normal symbol variation processing is terminated.

In step S410-3, the main CPU 110a is updated (G ← G + 1) by subtracting “1” from the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area.

In step S410-4, the main CPU 110a shifts the data stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area subtracted in step S410-2. Specifically, each data stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit in the normal symbol storage area is shifted to the previous storage unit. Here, the data stored in the first storage unit is shifted to the determination storage area (0th storage unit). At this time, the data stored in the first storage unit is written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit), and the data already written in the determination storage area (0th storage unit) is normally stored in the symbol hold. It will be erased from the area. As a result, the hit determination random value, the hit symbol determination random value, and the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination random value used in the previous game are deleted.

In step S410-5, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol storage designation command in the effect transmission data storage area and transmits it to the effect control board 130.

In step S410-6, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol hold display data in a predetermined processing area.

In step S410-7, the main CPU 110a performs a hit determination process. Specifically, the current time-saving game state and the hit determination random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area are collated with the hit determination table of the normal symbol shown in FIG. 15 (a). Judgment as to whether or not it is a hit (a lottery for winning a normal symbol) is performed.

In step S410-8, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol determination process. Specifically, FIG. 16 (FIG. 16) shows the current time-saving game state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-7, and the random value for stopping the normal figure stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol hold storage area. The type of the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) is determined by collating with the stop symbol determination table of the normal symbol shown in b), and the normal symbol is set in the normal symbol stop symbol storage area.

In step S410-9, the main CPU 110a identifies the normal map designation command based on the normal map stop symbol data determined in step S410-8, and sets the specified normal map designation command in the transmission data storage area for effect. do. As a result, the general map designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S410-10, the main CPU 110a performs a normal map fluctuation pattern determination process. Specifically, FIG. 10 (FIG. 10) shows the current time-saving gaming state, the result of the hit determination in step S410-7, and the normal symbol variation pattern random value stored in the 0th storage unit of the normal symbol reservation storage area. The fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol is determined by collating with the fluctuation pattern determination table of the normal symbol shown in c).

In step S410-11, the main CPU 110a specifies a normal map fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the normal symbol determined in step S410-10, and uses the specified normal map fluctuation pattern designation command. Set in the transmission data storage area for production. As a result, the normal map fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S410-12, the main CPU 110a sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol determined in step S410-10 in the normal symbol time counter. The normal symbol time counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

In step S410-13, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol variation display data for causing the normal symbol first display 62 to display the variation of the normal symbol (blinking of the LED). As a result, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the normal symbol first display is performed. The fluctuation display of the vessel 62 is started.

In step S410-14, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol time counter set in step S410-11 is "0". When it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has ended (S410-14: Yes), the process is transferred to step S410-15, and when it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has not ended (S410-14: Yes). In No), the normal symbol variation processing this time is terminated.

In step S410-15, the main CPU 110a sets the normal symbol stop display data for causing the normal symbol first display 62 to stop and display the normal symbol determined in step S410-8 in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S700, and the created data is output in step S800, so that the normal symbol first display is performed. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the vessel 62, and the player is notified of the determination result of the lottery.

In step S410-16, the main CPU 110a sets a normal symbol determination command in the effect transmission data storage area. As a result, the normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In step S410-17, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol is a hit stop symbol. If it is a hit stop symbol (S410-17: Yes), the process is transferred to step S410-18, and if it is not a hit stop symbol (S410-17: No), the current normal symbol change process is terminated.

In step S410-18, the main CPU 110a sets "1" in the normal drawing data and prepares to shift the processing to the auxiliary game processing shown in FIG. 34.

In step S410-19, the main CPU 110a performs an auxiliary game start process. In the auxiliary game start process, the main CPU 110a first sets the opening mode determination table of the second starting port of the main RAM 110c, and sets "1" in the opening count (S) stored in the open count (S) storage area. Add and update (S ← S + 1). Here, since the second starting port 47 has not been opened even once, “1” is stored in the opening number (S) storage area. Then, in order to open the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47, energization data for energizing the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b is set. As a result, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 47 is opened. Further, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S) with reference to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port. When this process is completed, the normal symbol variation process this time is completed. The auxiliary game timer counter is decremented by 1 every 4 ms in step S110.

(Auxiliary game processing of the main control board)
The auxiliary game processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the auxiliary game processing on the main control board 110.

In step S420-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the second starting port is currently open. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the energization data for energizing the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b is set. When it is determined that the second starting port 47 is open (S420-1: Yes), the process is transferred to step S420-2, and when it is determined that the second starting port 47 is not open (S420-1). : No), the process is transferred to step S420-7.

In step S420-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the opening end condition of the second starting port is satisfied. Specifically, the value of the second start port entry counter (L) has reached the specified number (10), or the opening time in the current number of opening times (S) has elapsed (auxiliary game timer counter = 0). ) Applies. When it is determined that the opening end condition is satisfied (S420-2: Yes), the process is transferred to step S420-3, and when it is determined that the opening end condition is not satisfied (S420-2: No). , End the auxiliary game processing this time.

In step S420-3, the main CPU 110a performs the second starting port closing process. Specifically, the data for stopping the energization of the second starting port opening / closing solenoid for converting the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 into the closed state is set. As a result, the movable member 48 is converted from the open state to the closed state, and the second starting port 47 is closed. Further, referring to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S410-19, the closing time of the second starting port 47 is set to the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S). set. When this process is completed, the auxiliary game process this time is completed.

In step S420-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied. The auxiliary game end condition is that the normal electric operation number (D) is the number of times the second starting port 7 is opened in advance, or the value of the second starting port entry counter (L) is a specified number (10). (Individual) has been reached. Then, when the main CPU 110a determines that the auxiliary game end condition is satisfied (S420-4: Yes), the process shifts to step S420-5, and when it is determined that the auxiliary game end condition is not satisfied (S420). -4: No) ends the auxiliary game process.

In step S420-5, the main CPU 110a performs the auxiliary game end process. Specifically, "0" is set in the storage area for the number of times the second start port is opened (S) and the storage area for the second start port entry counter (L) to clear the value in each storage area.

In step S420-6, the main CPU 110a sets 0 in the normal symbol processing data and prepares to shift the processing to the normal symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 33. When this process is completed, the auxiliary game process this time is completed.

In step S420-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the closing time of the second starting port has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary game timer counter is "0". When it is determined that the closing time of the second starting port has ended (S420-7: Yes), the process is transferred to step S420-8, and when it is determined that the closing time of the second starting port has not ended (S420-7: Yes). In S420-7: No), the auxiliary game processing this time is terminated.

In step S420-8, the main CPU 110a performs the second starting port opening process. Specifically, the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data for energizing the second starting port opening / closing solenoid 48b in order to open the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 is set. As a result, the movable member 48 is converted from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting port 47 is opened. Further, with reference to the opening mode determination table of the second starting port set in step S410-17, the opening time of the second starting port 47 is set in the auxiliary game timer counter based on the current number of times of opening (S). do.

(Data creation process of main control board)
The data creation process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a data creation process on the main control board 110.

In step S700-1, the main CPU 110a opens or closes the big winning opening open / close solenoid 51b based on the big winning opening open / close solenoid energization start data or the big winning opening open / close solenoid energization stop data set in the big hit game process. Create drive control data corresponding to the drive signal for driving.

In step S700-2, the main CPU 110a opens or opens the second start port opening / closing solenoid 48b based on the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization start data or the second start port opening / closing solenoid energization stop data set in the auxiliary game process. Create drive control data corresponding to the drive signal for driving to the closed state.

In step S700-3, the main CPU 110a is the first special symbol first display 60 or the first display based on the special symbol variation display data or the special symbol stop display data set in the special symbol storage determination process or the special symbol variation process. 2 Create display control data for the special symbol 1st display corresponding to the special symbol display signal for turning on, blinking, or turning off the LED of the special symbol 1st display 61.

In step S700-4, the main CPU 110a turns on, blinks, or turns off the LED of the normal symbol first display 62 based on the normal symbol fluctuation display data or the normal symbol stop display data set in the normal symbol variation processing. The display control data for the normal symbol 1st display corresponding to the normal symbol display signal of is created.

In step S700-5, the main CPU 110a is set by the first start port detection signal input process, the second start port detection signal input process, or the special symbol storage determination process, and the special symbol hold display data (first special symbol hold display data). , 2nd special symbol hold display data), a special symbol hold display signal for turning on, blinking, or turning off the LED of the 1st special symbol hold 1st display 63 or the 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 64. Create display control data for the special symbol hold 1st display corresponding to.

In step S700-6, the main CPU 110a turns on, blinks, or turns off the LED of the normal symbol hold first display 65 based on the normal symbol hold display data set in the winning gate detection signal input process or the normal symbol variation process. The display control data for the normal symbol hold 1st display corresponding to the normal symbol hold display signal for making the normal symbol hold is created.

In step S700-7, the main CPU 110a turns on or off the LED of the round number display 66 based on the round number display data or the round number erasure data set in the special symbol stop process or the jackpot game end process. Create display control data for the round number display corresponding to the round number display signal.

In step S700-8, the main CPU 110a performs a right-handed display for turning on or off the LED of the right-handed first display 67 based on the right-handed display data or the right-handed erase data set in the special symbol stop processing. Create display control data for the right-handed first display corresponding to the signal.

In step S700-9, the main CPU 110a creates display control data for the high-probability game state display for lighting the LED of the high-probability game state display 68 if the game state at the time of power restoration is the high-probability game state. do.

In step S700-10, if the game state at the time of power restoration is the time-saving game state, the main CPU 110a creates display control data for the time-saving game state display for lighting the LED of the time-saving game state display 69.

In step S700-11, the main CPU 110a generates external signal output data for outputting external information data (game information), information related to an abnormality, RAM clear execution information (security signal), and the like to the outside of the game machine. Performs signal output data creation processing.

Next, the output control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an output control process on the main control board 110.

In step S800-1, the main CPU 110a outputs various drive control data created in the above steps S700-1 to S700-2 in order to drive the large winning opening opening / closing solenoid 51b and the second starting opening opening / closing solenoid 48b. Perform port output processing. Further, external signal output data such as external information data (game information) created in step S700-11, information related to an abnormality, and RAM clear execution information (security signal) is output to the game information output terminal board 108.

In step S800-2, the main CPU 110a is the first special symbol first display 60, the second special symbol first display 61, the normal symbol first display 62, the first special symbol hold first display 63, and the first. 2 LEDs for the special symbol hold 1st display 64, the normal symbol hold 1st display 65, the round number display 66, the right-handed 1st display 67, the high-probability game state display 68, and the time-saving game state display 69. Is to be turned on, off, or blinked, an output process for a display device that outputs various display control data created in steps S700-3 to S700-10 is performed.

In step S800-3, the main CPU 110a transmits a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, and sends a command set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Performs command output processing to be transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Explanation of command)
In the flowchart of the main control board 110 described above, the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. 37 and 38 are diagrams showing the types of commands transmitted from the main control board 110 to the effect control board 130.

The "effect symbol designation command" indicates the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E0H", and DATA information is set according to the type of special symbol. Since the type of the special symbol eventually determines the type of the jackpot and the high-probability gaming state, it can be said that the effect symbol designation command indicates the type of the jackpot and the gaming state.

In this effect symbol designation command, when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, the effect symbol designation command corresponding to the special symbol determined when the variation display of the special symbol is started in step S311-10 is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the effect symbol designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

This first special symbol storage designation command is controlled by the first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the reserved storage number when the reserved storage number stored in the first special symbol holding number (U1) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area increases or decreases in step S230-11 or step S310-7, the number corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease is corresponding. 1 A special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the first special symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the second special symbol holding number (U2) storage area, "MODE" is set to "E2H", and the number of reserved storages is set. DATA information is set according to.

This second special symbol storage designation command is controlled by the second special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the reserved storage number when the reserved storage number stored in the second special symbol storage number (U2) storage area is switched. It is transmitted to the substrate 130. Specifically, when the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area increases or decreases in step S240-17 or step S310-7, the number corresponding to the reserved storage number after the increase or decrease is corresponding. 2 The special symbol storage designation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the second special symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol memory designation command" and the "second special symbol memory designation command" are collectively referred to as a "special symbol memory designation command".

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E3H" and "DATA" is set to "00H". This special symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 60 or the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61 in step S320-3, the special symbol confirmation command is used for producing the main RAM 110c. Set in the transmission data storage area. Immediately after that, the special symbol determination command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, "MODE" is set to "E3H", and "DATA" is set to "01H".
This normal symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 62 in step S410-14, the normal symbol confirmation command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol determination command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the first special symbol first display 60, and "MODE" is set to "E6H", and various types are used. The DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern of.

This first special symbol variation pattern designation command is for the first special symbol corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol when the variation display of the special symbol of the first special symbol first display 60 is started. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S312-6, the first special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the first special symbol variation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol in the second special symbol first display 61, and "MODE" is set to "E7H", and various types are used. The DATA information is set according to the fluctuation pattern of.

This second special symbol variation pattern designation command is a second special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern determined when the special symbol variation display of the second special symbol first display 61 is started. The pattern designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, in step S312-6, the second special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the second special symbol variation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" are collectively referred to as a "variation pattern designation command".

The "starting prize designation command" is information for determining the result of the big hit lottery in advance, and if it is based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 45, "MODE" is set to "E8H". If it is based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47, "MODE" is set to "E9H", and DATA information is set according to various winning information.

In this start winning designation command, when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 45 or the second starting opening 47, the starting winning winning designation command corresponding to the determined starting winning information is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Specifically, in step S230-10 or S240-16, the start winning designation command corresponding to the determined winning information is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the start winning designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of jackpot rounds according to the types of jackpots, "MODE" is set to "EAH", and DATA information is set according to the number of jackpot rounds. ..

In this round designation command, when the jackpot round is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of started rounds is transmitted to the effect control board 130. Specifically, when the opening / closing member 51 of the large winning opening 50 is opened in step S340-5 or step S340-16, a round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds when the opening / closing member 51 is opened is transmitted for directing the main RAM 110c. Set in the data storage area. Immediately after that, the large winning opening opening designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "opening designation command" indicates that various jackpot games (special game states) are started, "MODE" is set in "EBH", and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot. There is.

In this opening designation command, when various jackpots start, the opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game process in step S330-23, the opening designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the opening designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "ending designation command" indicates that various jackpots have been completed, "MODE" is set by "ECH", and DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot.

In this ending designation command, when various jackpots are completed, the ending designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Specifically, at the start of the jackpot game end process in step S340-18, the ending designation command corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the ending designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol first display 62. "MODE" is set to "EDH", and the DATA is set according to the type of the ordinary symbol. Information is set.

In this normal map designation command, when various normal symbols are determined and the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the normal map designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Specifically, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started in step S410-9, the normal symbol designation command corresponding to the determined normal symbol is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal map designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol fluctuation pattern designation command" indicates the fluctuation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol first display 62, and "MODE" is set to "EEH" to match the fluctuation time of various ordinary symbols. DATA information is set.

This normal symbol fluctuation pattern specification command is a command for specifying the normal symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to the determined fluctuation time of the normal symbol when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol of the normal symbol first display 62 is started. It is sent to 130. Specifically, when the variation display of the normal symbol is started in step S410-11, the normal symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation time of the normal symbol is the transmission data storage area for effect of the main RAM 110c. Is set to. Immediately after that, the normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "normal symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved storages stored in the normal symbol holding number (G) storage area, "MODE" is set to "EFH", and DATA is set according to the number of reserved storages. Information is set.

In this normal symbol storage designation command, when the reserved storage number stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area is switched, the normal symbol storage designation command corresponding to the hold storage number is transmitted to the effect control board 130. .. Specifically, when the value stored in the normal symbol hold number (G) storage area increases or decreases in step S14, step S250-7 or step S410-5, it corresponds to the number of hold storages after the increase or decrease. The normal symbol storage designation command to be used is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the normal symbol storage designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "game state designation command" indicates whether the game is in the time-saving game state or the non-time-saving game state. If "MODE" is set to "F1H" and the non-time-saving game state is set, "DATA" is set to "DATA". It is set to "00H", and "DATA" is set to "01H" in the short-time game state.

In this game state specification command, a game state specification command corresponding to the game state is transmitted to the effect control board 130 at the start of the change of the special symbol, the end of the change of the special symbol, the start of the big hit game, and the end of the big hit. ..

Specifically, when the variation display of the special symbol is started in step S310-14, the high-probability game flag, the number of high-probability games, the time-saving game flag, and the number of time-saving games (J) are changed in step S330-13. When there is a possibility that the high-probability game flag, the high-probability game count, the time-saving game flag, and the time-saving game number (J) are set in step S350-6, the game state corresponding to the current game state is set. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the game state designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "RAM clear designation command", "power-on designation command", and "power recovery designation command" indicate whether or not the power-on to the game machine 1 initializes the main RAM 110c. "MODE" is set to "F2H", "DATA" is set to "00H" and "01H" when the main RAM 110c is initialized, and "DATA" is set when the main RAM 110c is not initialized. It is set to "02H".

The RAM clear designation command, power-on designation command, and power recovery designation command are RAM clear designation commands, power-on designation commands, or power recovery designations depending on whether or not the main RAM 110c is initialized when the power is turned on to the game machine 1. The command is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Specifically, the RAM clear designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch is turned on when the power is turned on (step S8). The power-on designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch is turned on again and the information stored in the main RAM 101c is cleared (step S12). The power restoration designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the RAM clear switch is not turned on when the power is turned on (step S7).

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, "MODE" is set to "F3H", and "DATA" information is set according to the type of error.

This error designation command is used when a game ball is awarded to the second starting port 47, when it is detected by the magnetic detection switch 53a or the radio wave detection switch 54a, when it is detected by the prize confirmation detection switch 52a, or when the glass frame 4 is opened. When the lower tray 12 is full, when a payout abnormality occurs, or the like, an error designation command corresponding to the error type is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

Specifically, when a magnetic / radio wave abnormality is determined in step S600, an abnormal winning is determined in S260, or an illegal entry is determined in S240-7, the glass frame 4 on the payout control board 120 is used. When it is detected that the lower tray is full, the lower tray 12 is full, or the game ball for paying out is insufficient, an error designation command corresponding to the error type is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that the error generated in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and "MODE" is set to "F4H", and the information of "DATA" is set according to the type of the resolved error. Is set.

In this error cancellation designation command, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the effect control board 130 when the glass frame 4 is closed, when the lower tray 12 is filled, when the payout abnormality is resolved, and the like.

Specifically, when the payout control board 120 detects that the glass frame 4 is closed, the lower tray 12 is full, and the shortage of game balls for payout is resolved, error cancellation corresponding to the type of error canceled is detected. The designated command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. Immediately after that, the error designation command set in the effect transmission data storage area in step S800-3 is transmitted to the effect control board 130.

(Main processing of production control unit 130m)
The processing executed by the sub CPU 130a in the effect control unit 130m will be described. First, the main process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the main process in the effect control unit 130 m.

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 180, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition prohibiting timer interruption in step S1000, and performs initialization processing in step S1001. In this process, the sub CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub ROM 130b in response to the power being turned on, initializes the flags and the like stored in the sub RAM 130c, and performs processing such as initial setting.

The sub CPU 130a sets the interrupt permission that permits the timer interrupt in step S1002, and performs the sub random number update process in step S1003. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various random value values stored in the sub RAM 130c. After that, the process of step S1003 is repeated until the predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of effect control unit 130m)
A timer interrupt process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process in the effect control unit 130 m. The reset clock pulse generation circuit provided in the effect control unit 130 m generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds), so that the timer interrupt process described below is executed.

In step S1100, the sub CPU 120a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area.

In step S1200, the sub CPU 130a performs a command analysis process. In this process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of analyzing the command stored in the receive buffer of the sub RAM 130c. A specific description of the command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42.

When the effect control unit 130m receives a command transmitted from the main control board 110, a command reception interrupt process of the effect control unit 130m (not shown) occurs, and the received command is stored in the reception buffer. After that, the analysis process of the command received in step S1200 is performed.

In step S1300, the sub CPU 130a performs a timer update process for updating various timer counters used in the effect control unit 130m.

In step S1400, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the signals of the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a are input, and when the signals of the effect button detection switch 17a and the like are input, the image control unit 140 Performs an effect input control process for transmitting an effect button signal or the like to.

In step S1500, the sub CPU 130a includes the special symbol second display 80, 81, the normal symbol second display 82, the special symbol hold second display 83, 84, the normal symbol hold second display 85, and right-handed. Data creation processing of various display control data to be output to the second display 87 is performed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 66.

In step S1600, the sub CPU 130a performs data output processing. In this process, a display output process for outputting a signal such as display control data created in S700 is performed. It also performs command output processing to output the command set in the transmission buffer of the main RAM 110c to another board. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 67.

In step S1700, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step S1100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a.

(Command analysis processing of the effect control unit 130m)
The command analysis process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a command analysis process (1) in the effect control unit 130 m. Further, FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a command analysis process (2) in the effect control unit 130 m. The command analysis process (2) in FIG. 42 is performed following the command analysis process (1) in FIG. 41.

First, in step S1201, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not there is a command in the receive buffer, and confirms whether or not the command has been received. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1202 if there is a command in the receive buffer. On the other hand, in this process, if there is no command in the receive buffer, the sub CPU 130a ends the command analysis process this time.

In step S1202, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the receive buffer is a customer waiting state designation command, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1203. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1204 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a customer waiting state specification command.

In step S1203, the sub CPU 130a performs a customer waiting effect process. Specifically, 30 seconds after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demo image is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, and power is being saved. Display images. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

In step S1204, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol storage designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol storage designation command, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1205. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1206 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a special symbol storage designation command.

In step S1205, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the special figure holding storage number from the special symbol storage designation command, and sets the analyzed special figure holding storage number in the special figure holding storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. I do. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 43. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

In step S1206, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a start winning designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the receive buffer is a start prize designation command, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1207. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1208 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a start prize designation command.

In step S1207, the sub CPU 130a performs a hold icon display mode determination process for determining the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 based on the content of the start winning designation command. Specifically, the result of the fluctuation display of the special symbol corresponding to the command and the fluctuation pattern are specified from the start prize designation command, and the change scenario that changes the display mode of the hold icon according to the expectation of a big hit is determined. do. For example, the hold icon is displayed in white in the normal (default) display mode, blue in the special display mode 1, green in the special display mode 2, and red in the special display mode 3. May be increased in the order of normal display mode (white) <special display mode 1 (blue) <special display mode 2 (green) <special display mode 3 (red).
Then, a hold icon display designation command for displaying the determined hold icon on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

The hold icon display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 displays the hold icon based on the hold icon display designation command.

In step S1208, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an effect symbol designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1209 if the command stored in the receive buffer is an effect symbol designation command. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1210 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not the effect symbol designation command.

In step S1209, the sub CPU 130a performs a stop symbol data determination process for determining the effect symbol 70a to be stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 based on the content of the received effect symbol designation command.

In this stop symbol data determination process, the effect symbol designation command is analyzed to determine the stop symbol data (big hit symbol data, lost symbol data) for identifying the presence / absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot, and the determined stop symbol. The data is set in the stop symbol storage area of the sub RAM 130c. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

In step S1210, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a fluctuation pattern designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the receive buffer is a variable pattern designation command, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1211. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1213 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a variable pattern designation command.

In step S1211, the sub CPU 130a performs a variation effect pattern determination process. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, and sets the effect mode (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern designation command and the effect random value. decide. A specific description of the variation effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 44. Further, a specific description of the variation effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 47.

Then, the sub CPU 130a sets the determined effect pattern in the symbol effect pattern storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and sets the determined effect pattern in the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. In order to transmit, the effect pattern data indicating the effect pattern stored in the effect pattern storage area is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S1212, the sub CPU 130a is a first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, a second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, an audio output device 9, etc., based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S1211. The advance notice effect determination process for determining the advance notice effect to be performed is performed. A specific description of this advance notice effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

In step S1213, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol confirmation command. In this process, if the command stored in the receive buffer is a special symbol determination command, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1214. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1216 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a symbol determination command.

In step S1214, the sub CPU 130a displays the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in order to stop and display the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). The stop designation command for displaying the stop is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the special symbol stop display data for displaying the stop display of the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 (the first). (1) Special symbol stop display data, second special symbol stop display data) is set in a predetermined processing area, and the effect symbol change stop processing is performed. As a result, when the first special symbol stop display data or the second special symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. By doing so, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81.

The stop designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, second special symbol display area DZ2) are stopped and displayed by the image control unit 140 (the first special symbol, the second special symbol). This stop).

In step S1215, the sub CPU 130a performs an effect mode setting process for setting an effect mode for changing the effect mode on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, and the like. .. Here, when the mode change condition such as the number of fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number or the mode change lottery is satisfied, the first effect mode (normal mode) or the second effect mode (MV mode) is satisfied. ) Is set. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated. The first effect mode and the second effect mode are set in the normal gaming state, but may be set in other gaming states.

In step S1216, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol storage designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1217 if the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol storage designation command. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1218 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a normal symbol storage designation command.

In step S1217, the sub CPU 130a analyzes the normal symbol hold storage number from the normal symbol storage designation command, and displays the analyzed normal symbol hold storage number on the normal symbol hold second display 85. Is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600, so that the normal symbol hold second The number of reserved symbols is displayed on the display 85.

In step S1218, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal figure fluctuation pattern designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1219 if the command stored in the receive buffer is a command for specifying a normal figure variation pattern. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1220 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a normal figure fluctuation pattern specification command.

In step S1219, the sub CPU 130a performs a normal figure roulette effect determination performed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, and the sub CPU 130a is a normal symbol second display device. A normal symbol roulette effect determination process is performed in which the normal symbol variation display data for causing the 83 to display the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (blinking of the LED) is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the normal symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600, so that the normal symbol second display is displayed. The fluctuation display of the device 83 is started. The normal figure roulette effect is an effect performed when the time-saving game state is the non-time-saving game state. Specifically, the stop symbol data of the normal symbol becomes the normal symbol 1 and the auxiliary game is performed. It is a preliminary production that makes the player expect that. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

In step S1220, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol determination command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1221 if the command stored in the receive buffer is a normal symbol determination command. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1223 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a normal symbol confirmation command.

In step S1221, the normal symbol fluctuation stop processing for setting the normal symbol stop display data for stopping and displaying the normal symbol second display 82 in a predetermined processing area is performed. As a result, when the normal symbol stop display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600, so that the normal symbol second display is displayed. The normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the vessel 82.

In step S1222, the sub CPU 130a performs a long opening effect execution process for producing that the second starting port 47 is opened longer than usual. In this long open effect execution process, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol data of the normal symbol becomes the normal symbol 1 and the auxiliary game is performed, and the stop symbol data of the normal symbol becomes the normal symbol 1 and the auxiliary game is performed. Perform a long open effect when it is hit. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

In step S1223, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1224 if the command stored in the receive buffer is a game state specification command. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1225 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a game state specification command.

In step S1224, the sub CPU 130a sets the data indicating the game state based on the received game state designation command in the game state storage area in the sub RAM 130c, and the game state based on the received game state designation command is the time-saving gaming state. And, if it is not a special game state (big hit game state), a game state in which right-handed erase data for erasing (LED off) the display (LED on) of the right-handed second display 87 is set in a predetermined processing area. Perform the setting process. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated. As a result, when the right-handed erase data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600, so that the right-handed second display is displayed. The display of 87 is erased.

In step S1225, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the opening designation command for the jackpot. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1226 if the command stored in the receive buffer is an opening designation command. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1227 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not the opening designation command.

In step S1226, the sub CPU 120a performs a jackpot effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot effect pattern. Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 130a determines the jackpot effect mode (big hit effect pattern) based on the opening designation command with reference to the jackpot effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65. A specific description of the jackpot effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, a specific description of the jackpot effect pattern determination table will be described later with reference to FIG. 65. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

In step S1227, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1228 if the command stored in the receive buffer is a round designation command. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1229 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a round designation command.

In step S1228, the sub CPU 130a performs a round effect pattern determination process for determining a round effect pattern. In this round effect pattern determination process, a round effect pattern is determined based on the round designation command and the jackpot effect pattern determined in step S1226, the determined round effect pattern is set in the round effect pattern storage area, and the determined round effect is determined. In order to transmit the pattern information to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, a round effect pattern designation command based on the determined round effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

The round effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. .. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 perform a round effect corresponding to the round effect pattern designation command (round effect pattern) on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. A second image display device (sub-liquid crystal display) 71, an audio output device 9, a panel lighting device 74, a frame lighting device 10, a panel drive device 75, and other production devices are used to execute the command.

In step S1229, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is the ending designation command for the jackpot. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1230 if the command stored in the receive buffer is an ending designation command for a jackpot. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1231 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not the ending designation command.

In step S1230, the sub CPU 130a performs a jackpot end effect pattern determination process for determining a jackpot end effect pattern. In this jackpot end effect pattern determination process, the jackpot end effect pattern is determined based on the ending designation command for the jackpot, the determined hit end effect pattern is set in the effect pattern storage area, and the information of the determined hit end effect pattern is input. In order to transmit to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, a jackpot end effect pattern designation command based on the determined jackpot end effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

The jackpot end effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. To. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the jackpot end effect corresponding to the jackpot end effect pattern designation command (big hit end effect pattern) on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display). ) 70, a second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, an audio output device 9, a panel lighting device 74, a frame lighting device 10, a panel drive device 75, and the like.

In step S1231, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an error specification command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1232 if the command stored in the receive buffer is an error specification command. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1233 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not an error specification command.

In step S1232, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification process for notifying that an error (event) related to the security of the gaming machine 1 has occurred. In this error notification processing, the type of the error specification command, that is, the type of the error that has occurred is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the type of the error that has occurred is determined, and the determined error notification effect is stored in the error notification effect storage area. In order to transmit the information of the set and determined error notification effect to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, the error notification designation command based on the determined error notification effect is transmitted to the sub RAM 130c. Set in the send buffer. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

The error notification designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 perform an error notification effect corresponding to the error notification designation command on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display device. A production device such as a (sub-liquid crystal display) 71, an audio output device 9, a panel lighting device 74, a frame lighting device 10, and a panel drive device 75 is used to execute the command.

In step S1233, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is an error release designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1234 if the command stored in the receive buffer is an error release designation command. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1235 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not an error release designation command.

In step S1234, the sub CPU 130a performs an error notification release process for canceling the error notification that is already being executed. In this error notification release processing, the type of the error release specification command, that is, the type of the resolved error is determined, the error notification effect corresponding to the resolved error type is cleared from the error notification effect storage area, and the resolved error notification is performed. In order to transmit the effect release information to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, the error notification release designation command based on the resolved error notification effect is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. .. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

The error notification release designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. .. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 end the error notification effect corresponding to the error notification cancellation designation command.

In step S1235, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a RAM clear designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1236 if the command stored in the receive buffer is a RAM clear designation command. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1237 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a RAM clear designation command.

In step S1236, the sub CPU 130a performs a RAM clear process for notifying that the RAM clear switch is turned on (pressed) and the power is turned on. In this RAM clear processing, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, and the lamp control unit 160 provide information on the RAM clear notification effect that notifies that the RAM clear is being prepared until the RAM clear is turned ON (pressed) again. The RAM clear notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c for transmission to the drive control unit 170. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

The RAM clear notification designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. .. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the RAM clear effect corresponding to the RAM clear notification designation command on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display. It is executed by a production device such as a device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, an audio output device 9, a panel lighting device 74, a frame lighting device 10, and a panel drive device 75.

In step S1237, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a power-on designation command. In this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1238 if the command stored in the receive buffer is a power-on designation command. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1239 if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a power-on designation command.

In step S1238, the sub CPU 130a performs a power-on process for notifying that the RAM clear switch is turned on again and the information stored in the main RAM 101c is cleared. In this power-on process, the RAM is cleared and the information of the power-on effect for notifying that the power is turned on is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, so that the power supply is supplied. The input notification designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

The power-on notification designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. .. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the power-on effect corresponding to the power-on notification designation command on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image. It is executed by a production device such as a device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, a sound output device 9, a panel lighting device 74, a frame lighting device 10, and a panel drive device 75.

In step S1239, the sub CPU 130a confirms whether or not the command stored in the receive buffer is a power recovery designation command. In this process, if the command stored in the receive buffer is a power recovery designation command, the sub CPU 130a shifts the process to step S1240. On the other hand, in this process, the sub CPU 130a ends the current effect control unit command analysis process if the command stored in the receive buffer is not a power recovery designation command.

In step S1240, the sub CPU 130a performs a power restoration process for notifying that the RAM clear switch is not turned on (pressed) and the power is turned on (power restoration). In this power restoration process, the information of the power restoration effect for notifying that the power is being restored is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170, so that the power restoration notification designation command is used. Is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process is completed, the command analysis process of the effect control unit this time is terminated.

The power restoration designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 perform the power restoration effect corresponding to the power restoration designation command by the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display device. A production device such as a (sub-liquid crystal display) 71, an audio output device 9, a panel lighting device 74, a frame lighting device 10, and a panel drive device 75 is used to execute the operation.

(Special figure hold memory update processing of the production control unit)
With reference to FIG. 43, the special figure hold storage update process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the special figure hold storage update process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, in step S1205-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the content of the special symbol storage designation command determined to have been received in step S1204, and in step S1205-2, the special symbol storage designation command confirmed in step S1205-1. The number of special symbol reservations is set in the special symbol reservation storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c based on the contents of.

In step S1205-3, the sub CPU 130a displays the number of first special symbol hold or the number of second special symbol hold on the first special symbol hold second display 83 or the second special symbol hold second display 84 (LED). The first special symbol hold display data or the second special symbol hold display data for lighting or blinking) is set in a predetermined processing area. As a result, when the first special symbol hold display data or the second special symbol hold display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600. By doing so, the first special symbol hold number or the second special symbol hold number is displayed on the first special symbol hold second display 83 or the second special symbol hold second display 84.

In step S1205-4, the sub CPU 130a is the first hold number display area SH1.
Alternatively, in order to display the first hold number or the second hold number in the second hold number display area SH2, the first hold number or the second hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 or the second hold number display area SH2. The special symbol hold number display specification command for displaying is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and the current special symbol hold storage update process is terminated.

The special symbol hold number display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 causes the first reserved number display area SH1 or the second reserved number display area SH2 to display the first reserved number or the second reserved number. If the power restoration effect is in progress, the first hold number or the second hold number is restored and displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 or the second hold number display area SH2 after a predetermined time has elapsed.

(Variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit)
A variation effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a variation effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, in step S1211-1, the sub CPU 130a stores the variation pattern designation command determined to have been received in step S1210 in the variation pattern designation command area of the effect information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. That is, the variation pattern specification command stored in the effect information storage area up to that point is overwritten by the new variation pattern specification command.

In step S1211-2, the sub CPU 130a confirms the content of the variation pattern designation command stored in step S1211-1 and acquires the variation effect pattern determination random number value in step S1213-1.

In step S1214-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern designation command is due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 45. If it is due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 45 (S1211-4: Yes), the process is transferred to step S121-5. On the other hand, if it is not due to the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 45 (S1211-4: No), the process is transferred to step S121-9.

In step S121-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires the current effect mode information set in the effect mode setting process of step S1215.

In step S121-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the effect mode information acquired in step S121-5 is the effect mode 1 (normal mode). When the effect mode information is the effect mode 1 (normal mode) (S1211-6: Yes), the process is transferred to step S1211-7. On the other hand, when the effect mode information is not the effect mode 1 (normal mode) (MV mode described later) (S121-6: No), the process is transferred to step S121-8.

In step S121-7, the sub CPU 130a selects the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 1 shown in FIG. 45, and in step S121-8, the sub CPU 130a selects the variation effect pattern for the effect mode 2 shown in FIG. The determination table is selected, and in step S121-9, the sub CPU 130a selects the variation effect pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in FIG. 47. The variable effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 1, the variable effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 2, and the variable effect pattern determination table for the second starting port are stored in the sub RAM 130c. 45 to 47 will be described later.

In step S121-10, the sub CPU 130a determines the variation effect pattern. Specifically, the stop symbol data stored in the stop symbol storage area in step S1209, the random value for determining the variation effect pattern acquired in step S1213-1 are collated with the selected variation effect pattern determination table. , The variation effect pattern is determined according to the selection rate set in the variation effect pattern determination table, and the determined variation effect pattern is stored in the variation effect pattern information storage area.

The variable effect pattern includes the time of the variable effect, the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the presence / absence of the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, the presence / absence of the effect button effect, the content of the effect button effect, the effect development configuration, and the like. The components are associated. The variation effect pattern of the variation effect in the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is composed of a display mode of the variation display of the effect symbol, a character, and the like. The display mode related to the object image and the background image is also associated as a component of the variation effect.

In step S121-11, the sub CPU 130a specifies the variation effect pattern designation command corresponding to the determined variation effect pattern, and sets the specified variation effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

The variation effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. .. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the variation effect corresponding to the variation effect pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. A second image display device (sub-liquid crystal display) 71, an audio output device 9, a panel lighting device 74, a frame lighting device 10, a panel drive device 75, and other production devices are used to execute the command.

In step S1211-12, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect time, which is the effect time corresponding to the variable effect pattern determined in step S1211-10, in the variable effect timer counter of the sub RAM 130c, and in step S1211-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the variable effect time. The CPU 130a sets the variation effect data corresponding to the variation effect pattern in the variation effect data storage area of the sub RAM 130c.

The fluctuation effect timer counter is subtracted by 1 every 4 ms in step S1200. The sub CPU 130a can specify the remaining time of the variation effect, in other words, the time elapsed since the start of the variation effect, by the variation effect timer counter.

In step S121-14, the sub CPU 130a performs the hold icon display update process. Specifically, the display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is changed based on the change scenario of the hold icon determined in the hold icon display mode determination process in step S1207. Whether or not and the display mode after the change are determined, the hold icon change designation command corresponding to this decision is specified, and the specified hold icon change designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c.

The hold icon change designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the image control unit 140 (the hold change notice is executed).

In step S121-15, the sub CPU 130a performs the variable icon display mode determination process. Specifically, based on the variation effect pattern determined in step S121-10, whether or not to change the display mode of the variation icon displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and after the change. The display mode is determined, the variable icon designation command corresponding to this determination is specified, and the specified variable icon designation command is set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process is completed, the variable effect pattern determination process this time is completed.

The variable icon designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 displays the variable icon in the display mode corresponding to the variable icon designation command (the pending change notice is executed).

In step S121-16, the sub CPU 130a causes the first special symbol second display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 to display the variation of the special symbol (blinking of the LED). Is set in the predetermined processing area. As a result, when the special symbol variation display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600, so that the first special symbol first. 2 The variable display of the display 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is started.

In step S121-17, the sub CPU 130a issues a special symbol variation display designation command for variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in order to variablely display the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the sub RAM 130c. Set in the send buffer of.

The special symbol variation display designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140 in the data output process of step S1600. Then, the image control unit 140 performs variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 or the second special symbol display area DZ2.

(Variable production pattern determination table)
45 to 47 are diagrams showing a variation effect pattern determination table referred to when determining a variation effect pattern. FIG. 45 shows a variable effect pattern determination for the effect mode 1 referred to when the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are variablely displayed by entering the game ball into the first starting port 45 in the effect mode 1 (normal mode). FIG. 46 is a table, and FIG. 46 is for the effect mode 2 referred to when the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are variablely displayed by entering the game ball into the first starting port 45 in the effect mode 2 (MV mode). It is a variation effect pattern determination table, and FIG. 47 is a variation effect pattern determination for a second start opening referred to when the special symbol and the effect symbol 70a are variablely displayed by the entry of a game ball into the second start opening. It's a table.

In the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 to 47, the stop symbol data specified by the effect symbol designation command, the variation pattern of the special symbol specified by the variation pattern designation command, and the variation pattern designation command are received. The selection rate based on the acquired random value for determining the variation effect pattern is associated with the variation effect pattern, which is the variation effect (including the variation display of the effect symbol) performed in response to the variation display of the special symbol.

What is described as pseudo 0, pseudo 2, pseudo 3, and pseudo 4 in () in the column of variable effect content (variable effect pattern) means "number of executions of pseudo continuous notice" and is "pseudo". "Continuous notice" means that during the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to one big hit lottery, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped and then changed again, and the effect symbol 70a is changed and temporarily stopped multiple times. It means a notice according to the variation mode to be performed. When the variation and temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a are performed only once, the number of pseudo-reams is 0, and when the variation and temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a are performed twice, the number of pseudo-reams is 2 times. When the variation and temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a are performed 3 times, the number of pseudo-reams is 3 times, and when the variation and temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a are performed 4 times, the number of pseudo-reams is 4 times. .. Pseudo 0 has 0 pseudo-ream counts, pseudo 2 has 2 pseudo-ream counts, pseudo 3 has 3 pseudo-ream counts, and pseudo 4 has 4 pseudo-ream counts. It should be noted that the number of pseudo-reams is executed four times only when the stop symbol data is the special symbol 10, the special symbol 11 or the special symbol 12, and when the number of pseudo-reams is executed four times, it becomes a probable change jackpot. Is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the presence / absence of execution of the pseudo-continuous notice and the number of pseudo-reams are determined on the effect control board 130 (sub CPU 130a) side, but the effect control is determined on the main control board 110 (main CPU 110a) side. The board 130 (sub CPU 130a) may be notified. In addition, if the time of the variable effect pattern is 20 seconds or less, the pseudo continuous notice is not executed, but the pseudo continuous notice is executed within the range of 2 to 3 times in which it is not confirmed that the probability variation jackpot will be achieved. You may try to do it.

In the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 1 (normal mode) shown in FIG. 45, the shortened variation effect (3 seconds) associated with the variation pattern 2 (shortened variation) and the variation pattern 3 (normal variation) are linked. Normal variation short effect (10 seconds) attached, normal variation long effect (12 seconds) associated with variation pattern 1 (normal variation), special long variation effect (20) associated with variation pattern 4 (normal reach). Seconds) and normal reach production (20 seconds), character short SP reach production (35 seconds) associated with fluctuation patterns 5, 6, 11 and 12 (SP reach 1 and 2), music short SP reach production (35 seconds) And chance short SP reach production (35 seconds), character long SP reach production (40 seconds) linked to fluctuation patterns 7 and 13 (SP reach 3), music long SP reach production (40 seconds) and chance long SP reach Direction (40 seconds), character short SPSP reach effect (50 seconds) and music short SPSP reach effect (50 seconds) associated with variation patterns 8, 9, 14 and 15 (SPSP reach 1 and 2), variation pattern 10 And 16 (SPSP reach 3), the character long SPSP reach production (60 seconds), the music long SPSP reach production (60 seconds), and the character short full rotation reach associated with the variation pattern 17 (full rotation reach). 16 types of variable effect patterns such as effect (90 seconds) are set.

In the variation effect pattern determination table for the effect mode 2 (MV mode) shown in FIG. 46, the abbreviated variation effect (3 seconds) associated with the variation pattern 2 (shortening variation) and the variation pattern 3 (normal variation) are linked. Normal variation short effect (10 seconds) attached, normal variation long effect (12 seconds) associated with variation pattern 1 (normal variation), special long variation effect (20) associated with variation pattern 4 (normal reach). Seconds) and normal reach production (20 seconds), music short SP reach production (35 seconds) and chance short SP reach production (35 seconds) linked to fluctuation patterns 5, 6, 11 and 12 (SP reach 1 and 2). , Music long SP reach production (40 seconds) and chance long SP reach production (40 seconds) associated with fluctuation patterns 7 and 13 (SP reach 3), fluctuation patterns 8, 9, 14 and 15 (SPSP reach 1 and Music short SPSP reach production (50 seconds) linked to 2), music long SPSP reach production (60 seconds) linked to fluctuation patterns 10 and 16 (SPSP reach 3), fluctuation pattern 17 (full rotation reach) Twelve types of variable production patterns such as a music short full rotation reach production (90 seconds) linked to are set.

The variation effect pattern determination table for the second starting port shown in FIG. 47 is a shortened variation effect (3 seconds) associated with the variation pattern 2 (shortened variation) and a normal variation pattern 3 (normal variation) associated with the variation pattern 3 (normal variation). Fluctuation short effect (10 seconds), normal variation long effect (12 seconds) associated with variation pattern 1 (normal variation), special long variation effect (20 seconds) associated with variation pattern 4 (normal reach), and normal reach. Direction (20 seconds), special short reach effect 1 (40 seconds) linked to fluctuation patterns 7 and 13 (SP reach 3), special short reach effect 2 (40 seconds), and special short reach effect 3 (40 seconds). , Special long reach effect 1 (60 seconds) associated with variation patterns 10 and 16 (SPSP reach 3), special long reach effect 2 (60 seconds) and special long reach effect 3 (60 seconds), variation pattern 17 ( Twelve types of variable effect patterns such as a special full rotation reach effect (90 seconds) linked to the full rotation reach) are set.

In the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, the expected value (expected degree) of the above-mentioned music-based reach effect is set to be higher than that of the above-mentioned character-based reach effect. Further, the character short SP reach effect, the character long SP reach effect, the character short SPSP reach effect, the character long SPSP reach effect, and the character short full rotation reach effect are set in the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 46 and 47. Since it has not been done, it is a reach production dedicated to the production mode 1.

The music short full rotation reach effect set in the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46 is not set in the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 and 47, and therefore is a reach effect dedicated to the effect mode 2. It can be said that.

Since the above-mentioned special reach effect set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is not set in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the second start port 47 is used. It is a production fluctuation pattern dedicated to the fluctuation display based on the entry of the game ball. In addition, for special reach production, pseudo continuous notice is always executed. As described above, in the variation effect pattern determination table of FIG. 47, the variation effect pattern is set so as to be distinguishable from the variation effect pattern of the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 45.

Regarding the chance short SP reach effect and the chance long short SP reach effect set in the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the stop symbol data is the special symbol 18 (loss) and the special symbol 14 (sudden probability change jackpot). ) Is selected only. In other words, it can be said that the chance-type SP reach effect is a dedicated variable effect pattern for producing (fanning) whether or not a sudden change jackpot occurs. Since the probability variation jackpot does not suddenly occur in the variation display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 47, the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 does not have a chance-type reach effect.

Further, in the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 45, when the expected value (expected value) to be a big hit is high, the reach effect of the music type is more likely to be selected than the reach effect of the character type, and the expected value (expected value) to be a big hit. The higher the degree), the easier it is for the pseudo-continuous notice to be executed. Further, in the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 46, the higher the expected value (expected value) to be a big hit, the easier it is to execute the pseudo continuous notice, and the higher the expected value (expected value) to be a big hit, the more the pseudo continuous notice is executed. It is easier to select a reach effect with a large number of times. Further, in the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, the higher the expected value (expected value) that becomes a big hit when the special short reach effects 1 to 3 are determined, the more the special short reach effect 1 <special short reach effect 2 <. The selection rate increases in the order of special short reach production, and the higher the expected value (expected value) that becomes a big hit when special long reach production is decided, the more special long reach production 1 <special long reach production 2 <special long reach production The selection rate is set to be higher in the order of the production 3.

(Preliminary effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The advance notice effect determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, in step S1212-1, the sub CPU 130a selects the advance notice type determination table shown in FIG. 49, and in step S1212-2, the sub CPU 130a changes in the variation pattern information storage area stored in the variation pattern information storage area in step S121-10. Acquire production pattern information. The notice type determination table is stored in the sub RAM 130c, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 49.

In step S1212-3, the sub CPU 130a performs the advance notice effect type determination process. Specifically, the random value for determining the advance notice type is acquired, the random value for determining the advance notice type, the advance notice type determination table selected in step S1212-1 above, and the variation effect pattern information acquired in step S1214-2. The notice type is determined according to the selection rate set in the notice type determination table, and the determined notice type is stored in the notice type information storage area.

In step S1212-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice type is determined to be the symbol advance notice effect. If it is determined that the symbol advance notice effect has been determined (S1212-4: Yes), the process is transferred to step S1212-5. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol advance notice effect has not been determined (S1212-4: No), the process is transferred to step S121-2-8.

In step S1212-5, the sub CPU 130a selects the symbol advance notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 50, and in step S1212-6, the sub CPU 130a performs the symbol advance notice pattern determination process. Specifically, a random value for determining the advance notice mode is acquired, the random value for determining the advance notice mode, the symbol advance notice mode determination table selected in step S1212-5, and the variation effect pattern acquired in step S1212-2. The symbol advance notice pattern (symbol advance notice mode) is determined according to the selection rate set in the symbol advance notice mode determination table, and the determined symbol advance notice pattern is stored in the advance notice pattern information storage area.

In step S122-7, the sub CPU 130a specifies a symbol advance notice pattern designation command corresponding to the determined symbol advance notice pattern, and sets the specified symbol advance notice pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process is completed, the notice production determination process this time is completed.

The symbol advance notice pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. .. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the symbol advance notice effect corresponding to the symbol advance notice pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. , A second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, an audio output device 9, a panel lighting device 74, a frame lighting device 10, a panel drive device 75, and the like.

In step S122-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice type is determined to be the music advance notice effect. If it is determined that the music preview production has been decided (S1212-8: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-9. On the other hand, if it is determined that the music preview effect has not been determined (S1212-8: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-14.

In step S122-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is a big hit. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit (S1212-9: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-111. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (S1212-9: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-10.

In step S1212-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the music preview mode determination table for loss shown in FIG. 53, and in step S1212-11, the sub CPU 130a selects the music preview mode determination table for the jackpot shown in FIG. do. The details of the music preview mode determination table of FIGS. 53 and 54 will be described later.

In step S121-12, the sub CPU 130a performs a music preview pattern determination process. Specifically, a random value for determining the advance notice mode is acquired, and the random value for determining the advance notice mode is collated with the music notice mode determination table selected in step S1212-10 or step S1212-11, and the music notice is announced. A music notice pattern (music notice mode) is determined according to the selection rate set in the mode determination table, and the determined music notice pattern is stored in the notice pattern information storage area.

In step S1212-13, the sub CPU 130a specifies a music preview pattern designation command corresponding to the determined music preview pattern, and sets the specified music preview pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process is completed, the notice production determination process this time is completed.

The music preview pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. .. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 perform the music advance notice effect corresponding to the music advance notice pattern designation command (variable effect pattern) on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. , The second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, the sound output device 9, the panel lighting device 74, the frame lighting device 10, the panel drive device 75, and the like.

In step S122-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the advance notice type is determined to be the step-up advance notice effect. If it is determined that the step-up notice effect has been decided (S1212-14: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-1-15. On the other hand, if it is determined that the step-up advance notice effect has not been determined (S1212-14: No), the present advance notice effect determination process is terminated.

In step S122-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the result of the variation display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) is a big hit. If it is determined that the jackpot will be a big hit (S1212-15: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1212-17. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (S1212-15: No), the process proceeds to step S1212-16.

In step S122-16, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice mode determination table for loss shown in FIG. 60 (a), and in step S121-17, the sub CPU 130a is the step for jackpot shown in FIG. 60 (b). Select the up notice mode determination table. The details of the step-up notice mode determination table in FIG. 60 will be described later.

In step S121-18, the sub CPU 130a performs a step-up notice pattern determination process. Specifically, a random number value for determining the advance notice mode is acquired, and the random value for determining the advance notice mode is collated with the step-up advance notice mode determination table selected in step S1212-16 or step S1212-17, and the step is performed. The step-up notice pattern (step-up notice mode) is determined according to the selection rate set in the up-notice mode determination table, and the determined step-up notice pattern is stored in the notice pattern information storage area.

In step S122-19, the sub CPU 130a identifies a step-up notice pattern designation command corresponding to the determined step-up notice pattern, and sets the specified step-up notice pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. When this process is completed, the notice production determination process this time is completed.

The step-up notice pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. To. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 perform a step-up notice effect corresponding to the step-up notice pattern designation command (variation effect pattern) on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display). ) 70, a second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, an audio output device 9, a panel lighting device 74, a frame lighting device 10, a panel drive device 75, and the like.

(Notice type determination table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a notice type determination table referred to when the notice type is determined in the notice effect type determination process of step S1212-3. The notice type determination table corresponds to the variable effect pattern, the selection rate based on the random value for determining the advance notice type acquired when the advance notice type is determined, and the advance notice type of the advance notice effect executed during the variable effect according to the variable effect pattern. It is attached.

When the shortened variable effect is determined as the variable effect pattern, one of no notice, music preview effect, and step-up advance notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and the symbol advance notice effect is selected. There is no.
When the normal variable short effect is determined as the variable effect pattern, any of no notice, symbol advance notice effect, music advance notice effect, and step-up advance notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate.
When the normal variable long effect is determined as the variable effect pattern, any of no notice, symbol advance notice effect, music advance notice effect, and step-up advance notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate.

When the normal reach effect is determined as the variable effect pattern, any of no notice, pattern advance notice effect, and music advance notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and the step-up advance notice effect is not selected.
When the special long variable effect is determined as the variable effect pattern, the music preview effect or the step-up advance notice effect is selected according to the set selection rate, and no notice and the symbol advance notice effect are not selected. .. In other words, it can be said that the advance notice effect is always executed.

If a character-based reach effect (character short SP reach effect, character long SP reach effect, character short SPSP reach effect, character long SPSP reach effect, character short full rotation reach effect) is determined as a variable effect pattern, The design notice effect is always selected, and no notice, music notice effect, and step-up notice effect are not selected.
If music-based reach production (music short SP reach production, music long SP reach production, music short SPSP reach production, music long SPSP reach production, music short full rotation reach production) is determined as a variable production pattern, The music preview effect is always selected, and no notice, pattern advance notice effect, and step-up advance notice effect are not selected.

If a chance-type reach effect (chance short SP reach effect, chance long SP reach effect) is determined as a variable effect pattern, the step-up advance notice effect is always selected, and there is no advance notice, a design advance notice effect, and a music advance notice effect. Will never be selected.
When a special reach effect is determined as the variable effect pattern, the symbol advance notice effect is always selected, and the no advance notice, the music advance notice effect, and the step-up advance notice effect are not selected.

In this way, the advance notice effect that is executed or is easy to be executed by the variable effect pattern is defined, and it can be said that the advance notice effect is determined based on the stop symbol data and the variable pattern as a result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol. Although the possibility of executing the advance notice effect and the selection rate are biased for each variable effect pattern, it may be executed evenly without being biased, or it may be biased in another way.

(Design notice mode determination table)
FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a symbol advance notice mode determination table referred to when the symbol advance notice pattern is determined in the symbol advance notice pattern determination process in step S1212-6. In the symbol advance notice mode determination table, the variation effect pattern, the selection rate based on the random number value for determining the advance notice mode acquired at the time of determining the symbol advance notice pattern, and the type of the symbol advance notice pattern are associated with each other.

The type of the symbol advance notice pattern is set from the symbol advance notice pattern 1 to the symbol advance notice pattern 12, and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or finally stopped) on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. It is a notice production that suggests the type, color, etc.

The "design notice pattern 1" is a notice effect for displaying suggestive information suggesting the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left side area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70.
The "design notice pattern 2" is a notice effect that displays suggestion information suggesting the type of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. Is a notice effect for displaying suggestive information suggesting the type of the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70.

The "design notice pattern 4" suggests the color of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the color of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information.
The "design notice pattern 5" suggests the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the color of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information.
The "design notice pattern 6" suggests the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and vaguely displays the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the center area. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information.

The "design notice pattern 7" suggests the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the color of the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the center area. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information.
In the "design notice pattern 8", the type of the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the center area generate a pseudo continuous notice. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information suggesting that it is a pseudo-ream pattern.
The "design notice pattern 9" vaguely suggests a middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and also indicates the type of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information.

The "design notice pattern 10" suggests the color of the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the type of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information.
The "design notice pattern 11" suggests that the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is a pseudo-continuous symbol that generates a pseudo continuous notice, and is on the right side. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information suggesting the type of the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the area.
The "design notice pattern 12" is a left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, a middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the center area, and a stop display in the right area. It is a notice effect that displays suggestive information suggesting the right pattern.

As a feature of the symbol advance notice mode determination table, the higher the expectation that the variable display (variable effect pattern) of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) becomes a big hit (special result mode), the larger the number of symbols suggested. It is easy to select a notice pattern, and the higher the expectation that the variable display (variable effect pattern) of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) becomes a big hit (special result mode), the more clearly the symbol that is stopped and displayed is suggested. Is easier to select. Since the symbol advance notice pattern 12 is selected only when the full rotation reach effect is executed, it can be said that the big hit is confirmed advance notice effect.

According to the feature of the symbol advance notice mode determination table, the player is overwhelmed by the number of stop symbols suggested by the suggestion information of the symbol advance notice effect and the content of the suggestion information. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's expectation for the symbol advance notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of design notice production)
51 and 52 are diagrams showing a timing chart of the symbol advance notice effect and an example of the effect. Specifically, FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an effect example of a symbol advance notice effect when the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is executed by a variation effect pattern in which reach does not occur, and FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an effect example in which reach occurs. It is a figure which shows the effect example of the symbol advance notice effect when the variation display of the effect symbol 70a is executed by the effect pattern.

First, FIG. 51 will be described.
FIG. 51 (a) is a timing chart of the variation display of the effect symbol 70a when reach does not occur.
In the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol start variable display in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T0. ..

Then, the left symbol temporarily stops in the left region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T2 after the timing of T1 which is after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. , The right symbol temporarily stops in the right area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T4. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol are different types of symbols, and no reach has occurred.

After that, the middle symbol temporarily stops in the central region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T6, and the left side region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T7. , The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped in the center region and the right region, respectively, and the symbols are confirmed and displayed until T8.

Hereinafter, the design notice production will be described.
FIG. 51 (b) is a timing chart of the symbol advance notice pattern 1 executed during the variation display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
In the symbol advance notice effect by the symbol advance notice pattern 1, the left symbol suggestion information suggesting the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed in the left region at the timing of T1. Then, at the timing of T2, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends.

FIG. 51 (c) is a timing chart of the symbol advance notice pattern 2 executed during the variation display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
In the symbol advance notice effect by the symbol advance notice pattern 2, the right symbol suggestion information suggesting the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed in the right region at the timing of T1. Then, at the timing of T4, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends.

FIG. 51 (d) is a timing chart of the symbol advance notice pattern 3 executed during the variation display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
In the symbol advance notice effect by the symbol advance notice pattern 3, the middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed in the central region at the timing of T1. Then, at the timing of T6, the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends.

FIG. 51 (e) is a timing chart of the symbol advance notice patterns 4 and 5 executed during the variation display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
The symbol advance notice effect by the symbol advance notice patterns 4 and 5 is stopped and displayed in the left symbol suggestion information suggesting the left symbol and the left symbol suggestion information which is stopped and displayed in the left area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T1. The right symbol suggestion information that suggests the right symbol is displayed in the left area and the right area, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4.

FIG. 51 (f) is a timing chart of the symbol advance notice patterns 6, 7 and 8 executed during the variation display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
The symbol advance notice effect by the symbol advance notice patterns 6, 7 and 8 is stopped in the left area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T1. The middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the displayed middle symbol is displayed in the left area and the center area, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T6.

FIG. 51 (g) is a timing chart of the symbol advance notice patterns 9, 10 and 11 executed during the variation display in which the reach of (a) does not occur.
The symbol advance notice effect by the symbol advance notice patterns 9, 10 and 11 is stopped in the central area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T1. The right symbol suggestion information suggesting the displayed right symbol is displayed in the center area and the right area, respectively. After that, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T6.

FIG. 51 (h) is a diagram showing an example of production by the symbol notice pattern 9.
At the timing of T1, as shown in (h1), a "?" Image that vaguely suggests a middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the center area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and a right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area. A "7" image suggesting is displayed in the central area and the right area, respectively. At the timing of T2, the left symbol temporarily stops as shown in (h2), but the "?" Image and the "7" image do not change. At the timing of T4, as shown in (h3), the right symbol temporarily stops and the display of the "7" image ends. At the timing of T6, as shown in (h4), the middle symbol temporarily stops and the display of the "?" Image ends. After that, at the timing of T7, all the symbols are confirmed and displayed as shown in (h5).

Next, FIG. 52 will be described.
FIG. 51 (a) is a timing chart of the variation display of the effect symbol 70a when reach occurs.
In the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol start variable display in the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T0. ..

Then, the left symbol temporarily stops in the left region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T2 after the timing of T1 which is after the lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. , The right symbol temporarily stops in the right area of the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T4. At this time, the left symbol and the right symbol are the same symbol, and reach occurs.

Then, a predetermined reach effect is executed between T5 and T6, the middle symbol temporarily stops in the central region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T6, and the first image is displayed at the timing of T7. In the left side region, the center region, and the right side region of the display unit of the device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are each stopped, and the symbol is confirmed and displayed until T8.

Hereinafter, the symbol advance notice effect will be described, but since (b), (c) and (e) are the same as (b), (c) and (e) in FIG. 51, the description thereof will be omitted here.

FIG. 52 (d) is a timing chart of the symbol advance notice pattern 3 executed during the variation display in which the reach of (a) occurs.
In the symbol advance notice effect by the symbol advance notice pattern 3, the middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed in the central region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed in the central region at the timing of T1. Then, the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends even though the middle symbol has not stopped at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started. The display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

FIG. 52 (f) is a timing chart of the symbol advance notice patterns 6, 7, and 8 executed during the variation display in which the reach of (a) occurs.
The symbol advance notice effect by the symbol advance notice patterns 6, 7 and 8 is stopped in the left area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T1. The middle symbol suggestion information suggesting the displayed middle symbol is displayed in the left area and the center area, respectively. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends even though the middle symbol has not stopped at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started. The display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

52 (g) is a timing chart of the symbol advance notice patterns 9, 10 and 11 executed during the variation display in which the reach of (a) occurs.
The symbol advance notice effect by the symbol advance notice patterns 9, 10 and 11 is stopped in the central area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T1. The right symbol suggestion information suggesting the displayed right symbol is displayed in the center area and the right area, respectively. After that, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4, and the display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends even though the middle symbol has not stopped at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started. The display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

52 (h) is a timing chart of the symbol advance notice pattern 12 executed during the variation display in which (a) reach occurs.
The symbol advance notice effect by the symbol advance notice pattern 12 is stopped and displayed in the center region and the left symbol suggestion information suggesting the left symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left area of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 at the timing of T1. The middle symbol suggestion information that suggests the middle symbol and the right symbol suggestion information that suggests the right symbol that is stopped and displayed in the right area are at the stop position of the left symbol, the stop position of the middle symbol, and the stop position of the right symbol, respectively. Is displayed. Then, the display of the left symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T2, the display of the right symbol suggestion information ends at the timing of T4, and the middle symbol does not stop at the timing of T5 when the reach effect is started. The display of the middle symbol suggestion information ends. The display of the middle symbol suggestion information may be terminated at the timing of T4 when the reach occurs.

In this way, in the case of the symbol notice pattern that displays the middle symbol suggestion information that suggests the middle symbol that is stopped and displayed at the end, if reach does not occur, the middle symbol suggestion information is displayed until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. By displaying it and displaying the middle symbol suggestion information only until the timing when the reach effect is started, the reach effect is not hindered by the middle symbol suggestion information. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

It is also possible to display each symbol suggestion information on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, and in such a case, the reach effect executed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. However, the middle symbol suggestion information may be displayed until the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, all the symbol suggestion information may be displayed until the reach effect is completed.

FIG. 52 (i) is a diagram showing an example of production by the symbol notice pattern 12.
At the timing of T1, as shown in (i1), the "7" image suggesting the left symbol to be stopped and displayed in the left region of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the middle symbol to be stopped and displayed in the center region are displayed. The suggestion "7" image and the suggestion "7" image suggesting the right pattern to be stopped and displayed in the right side area are displayed in the left side area, the center area, and the right side area, respectively. At the timing of T2, as shown in (i2), the left symbol temporarily stops and the display of the "7" image in the left region ends. At the timing of T4, as shown in (i3), the right symbol temporarily stops and the display of the "7" image in the right region ends. At the timing of T5, as shown in (i4), the display of the “7” image in the central region ends with the start of the reach effect. At the timing of T6, all the symbols are temporarily stopped as shown in (i5), and at the timing of T7, all the symbols are confirmed and displayed as shown in (i6), and it is displayed that a big hit is made.

(Music preview mode determination table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a music preview mode determination table for loss referred to when determining a music preview pattern for a music preview effect in the music preview pattern determination process of step S121-12, and FIG. 54 is a diagram showing the music preview mode determination table. It is a figure which shows the music notice mode determination table for a jackpot which is referred to when the music notice pattern of the music notice production is decided in the music notice pattern determination process of step S1212-12.

The music preview effect is at least a combination of the effect display displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 and the music output from the audio output device 9. On the other hand, it is a notice production that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit (special result mode). In addition, the music preview production can be paraphrased as a specific production.

In the music preview mode determination table for loss in FIG. 53 and the music preview mode determination table for jackpot in FIG. 54, a variation effect pattern and a selection rate based on a random value for determining the advance notice mode acquired when the music preview pattern is determined are used. , The type of music preview pattern is associated with it. The types of the music preview patterns are set from the music preview pattern 1 to the music preview pattern 28, and the music used is three types of music A to C.

In the following explanation, the words "Gase" and "Book" appear, but "Gase" means that the music preview production does not develop after that, and "Book" means that the music preview production develops after that. Means.

"Music notice pattern 1" executes a ghost sign effect that makes it expected that a music effect suggesting that a music-based reach effect may be executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. It is a notice production to be done. The music production is a production consisting of a combination of the display of the development suggestion production and any of the music A to C.

The "musical piece notice pattern 2" is a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the output of the music A after the main sign effect that the music effect is confirmed to be executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is executed. It is a preview production to execute the first music production. That is, the music production is executed once, and one type of music (music A) is output.

The "musical piece notice pattern 3" is a notice effect for executing the second music effect of Gase, which is a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the output of the music B, after executing the predictive effect during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. .. That is, the music production is executed once, and one type of music (music B) is output.

"Music notice pattern 4" is a notice effect for executing the third music effect of Gase, which is a combination of the display of the development suggestion effect and the output of the music C, after executing the main sign effect during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. be. That is, the music production is executed once, and one type of music (music C) is output.

"Music notice pattern 5" is a gasselech sign production (development production) that is expected to develop into a musical reach production after the main sign production and the first music production are executed during the variable display of the production symbol 70a. It is a notice production to execute the reach fan production). That is, the music production is executed once, and one type of music (music A) is output.

The "musical piece notice pattern 6" is a notice effect in which the gasserichi sign effect is executed after the present sign effect and the second music effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music production is executed once, and one type of music (music B) is output.

The "musical piece notice pattern 7" is a notice effect for executing the gasselech predictive effect after executing the present sign effect and the third musical piece effect during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music production is executed once, and one type of music (music C) is output.

The "musical piece notice pattern 8" is a notice effect for executing the present reach sign effect after executing the present sign effect and the present first music effect during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music production is executed once, and one type of music (music A) is output.

The "musical piece notice pattern 9" is a notice effect for executing the present reach sign effect after executing the present sign effect and the present second music effect during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music production is executed once, and one type of music (music B) is output.

The "musical piece notice pattern 10" is a notice effect for executing the present reach sign effect after executing the present sign effect and the present third music effect during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. That is, the music production is executed once, and one type of music (music C) is output.

The "music notice pattern 11" is a book after executing the main sign effect and the first music effect of Gase during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and executing the pseudo-continuous effect to produce that the pseudo-continuous notice has been successfully generated. It is a notice production to execute the first music production and this reach sign production. That is, the music production is executed twice, but only one type (music A) is output.

The "music notice pattern 12" is a notice that the main sign effect and the second music effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and the second music effect and the reach sign effect are executed after the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. It is a production. That is, the music production is executed twice, but only one type (music B) is output.

The "music notice pattern 13" is a notice that the main sign effect and the third music effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and then the third music effect and the reach sign effect are executed. It is a production. That is, the music production is executed twice, but only one type (music C) is output.

The "music notice pattern 14" is a notice that the main sign effect and the first music effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and then the second music effect and the reach sign effect are executed. It is a production. That is, the music production is executed twice, and two types of music (music A and B) are output.

The "music notice pattern 15" is a notice that the main sign effect and the second music effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and then the third music effect and the reach sign effect are executed. It is a production. That is, the music production is executed twice, and two types of music (music B and C) are output.

The "music notice pattern 16" is a notice that the main music production and the third music production are executed during the variable display of the production symbol 70a, and the first music production and the reach warning production are executed after the pseudo-continuous production is executed. It is a production. That is, the music production is executed twice, and two types of music (music C and A) are output.

In the "music notice pattern 17", the main sign effect, the first music effect of Gase and the pseudo-ream effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the first music effect and the pseudo-ream effect of Gase are executed, and finally. This is a preview production for executing the first music production and the reach sign production. That is, although the music production is executed three times, only one type of music (music A) is output.

In the "music notice pattern 18", the main sign effect, the second music effect of Gase and the pseudo-ream effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the second music effect and the pseudo-ream effect of Gase are executed, and finally. This is a preview production for executing the second music production and the reach sign production. That is, although the music production is executed three times, only one type of music (music B) is output.

In the "music notice pattern 19", the main sign effect, the third music effect of Gase and the pseudo-ream effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the third music effect and the pseudo-ream effect of Gase are executed, and finally. This is a preview production for executing the third music production and the reach sign production. That is, although the music production is executed three times, only one type of music (music C) is output.

In the "music notice pattern 20", the main sign effect, the first music effect of Gase and the pseudo-ream effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the first music effect and the pseudo-ream effect of Gase are executed, and finally. This is a preview production for executing the second music production and the reach sign production. That is, the music production is executed three times and two types of music (music A and B) are output, but the output of the second type music (music B) is delayed.

In the "music notice pattern 21", the main sign effect, the second music effect of Gase and the pseudo-ream effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the second music effect and the pseudo-ream effect of Gase are executed, and finally. This is a preview production for executing the third music production and the reach sign production. That is, the music production is executed three times and two types of music (music B and C) are output, but the output of the second type music (music C) is delayed.

In the "music notice pattern 22", the main sign effect, the third music effect of Gase and the pseudo-ream effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the third music effect and the pseudo-ream effect of Gase are executed, and finally. This is a preview production for executing the first music production and the reach sign production. That is, the music production is executed three times and two types of music (music C and A) are output, but the output of the second type of music (music A) is delayed.

In the "music notice pattern 23", the main sign effect, the first music effect of Gase and the pseudo-ream effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the second music effect and the pseudo-ream effect of Gase are executed, and finally. This is a preview production for executing the second music production and the reach sign production. That is, the music production is executed three times and two types of music (music A and B) are output, but the output of the second type music (music B) is at an early timing.

In the "music notice pattern 24", the main sign effect, the second music effect of Gase and the pseudo-ream effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the third music effect and the pseudo-ream effect of Gase are executed, and finally. This is a preview production for executing the third music production and the reach sign production. That is, the music production is executed three times and two types of music (music B, C) are output, but the output of the second type music (music B) is at an early timing.

In the "music notice pattern 25", the main sign effect, the Gase 3rd music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the Gase 1st music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are executed, and finally. This is a preview production for executing the first music production and the reach sign production. That is, the music production is executed three times and two types of music (music C and A) are output, but the output of the second type music (A) is at an early timing.

In the "music notice pattern 26", the main sign effect, the first music effect of Gase and the pseudo-ream effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the second music effect and the pseudo-ream effect of Gase are executed, and finally. This is a preview production to execute the third music production and the reach sign production of the development confirmation. That is, the music production is executed three times, and three types of music (music A, B, C) are output.

In the "music notice pattern 27", the main sign effect, the second music effect of Gase and the pseudo-ream effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the third music effect and the pseudo-ream effect of Gase are executed, and finally. This is a preview production for executing the first music production and the reach sign production. That is, the music production is executed three times, and three types of music (music B, C, A) are output.

In the "music notice pattern 28", the main sign effect, the Gase 3rd music effect, and the pseudo-continuous effect are executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, and then the Gase 1st music effect and the pseudo-continuous effect are executed, and finally. It is a preview production to execute the first music production and the reach sign production. That is, the music production is executed three times, and three types of music (music C, A, B) are output.

The first feature of the music preview mode determination table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 is that one of the music preview effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit is executed and one type of music is produced. When the output music preview patterns 8 to 10 are executed, the expectation (reliability) of a big hit is set in the order of music preview pattern 8 <music preview pattern 9 <music preview pattern 10. ing. That is, the output music has a higher expectation (reliability) that the jackpot is in the order of music A <music B <music C. As a result, the player becomes interested in the type of music to be output, and the interest in the music preview production is improved.

The second feature of the music preview mode determination table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 is that, of the music preview productions (specific productions) that may be a big hit, two music productions are executed and one type of music is produced. When the output music preview patterns 11 to 13 are executed, the expectation (reliability) of a big hit is set in the order of music preview pattern 11 <music preview pattern 12 <music preview pattern <13. Has been done. That is, the output music has a higher expectation (reliability) that the jackpot is in the order of music A <music B <music C. As a result, the player becomes interested in the type of music to be output, and the interest in the music preview production is improved.

As the third feature of the music preview mode determination table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, among the music preview productions (specific productions) that may be a big hit, two music productions are executed and two types of music are produced. When the output music preview patterns 14 to 16 are executed, the expectation (reliability) of a big hit is set in the order of music preview pattern 14 <music preview pattern 15 <music preview pattern 16. ing. That is, with respect to the music output in the first music production, the degree of expectation (reliability) that becomes a big hit in the order of music A <music B <music C increases. As a result, the player becomes interested in the type of music to be output, and the interest in the music preview production is improved.

As the fourth feature of the music preview mode determination table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, among the music preview effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit, the music preview patterns 11 to 2 in which the music production is executed twice. When 16 is executed, the expectation (reliability) that the music preview patterns 14 to 16 in which two types of music are output is a big hit than the music preview patterns 11 to 13 in which only one type of music is output. Is set to be high. That is, the degree of expectation (reliability) that becomes a big hit is higher when two types of music are output than when only one type of music is output. As a result, the player becomes strongly interested in the music preview production in the expectation that many kinds of music will be output, and the interest of the game will be improved.

As a fifth feature of the music preview mode determination table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, among the music preview effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit, the music preview patterns 17 to which the music production is executed three times. When 28 is executed, the expectation that the music preview patterns 20 to 25 in which two types of music are output will be a big hit is higher than the music preview patterns 17 to 19 in which only one type of music is output. The music preview patterns 26 to 28, in which three types of music are output, have a higher expectation (reliability) than the music warning patterns 20 to 25 in which only two types of music are output. As a result, the player becomes strongly interested in the music preview production in the expectation that many kinds of music will be output, and the interest of the game will be improved.

The sixth feature of the music preview mode determination table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 is that three music productions are executed among the music preview productions (specific productions) that may be a big hit, but two types of music. When the music preview patterns 20 to 25 that are output only are executed, the second type of music production is performed in the second music production than the music preview patterns 20 to 22 in which the second type of music is output in the third music production. The music preview patterns 23 to 25, in which the music is output, have a higher degree of expectation (reliability) to be a big hit. As a result, the player becomes strongly interested in the music preview production in the expectation that different types of music will be output at an early stage, and the interest of the game will be improved.

The seventh feature of the music preview mode determination table shown in FIGS. 53 and 54 is the music preview patterns 8 to 10 in which the music production is executed only once among the music preview effects (specific effects) that may be a big hit. The music preview patterns 11 to 16 in which the music production is executed twice have a higher expectation (reliability) to be a big hit, and the music production is higher than the music preview patterns 11 to 16 in which the music production is executed only twice. The music preview patterns 17 to 28, in which is executed three times, have a higher expectation (reliability) to be a big hit. As a result, the player becomes strongly interested in the music preview production in the expectation that the music production will be performed a large number of times, and the interest of the game will be improved.

(Example of music preview production)
FIGS. 55 to 59 are diagrams showing a timing chart of the music preview effect and an example of the effect. Specifically, FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a music preview effect in which the music production described later is executed only once, and FIGS. 56 and 57 show a music preview effect in which the music production described later is executed twice. It is a figure which shows, and FIG.

First, FIG. 55 will be described.
FIG. 55A is a timing chart of the music preview pattern 1.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the ghost sign effect are started. It should be noted that the Gase sign production is a preliminary production that only makes one expect (suggest) that the music production described later may be executed. After that, the effect sign effect is ended at the timing of T1, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T2, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T3. As described above, in the music preview pattern 1, the music production is not executed even once.

FIG. 55B is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 2 to 4.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the present sign effect are started. In addition, this predictive effect is a notice effect in which it is confirmed that the music effect is executed. After that, at the timing of T1, the display of the development suggestion effect and the Gase music effect consisting of any combination of the songs A to C are executed. In addition, the Gase music production is a preview production that does not develop enough to expect the development to reach sign production. Then, the Gase music production is terminated at the timing of T4, the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T5, and the production symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T6. In this way, in the music preview patterns 2 to 4, the music production is executed only once.

FIG. 55 (c) is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 5 to 7.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the present sign effect are started. After that, at the timing of T1, the present music production consisting of the display of the development suggestion production and any combination of the music A to C is executed. In addition, this music production is a notice production that confirms the development to the reach sign production. Then, at the timing of T4, a gasselech sign effect consisting of a development effect and a reach fanning effect is executed. It should be noted that the gasselech sign production is a non-development notice production that is expected to develop into a musical reach production. After that, the gasselech sign effect is terminated at the timing of T7, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T8, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T9. In this way, in the music preview patterns 5 to 7, the music production is executed only once.

FIG. 55 (d) is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 8 to 10.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the present sign effect are started, and at the timing of T1, the display of the development suggestion effect and the present music effect consisting of any combination of the songs A to C are executed. Then, at the timing of T4, the main reach sign production consisting of the development production and the reach fanning production is executed. In addition, this reach sign production is a preliminary production that confirms the development of the reach production of the music system. After that, the reach effect is started at the timing of T7, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T10, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T11. In this way, in the music preview patterns 8 to 10, the music production is executed only once.

FIG. 55 (e) is a diagram showing an example of production by the music preview pattern 8.
FIG. 55 (e1) is an example of the effect during the present sign effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the character information (“chans?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Then, the development suggestion image (window) G3 shown in FIG. 55 (e2) is formed by the displayed effect image G1. In the case of the Gase sign effect, the effect image G1 and the character information G2 disappear without forming the development suggestion image (window) G3.

FIG. 55 (e2) is a production example of the first music production. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. The effect of making it full screen is performed. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 displays history information (“music A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player the music output during the music preview production. In addition, in the case of the first music production of Gase, the development suggestion image G3 disappears without being made full screen.

FIGS. 55 (e3) and 55 (e4) are production examples of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which character information (“Yosha! Yaruzo!”) Suggesting development is displayed on the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and then the effect is performed. A reach fanning effect that is expected to reach is executed using the symbol 70a. Further, the history information G4 is still displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. The music preview effect according to the music preview pattern 8 corresponds to the productions shown in FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e4), but may be FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e3) or FIGS. 55 (e1) to (e5). ) May be up to.

FIG. 55 (e5) is an example of the reach effect. Here, the music A output by the music production is output from the audio output device 9, and the character cuts through the production symbols 70a one after another on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. A display effect is performed. The music output during the reach production is not limited to the music A output in the music production, and other music (for example, DF) may be randomly selected and output. A plurality of songs (for example, songs GI for song A, songs J to L for song B, and songs M to O for song C) are associated with each of C, and one of those songs. You may output one.

FIGS. 55 (e6) and 55 (e7) are production examples when the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop). In FIG. 55 (e6), as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Character information ("sorry") indicating that the image is lost is displayed. Further, in FIG. 55 (e7), as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the jackpot result mode (“777”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) is displayed. ) 71 displays textual information (“sorry”) indicating that it is a big hit.

Next, FIG. 56 will be described.
FIG. 56A is a timing chart of the music preview patterns 11 to 13.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the main sign effect are started, and at the timing of T1, the display of the development suggestion effect and the Gase music effect consisting of any combination of the songs A to C are executed. Then, when the Gase music production is finished at the timing of T2, the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T3. After that, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed to indicate that the pseudo-continuous notice has been successfully generated at the timing of T4, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is restarted at the timing of T5. Then, the present music production is executed at the timing of T6, and the present reach sign production is executed at the timing of T7. After that, this reach sign production will start at the timing of T7. After that, the reach effect is started at the timing of T8, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T9, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T10. In this way, in the music preview patterns 11 to 13, the music production is executed twice.

FIG. 56B is a diagram showing an example of production by the music preview pattern 11.
FIG. 56 (b1) is an example of the effect of this sign effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the character information (“chans?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Then, the development suggestion image (window) G3 shown in (e2) is formed by the displayed effect image G1.

FIG. 56 (b2) is a production example of the first music production of Gase. In the first music production, the intro (introduction) part of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 according to the rhythm of the music A. The effect that G3 expands is performed, and finally it disappears without becoming full screen. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 displays history information (“music A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player the music output during the music preview production.

FIG. 56 (b3) is an example of a pseudo-continuous production. Here, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed in which a window G5 consisting of character information indicating that the pseudo-continuous notice has been successfully generated on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed, and a second image display device (sub-liquid crystal display) is displayed. ) 71, the history information G4 remains displayed.

FIG. 56 (b4) is a production example of the first music production. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. The effect of making it full screen is performed. Further, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production is updated on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 (change from "music A" to "A → A").

56 (b5) and 56 (b6) are production examples of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which character information (“Yosha! Yaruzo!”) Suggesting development is displayed on the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and then the effect is performed. A reach fanning effect that is expected to reach is executed using the symbol 70a. Further, the history information G4 is still displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Although the music preview production by the music preview pattern 11 is the production of FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b6), FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b5) may be used, or FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b1) to (b1). It may be up to b7).

FIG. 56 (b7) is an example of the reach effect. Here, the music A finally output in the music production is output from the audio output device 9, and the character cuts through the production symbols 70a one after another on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. Such a display effect is performed. The music output during the reach production is not limited to the music A output in the music production, and other music (for example, DF) may be randomly selected and output. A plurality of songs (for example, songs GI for song A, songs J to L for song B, and songs M to O for song C) are associated with each of C, and one of those songs. You may output one. It should be noted that the display effect mode of the reach effect may be different or the same for each song output during the reach effect.

FIG. 56 (b8) is an example of an effect in which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop) in the loss result mode. Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Character information ("sorry") indicating that is displayed.

Next, FIG. 57 will be described.
FIG. 57A is a timing chart when the music preview patterns 14 to 16 are executed. Since the execution timings of the various effects executed in the music notice patterns 14 to 16 are the same as the timings of the various effects executed in the music notice patterns 11 to 13 shown in FIG. 56, the description thereof is omitted here. do.

FIG. 57B is a diagram showing an example of production by the music preview pattern 14. As for the production example by the music preview pattern 14, since there are many similar parts except that the expectation (reliability) that is a big hit is different from the production example by the music preview pattern 8 shown in FIG. 55, only the different parts will be described. ..

FIG. 57 (b4) is a production example of the second music production. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. The effect of making it full screen is performed. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production is updated (changed from "music A" to "A → B").

FIG. 57 (b5) is an example of the production of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which thick character information (“Yosha! I'll do it!”) Suggesting development is displayed on the development suggestion image G3 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. Specifically, the text information ("Yosha! I'll do it!") Is bold in order to raise expectations for the jackpot, but the display mode is changed by changing the text color or the background of the text. Just do it.

Further, FIG. 57 (b8) is an example of an effect in which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop) in the jackpot result mode. Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the jackpot result mode (“777”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the jackpot is hit on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Character information (“big hit”) indicating that is displayed.

Next, FIG. 58 will be described.
FIG. 58A is a timing chart when the music preview patterns 17 to 25 are executed.
At the timing of T0, the variation display of the effect symbol 70a and the main sign effect are started, and at the timing of T1, the display of the development suggestion effect and the Gase music effect consisting of any combination of the songs A to C are executed. Then, when the Gase music production is finished at the timing of T2, the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T3. After that, a pseudo-continuous effect is executed to indicate that the pseudo-continuous notice has been successfully generated at the timing of T4, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is restarted at the timing of T5. Then, the Gase music production is executed at the timing of T6. Then, when the Gase music production is finished at the timing of T7, the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T8. After that, the pseudo-continuous effect is executed at the timing of T9, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is restarted at the timing of T10. Then, the present music production is executed at the timing of T11. After that, this reach sign production will start at the timing of T12. After that, the reach effect is started at the timing of T13, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T14, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped until the timing of T15. In this way, in the music preview patterns 17 to 22, the music production is executed three times.

FIG. 58B is a diagram showing an example of production by the music preview pattern 20.
FIG. 58 (b1) is an example of the effect of this sign effect. Here, the effect image G1 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the character information (“chans?”) G2 is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Then, the development suggestion image (window) G3 shown in (b2) is formed by the displayed effect image G1.

FIG. 58 (b2) is a production example of the first music production of Gase. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. The production is performed, and finally it disappears without becoming full screen. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 displays history information (“music A”) G4 indicating (notifying) the player the music output during the music preview production.

FIG. 58 (b3) is an example of a pseudo-continuous production. Here, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed in which a window G5 consisting of character information indicating that the pseudo-continuous notice has been successfully generated on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed, and a second image display device (sub-liquid crystal display) is displayed. ) 71, the history information G4 remains displayed.

FIG. 58 (b4) is a production example of the first music production of Gase. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music A is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music A. The production is performed, and finally it disappears without becoming full screen. Further, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production is updated on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 (change from "music A" to "A → A").

FIG. 58 (b5) is an example of a pseudo-continuous production. Here, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed in which a window G5 consisting of character information indicating that the pseudo-continuous notice has been successfully generated on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed, and a second image display device (sub-liquid crystal display) is displayed. ) 71, the history information G4 remains displayed.

FIG. 58 (b6) is a production example of the second music production. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. The effect of making it full screen is performed. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production is updated (changed from "music A" to "A → A → B"). To.

58 (b7) and 58 (b8) are production examples of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which character information (“Yosha! Yaruzo!”) Suggesting development is displayed on the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, and then the effect is performed. A reach fanning effect that is expected to reach is executed using the symbol 70a. Further, the history information G4 is still displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Although the music preview production by the music preview pattern 20 is the production from (b1) to (b8), it may be (b1) to (b7) or (b1) to (b9). ..

FIG. 58 (b9) is an example of the reach effect. Here, the music B output by the music production is output from the audio output device 9, and the character cuts through the production symbols 70a one after another on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. A display effect is performed. The music output during the reach production is not limited to the music B output in the music production, and other music (for example, DF) may be randomly selected and output, or the music A to A plurality of songs (for example, songs GI for song A, songs J to L for song B, and songs M to O for song C) are associated with each of C, and one of those songs. You may output one.

FIG. 58 (b10) is an example of an effect in which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop) in the loss result mode. Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the loss result mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Character information ("sorry") indicating that is displayed.

Next, FIG. 59 will be described.
FIG. 59A is a timing chart when the music preview patterns 26 to 28 are executed. Since the execution timings of the various effects executed in the music notice patterns 26 to 28 are the same as the timings of the various effects executed in the music notice patterns 17 to 25 shown in FIG. 57, the description will be given here. Omit.

FIG. 59B is a diagram showing an example of production by the music preview pattern 26. As for the production example by the music preview pattern 28, there are many similar parts except that the expectation (reliability) that is a big hit is different from the production example by the music preview pattern 20 shown in FIG. 58, so only the different parts will be described. ..

FIG. 59 (b4) is a production example of the second music production of Gase. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music B is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music B. The effect of making it full screen is performed. Further, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production is updated on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 (changed from "music A" to "A → B").

FIG. 59 (b6) is a production example of the third music production. Here, the intro (introduction) part of the music C is output from the audio output device 9, and the development suggestion image G3 displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is enlarged in accordance with the rhythm of the music C. The effect of making it full screen is performed. In addition, the display of the history information G4 indicating the music output during the music preview production is updated on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 (changed from "A → B" to "A → B → C"). Will be done.

FIG. 59 (b7) is an example of the production of the present reach sign effect. Here, a development effect is performed in which thick character information (“Yosha! I'll do it!”) Suggesting development is displayed on the development suggestion image G3 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. Specifically, the text information ("Yosha! Yaruzo") is bold in order to raise expectations for the jackpot, but the display mode can be changed by changing the text color or the background of the text. Just do it.

FIG. 59 (b10) is an example of an effect in which the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed (temporary stop and main stop) in the jackpot result mode. Here, as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the jackpot result mode (“777”) is stopped and displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the jackpot is hit on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Character information (“big hit”) indicating that is displayed.

As described above, in the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment, the higher the expectation that the jackpot game (special game state) occurs, the more the number of songs (type of music, music type,) output during the execution of the music advance notice effect. The number of output times) is set to be large, but on the contrary, the higher the expectation that a jackpot game (special game state) will occur, the more songs will be output during the execution of the music preview effect (specific effect). (Type of music, number of outputs) may be reduced. Further, although the type of music and the number of times of output are mentioned as the number of music, only one of them may be used.

Further, in the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment, in the case of a variable effect pattern in which the reach state does not occur, from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 70a to the first temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a. Although the music production is performed in the meantime, the music production may be performed after the first temporary stop of the production symbol 70a is performed. Further, the music production may be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 2 times) before the temporary stop of the effect symbol 70a, and the music production may be performed a predetermined number of times (1 to 2 times) after the production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped. ..

Further, in the case of the reach variation effect pattern in which the reach state occurs, the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment is a song from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol 70a to the occurrence of the reach state. Although the production is performed, the music production may be performed after the reach state occurs. Further, the music production may be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 2 times) before the occurrence of the reach state, and the music production may be performed a predetermined number of times (1 to 2 times) after the occurrence of the reach state.

Further, in the music preview production (specific production) of the present embodiment, the intro (introduction) part of any of the music A to C is output during the music production, but the music is composed of a plurality of elements such as a melody part and a chorus part. When it is configured, the melody portion may be used for the musical composition production, or the chorus portion may be used. Further, the types of music output during the music production are not limited to the three types A to C, and may be more or less. Further, although the music production is performed intermittently, it may be performed continuously.

Further, although the music preview effect (specific effect) of the present embodiment is composed of a combination of the output of the music and the display effect, it may be only the output of the music. Further, in order to make it easier for the player to grasp the degree of expectation of the special gaming state, the history information of the music output during the music preview production is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. , It may be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, or may not be displayed on either the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. You may.

Further, while the music preview effect (specific effect) is being executed and / or not being executed, an explanatory effect explaining what the music preview effect is like may be executed. Specifically, "The expectation of a big hit changes depending on the number of songs (type of music) output for the music preview production" and "The larger the number of songs (type of music) output for the music preview production, the bigger the hit." It is preferable to display the character information such as "There is a high possibility that the music will be" on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71.

(Step-up notice mode determination table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table referred to when the step-up notice pattern is determined in the step-up notice pattern determination process of step S1212-18. Specifically, FIG. 60 (a) is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table for loss, and FIG. 60 (b) is a diagram showing a step-up notice mode determination table for big hits.

The step-up notice effect changes (changes) the step effect image displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 over a plurality of stages. ) This is a notice effect that announces that a predetermined specific effect will be executed. In addition, the specific production is a production that is expected to be a big hit (sudden probability change), and can be rephrased as an acquisition challenge production for acquiring a big hit (sudden probability change).

In the step-up notice mode determination table for loss in FIG. 60 (a) and the step-up notice mode determination table for jackpot in FIG. 60 (b), a variable effect pattern and a notice acquired when the step-up notice pattern is determined are displayed. The selection rate based on the random value for determining the mode and the type of the step-up notice pattern are associated with each other. The types of step-up notice effects are roughly divided into three types, step-up notice effects 1 to step-up notice effects 3, and step-up notice patterns with branch numbers for each step-up notice effects 1 to 3. Are set multiple times.

The step-up notice effect 1 is the degree of expectation (acquisition challenge effect) in which the character information to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 is executed. It is a notice effect that changes stepwise (continuously or intermittently) according to the degree of expectation (reliability) that becomes a big hit (reliability) or sudden change, and the maximum (final) number of steps (number of steps) is "3". Is set to. It should be noted that the execution of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is set to be confirmed when the third step effect (step effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps "3" is started.

The step-up notice effect 2 is the degree of expectation (acquisition challenge effect) for executing a specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) on a character image to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. It is a notice effect that changes stepwise (continuously or intermittently) according to the degree of expectation (reliability) that becomes a big hit (reliability) or sudden change, and the maximum number of steps (number of steps) is set to "4". ing. Even if the fourth step effect (step effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps "4" is started, the execution of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the fourth step effect is executed to the end. Is set to.

The step-up notice effect 3 is the degree of expectation (acquisition challenge effect) for executing a specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) on the telop image to be displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and / or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. It is a notice effect that changes stepwise (continuously or intermittently) according to the degree of expectation (reliability) that becomes a big hit (reliability) or sudden change, and the maximum number of steps (number of steps) is set to "3". ing. Even if the third step effect (step effect) corresponding to the maximum number of steps "3" is started, the execution of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the third step effect is executed to the end. Is set to.

Further, in the following description, the word "step up" may be expressed as "SU". That is, the step-up notice effect may be expressed as a SU notice effect, the step-up notice mode determination table may be expressed as a SU notice mode determination table, and the step-up notice pattern may be expressed as a SU notice pattern.

In the "SU notice pattern 1-1", the character information G1 corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 1 is gradually drawn on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. It is a notice effect that executes a step effect.

In the "SU notice pattern 1-2", after the first step effect of the SU advance notice effect 1 is executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a, the character information G2 corresponding to the step 2 of the SU advance notice effect 1 is displayed as the first image. This is a preview effect for executing the second step effect that is gradually drawn on the device (main liquid crystal display) 70.

The "SU notice pattern 1-3" is the character information G3 corresponding to step 3 of the SU notice effect 1 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of the SU notice effect 1 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Is gradually drawn on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and after the character information G3 in step 3 is drawn, the character information G4 (character information G1) indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end is completed. This is a preliminary announcement effect for executing the third step effect of displaying (an image in which 3 to 3 are lined up).

The "SU notice pattern 2-1" is a first step in which the character image A corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 2 is gradually made to appear on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. It is a notice production to execute the production.

In the "SU notice pattern 2-2", the character image B corresponding to step 2 of the SU notice effect 2 is displayed as the first image after the first step effect of the SU notice effect 2 is executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a preview effect for executing the first step effect that is gradually made to appear on the device (main liquid crystal display) 70.

The "SU notice pattern 2-3" is a character image C corresponding to step 3 of the SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of the SU notice effect 2 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Is a notice effect for executing the third step effect of gradually appearing on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70.

The "SU notice pattern 2-4" is set in step 4 of the SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 2 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a warning effect in which the corresponding character information D is gradually made to appear on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the fourth step effect A, which ends without the character image D completely appearing, is executed.

The "SU notice pattern 2-5" is set in step 4 of the SU notice effect 2 after executing the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 2 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a preview effect in which the corresponding character information D is gradually made to appear on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the fourth step effect B in which the character image D completely appears is executed.

The "SU notice pattern 3-1" is the first step of gradually causing the telop image A corresponding to step 1 of the SU notice effect 3 to appear on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. It is a notice production to execute the production.

In the "SU notice pattern 3-2", the telop image B corresponding to step 2 of the SU notice effect 3 is displayed as the first image after the first step effect of the SU notice effect 3 is executed during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a preview effect for executing the second step effect that is gradually made to appear on the device (main liquid crystal display) 70.

The "SU notice pattern 3-3" is a telop image C corresponding to step 3 of the SU notice effect 3 after executing the first step effect and the second step effect of the SU notice effect 3 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. Is a notice effect for executing the third step effect A, which gradually appears on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and ends without the telop image C completely appearing.

The "SU notice pattern 3-4" is set in step 4 of the SU notice effect 3 after executing the first step effect, the second step effect, and the third step effect of the SU notice effect 3 during the variable display of the effect symbol 70a. This is a preview effect in which the corresponding telop image D is gradually made to appear on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the third step effect A in which the telop image D completely appears is executed.

The first feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that when the number of executed step effects is large (3 or 4), the number of executed step effects is small (1 or 2). There is a higher expectation that a specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) will be executed. As a result, the player becomes interested in the number of step effects to be performed, and the interest in the step-up notice effect and the interest in the game are improved.

As the second feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, the expectation (reliability) that suddenly becomes a big hit in the order of step-up notice effect 1 <step-up notice effect 2 <step-up notice effect 3 is high. There are some points. As a result, the player becomes interested in the type of step-up notice effect to be executed, and the interest in the step-up notice effect and the interest in the game are improved.

The third feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60 is that the start timing is delayed (the start timing is different) in the order of step-up notice effect 1 <step-up notice effect 2 <step-up notice effect 3. Be done. As a result, it is possible to prolong the period for which the player is expected to start the step-up notice effect. In addition, since it becomes possible to infer the type of step-up notice effect to be executed depending on the start time of the step-up notice effect, the interest of the game is improved. The start timings of the step-up notice effects 1 to 3 may be the same.

As the fourth feature of the step-up notice mode determination table shown in FIG. 60, a step-up notice effect (SU notice effect 1 and SU notice effect 3) in which the final step (final stage) is set to "3" and the final step The point that the step-up notice effect (SU notice effect 2) in which (final stage) is set to "4" is set. As a result, the number of steps that the player has the highest expectation for the development to the specific effect changes depending on the type of the step-up notice effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the step-up advance notice effect.

(Example of step-up notice production)
61 to 63 are diagrams showing a timing chart and an example of the step-up notice effect. Specifically, FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a step-up notice effect 1, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a step-up notice effect 2, and FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a step-up notice effect 3.

First, FIG. 61 will be described.
FIG. 61A is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-1.
When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of SU notice effect 1 is started at the timing of T1 (20th frame), and the first step effect is finished at the timing of T2, the T3 The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect symbol 70a is actually stopped by the timing of T4.

FIG. 61 (b) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-2.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing of T1. Then, when the second step effect of SU notice effect 1 is started at the timing of T2 and the second step effect is completed at the timing of T5, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect symbol is temporarily stopped by the timing of T7. This stop 70a.

FIG. 61 (c) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 1-3.
The variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, and the second step effect is started at the timing of T2. Then, the third step production (final step production) of SU notice production 1 is started at the timing of T5, and the specific production (acquisition challenge production) is started at the timing of T8 which overlaps with the final part of the third step production, and the T9 When the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, the specific effect is ended at the timing of T10, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T11.

FIG. 61 (d) is a diagram showing an example of production by the SU notice pattern 1-3.
FIG. 61 (d1) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed in a state where all the character information G1 corresponding to step 1 is drawn, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 is shown to be step 1. The character information M1 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 1-1, the first step effect ends without drawing all the character information G1.

FIG. 61 (d2) is an example of the effect immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed in a state where all the character information G2 corresponding to step 2 is drawn, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 is shown to be step 2. Character information M2 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 1-2, the second step effect ends without drawing all the character information G2.

FIG. 61 (d3) is an example of an effect during the third step effect. Here, the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed in a state where all the character information G3 corresponding to step 3 is drawn, and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 is shown to be step 3. The character information M3 is displayed.

FIG. 61 (d4) is an example of the production immediately before the end of the third step production (the final stage portion). Here, the character information G4 indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the player is congratulated on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Character information M4 ("I did it") is displayed. In addition, although the illustration is omitted to avoid the incomprehensible appearance, the first image is displayed from the timing of T8 where the final part of the third step production and the early part of the specific production (acquisition challenge production) overlap. The device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed so that the introduction image G5 of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) gradually appears on the front side of the character information G4.

FIG. 61 (d5) is an example of the production immediately after the start of the specific production (acquisition challenge production). Here, the character information M5 (“) indicating that the introduced image G5 of the specific effect is completely displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the specific effect is being performed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71. "Challenge to acquire") is displayed.

FIG. 61 (d6) is an example of a production in the middle of a specific production (acquisition challenge production). Here, an image in which an enemy and an ally character start a battle is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and character information indicating that a specific effect is being produced on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. M5 (“Challenge to acquire”) is displayed.

FIG. 61 (d7) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect). Here, as a result of the battle between the two characters performed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the image in which the ally character wins is displayed, and the image is displayed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Character information M5 (“acquisition challenge in progress”) indicating that the specific production is in progress is displayed.

FIG. 61 (d8) is an example of the production after the specific production (acquisition challenge production) is completed. Here, an image indicating that a sudden change (big hit) is suddenly acquired is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and character information (""" congratulating the player on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. You did it! ") Is displayed. Further, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the combination of the effect symbols 70a, which is the jackpot result mode, is stopped and displayed (main stop) in accordance with the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol. Here, the combination of the effect symbols 70a, which is the jackpot result mode, is stopped and displayed (main stop), but if the result of the jackpot lottery is a loss, the combination of the effect symbols 70a, which is the loss result mode, is stopped. It will be displayed (mainly stopped).

It should be noted that, as a feature of the step-up notice effect 1 shown in FIG. 61, the first step is due to the fact that the transition to the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is confirmed when the third step effect (final step) is started. The point that step production time <third step production time <second step production time can be mentioned. By doing so, it is possible to raise the expectation of whether or not the player will develop to the third step production at the time of the second step production (in the middle of the step-up notice production) where the player does not have much expectation. , It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the step-up notice effect 1 of the present embodiment, the first step effect time <third step effect time is set, but conversely, the first step effect time> the third step effect time is set. May be good. By doing so, it becomes easy to raise the expectation of the player at the time of the first step production.

Next, FIG. 62 will be described.
FIG. 62A is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-1.
When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing of T1 (30th frame), and the first step effect is finished at the timing of T2, the T3 The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect symbol 70a is actually stopped by the timing of T4.

FIG. 62 (b) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-2.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing of T1. Then, at the timing of T2, the second step effect of the SU notice effect 2 is started. After that, when the second step effect is completed at the timing of T4, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T7.

FIG. 62 (c) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-3.
The variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step of SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing of T4. Start the production. After that, when the third step effect is completed at the timing of T5, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T7.

FIG. 62 (d) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-4.
The variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step effect is started at the timing of T4. Then, at the timing of T5, the fourth step effect A (final step effect: unfinished) of the SU notice effect 3 is started. After that, when the fourth step effect A is terminated halfway at the timing of T7 and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T9, the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T10.

FIG. 62 (e) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 2-5.
The variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step effect is started at the timing of T4. The fourth step production B (final step production: completion) is started at the timing of T5. After that, when the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is started at the timing of T8 and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T11, the specific effect ends at the timing of T12 and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T13. do.

FIG. 62 (f) is a diagram showing an example of an effect according to the SU notice pattern 2-5.
FIG. 62 (f1) is an example of an effect immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the character image G1 corresponding to step 1 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 in a state where all the character images G1 corresponding to step 1 appear, and the characters indicating that step 1 is performed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Information M1 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 2-1, the first step effect ends without all the character images G1 appearing.

FIG. 62 (f2) is an example of the effect immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the character image G2 corresponding to step 2 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 in a state where all the character images G2 appear, and the characters indicating that step 2 is performed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Information M2 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 2-2, the second step effect ends without all the character images G2 appearing.

FIG. 62 (f3) is an example of the effect immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the character image G3 corresponding to step 3 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 in a state where all the character images G3 corresponding to step 3 appear, and the characters indicating that step 3 is performed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Information M3 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 2-3, the third step effect ends without all the character images G3 appearing.

FIG. 62 (f4) is an example of the effect immediately before the end of the fourth step effect. Here, the character image G4 corresponding to step 4 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 in a state where all the character images G4 corresponding to step 4 appear, and the characters indicating that step 4 is performed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Information M4 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 2-4, the third step effect ends without all the character images G4 appearing.

Since FIGS. 62 (f5) to (f8) have the same flow of production as FIGS. 61 (d5) to (d8), detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in FIG. 62 (f8), FIG. 61 (d8). ), In the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the combination of the effect symbols 70a that becomes the jackpot result mode (or the loss result mode) according to the timing of the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (main stop). Will be done. The content of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) via the step-up notice effect 1 and the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) via the step-up advance notice effect 2 may be different. The type of specific effect to be executed may be determined by lottery each time.

As a feature of the step-up notice effect 2 shown in FIG. 62, the first step effect is due to the fact that the transition to the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the fourth step effect (final step) is completed. The point is that time <second step production time <third step production time <fourth step production time. By doing so, the player's expectation and impatience can be effectively fueled by the performance difference from the step-up notice effect 1 (whether or not the transition to the specific effect is confirmed by executing the final step effect). And a synergistic effect can be expected.

In the step-up notice effect 2, the third step effect time <the effect time of the fourth step effect A is set, but the fourth step effect A is incomplete because all the character images G4 do not appear. Step effect time> The effect time of the fourth step effect A may be set. Further, the time of all step effects may be the same, or the effect time may be longer when all step effects are completed than when they are not completed.

Next, FIG. 63 will be described.
FIG. 63A is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-1.
When the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect of SU notice effect 3 is started at the timing of T1 (40th frame), and the first step effect is finished at the timing of T2, the T3 The effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing, and the effect symbol 70a is actually stopped by the timing of T4.

FIG. 63 (b) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-2.
The variation display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, and the first step effect is started at the timing of T1. Then, at the timing of T2, the second step effect of the SU notice effect 3 is started. After that, when the second step effect is completed at the timing of T5, the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T6, and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T7.

FIG. 63 (c) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-3.
The variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step of SU notice effect 2 is started at the timing of T5. Start production A (final step production: unfinished). After that, when the third step effect A is terminated at the timing of T6 and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the effect symbol 70a is actually stopped by the timing of T7.

FIG. 63 (d) is a timing chart of the SU notice pattern 3-4.
The variable display of the effect symbol 70a is started at the timing of T0, the first step effect is started at the timing of T1, the second step effect is started at the timing of T2, and the third step effect B (final step) is started at the timing of T5. Direction: Completion) is started. After that, when the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is started at the timing of T8 and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the timing of T9, the specific effect ends at the timing of T10 and the effect symbol 70a is finally stopped by the timing of T11. do.

FIG. 63 (e) is a diagram showing an example of production by the SU notice pattern 3-4.
FIG. 63 (e1) is an example of the effect immediately before the end of the first step effect. Here, the telop image G1 corresponding to step 1 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 in a state where all the telop images G1 appear, and the characters indicating that step 1 is performed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Information M1 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 3-1, the first step effect ends without all the telop images G1 appearing.

FIG. 63 (e2) is an example of the effect immediately before the end of the second step effect. Here, the telop image G2 corresponding to step 2 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 in a state where all the telop images G2 appear, and the characters indicating that step 2 is performed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Information M2 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 3-2, the second step production ends without all the telop images G2 appearing.

FIG. 63 (e3) is an example of the effect immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the telop image G3 corresponding to step 3 is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 in a state where all the telop images G3 appear, and the characters indicating that step 3 is performed on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Information M3 is displayed. In the case of the SU notice pattern 3-3, the third step effect ends without all the telop images G3 appearing.

FIG. 63 (e4) is an example of the effect immediately before the end of the third step effect. Here, the character information G4 indicating that the third step effect has been executed to the end is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the player is congratulated on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71. Character information M4 ("I did it") is displayed.

63 (e5) to (e8) have the same flow of production as FIGS. 61 (d5) to (d8) and FIGS. 62 (f5) to (f8). In 63 (e8), similarly to FIGS. 61 (d8) and 62 (e8), in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the jackpot result mode (or the loss result) is matched with the timing of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol. The combination of the effect symbols 70a that is (aspect) is stopped and displayed (mainly stopped). In addition, the contents of the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when going through the step-up notice effect 1 and the step-up advance notice effect 2 and the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) when going through the step-up advance notice effect 3 are different. Alternatively, the type of the specific effect to be executed may be determined by lottery each time the specific effect is executed.

As a feature of the step-up notice effect 3 shown in FIG. 63, the first step effect is due to the fact that the transition to the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is not confirmed unless the third step effect (final step) is completed. The point is that time <second step production time <third step production time. By doing so, the player's expectation and impatience can be effectively fueled by the performance difference from the step-up notice effect 1 (whether or not the transition to the specific effect is confirmed by executing the final step effect). And a synergistic effect can be expected.

In the step-up notice effect 3 of the present embodiment, the second step effect time <the effect time of the third step effect A is set, but the third step effect A is incomplete because all the character images G4 do not appear. Therefore, the production time of the second step production time> the production time of the third step production A may be set. Further, the time of all step effects may be the same, or the effect time may be longer when all step effects are completed than when they are not completed.

Further, as a feature of the step-up notice effects 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 61 to 63, the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) starts from the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol 70a regardless of which step-up advance notice effect is executed. The time until it is done is the same (374th frame), and all the step effects (from the first step effect to the last step effect) are executed by then. Specifically, in the step-up notice effect 1, at least a part of the third step effect is performed by the 374th frame because the transition (execution) to the specific effect is confirmed when the execution of the third step effect is started. Is executed. In the step-up notice effect 2, the transition (execution) to the specific effect is confirmed when the fourth step effect B is executed to the end (completion), so that the fourth step effect B is the last (completed) by the 374th frame. ) Is executed. In the step-up notice effect 3, the transition (execution) to the specific effect is confirmed when the third step effect B is executed to the end (completion), so that the third step effect B is the last (completed) by the 374th frame. ) Is executed. That is, by the time the specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is started, the player is notified (suggested) that the transition to the specific effect has been confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to execute different step-up advance notice effects in the same variable effect pattern, and it is possible to expand the selection range of the step-up advance notice effect in one variable effect pattern.

(Big hit production pattern determination process)
The jackpot effect pattern determination process of the effect control unit 130 m will be described with reference to FIG. 64. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a jackpot effect pattern determination process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, in step S1226-1, the sub CPU 130a confirms the content of the opening designation command determined to have been received in step S1225, and in step S1222-2, selects the jackpot effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65. The jackpot effect pattern determination table is stored in the sub RAM 130c, and the details thereof will be described later with reference to FIG. 65.

In step S1226-3, the sub CPU 130a collates the opening designation command confirmed in step S1226-1 with the jackpot effect pattern determination table selected in step S1226-2, and the sub CPU 130a collates the jackpot effect pattern determination table according to the jackpot effect pattern determination table. The effect pattern is determined, and in step S1226-4, the determined jackpot effect pattern is stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step S1226-5, the sub CPU 130a specifies the jackpot effect pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot effect pattern determined in step S1226-3, and sets the specified jackpot effect pattern designation command in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c. ..

The jackpot effect pattern designation command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c is transmitted to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 in the data output process of step S1600. .. Then, the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170 display the jackpot effect corresponding to the jackpot effect pattern designation command (big hit effect pattern) on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. A second image display device (sub-liquid crystal display) 71, an audio output device 9, a panel lighting device 74, a frame lighting device 10, a panel drive device 75, and other production devices are used to execute the command.

In step S1226-6, the sub CPU 130a sets the right-handed display data for causing the right-handed second display 87 to display the right-handed display (LED lighting) in a predetermined processing area, and determines the jackpot effect pattern this time. To finish. As a result, when the right-handed display data is set in the predetermined processing area, the display control data is created in step S1500, and the created data is output in step S1600, so that the right-handed second display is displayed. Right-handed display is performed at 87.

(Big hit production pattern determination table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a jackpot effect pattern determination table referred to when the jackpot effect pattern is determined in step S1226-3.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the jackpot effect pattern determination table, the opening designation command and the special game effect pattern are associated with each other, and the effect contents are described as a reference.

In the jackpot production pattern 1, the promotion effect was executed between the opening of the big prize opening 50 in the fifth round game and the closing of the big winning opening 50 in the eighth round game, and as a result, the promotion failed. It is a jackpot production pattern that executes a promotion failure production that announces (notifies) that.

The jackpot production pattern 2 is a promotion success that announces (notifies) that the promotion was successful as a result of executing the promotion production between the opening of the big prize opening 50 and the closing of the fourth round game in the fifth round game. It is a jackpot production pattern that executes the production.

In the jackpot production pattern 6, the promotion effect was executed between the opening of the big prize opening 50 in the fifth round game and the closing of the big winning opening 50 in the 15th round game, and as a result, the promotion failed. It is a jackpot production pattern that executes a promotion failure production that announces (notifies) that.

The jackpot production pattern 7 executes promotion production between the opening of the big prize opening 50 in the fifth round game and the closing of the eleventh round, and as a result, the promotion is successful to announce (notify) that the promotion was successful. It is a jackpot production pattern that executes the production.

The jackpot effect patterns 3, 4, 5, 8, and 9 are jackpot effect patterns in which the promotion effect for producing whether or not the type of the jackpot game is promoted is not executed.

The jackpot effect pattern 5 is a jackpot effect pattern that executes a sudden probability change effect that announces (notifies) that the game has entered a high-probability gaming state.

(Data creation process)
The data creation process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a data creation process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, in step S1500-1, the sub CPU 130a is the first special symbol second display device based on the special symbol variation display data and the special symbol stop display data set in the variation effect pattern determination process or the effect symbol variation stop process. Display control data for the special symbol second display corresponding to the special symbol display signal for turning on, blinking, or turning off the LED of the 80 or the second special symbol second display 81 is created.

In step S1500-2, the sub CPU 130a is the LED of the normal symbol second display 82 based on the normal symbol fluctuation display data and the normal symbol stop display data set in the normal symbol roulette effect determination process or the normal symbol variation stop process. Create display control data for the second display of the normal symbol corresponding to the normal symbol display signal for turning on, blinking, or turning off.

In step S1500-3, the sub CPU 130a has the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 and the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 based on the special symbol hold display data set in the special symbol hold storage update process. Create display control data for the special symbol hold second display corresponding to the special symbol hold display signal for turning on, blinking, or turning off the LED of.

In step S1500-4, the sub CPU 130a turns on, blinks, or turns off the LED of the normal symbol hold second display 85 based on the normal symbol hold display data set in the normal symbol hold storage update process. Create display control data for the second display with normal symbol hold corresponding to the hold display signal.

In step S1500-5, the sub CPU 130a turns on or off the LED of the right-handed second display 87 based on the right-handed display data or the right-handed erase data set in the game state setting process or the jackpot effect pattern determination process. The display control data for the right-handed second display corresponding to the right-handed display signal to be displayed is created.

(Data output processing)
The data output process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing a data output process in the effect control unit 130 m.

First, in step S1600-1, the sub CPU 130a includes a first special symbol second display 80, a second special symbol second display 81, a normal symbol second display 82, and a first special symbol hold second display 83. , 2nd special symbol hold 2nd display 84, normal symbol hold 2nd display 85, right-handed 2nd display 87, created in steps S1500-1 to S1500-5 above to light each LED. Performs output processing for indicators that output various display control data.

In step S1600-2, the sub CPU 130a performs a command output process for transmitting various commands set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c to the image control unit 140, the sound control unit 150, the lamp control unit 160, and the drive control unit 170. conduct.

(Specific examples of display results of each display)
Here, using FIG. 68, the first special symbol 1st display 60, the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, the 1st special symbol 2nd display 80, the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81, and the second 1 A specific example of a display result that is stopped and displayed as a result of variable display on the image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 will be described.

First, the details of the variable display of various symbols performed before the display result is derived on each display will be described.

In the first special symbol 1st display 60 and the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, the right ends of the 6 LEDs arranged in the left-right direction, which are the special symbol display areas when the power is turned on (RAM clear), are lit (missing special symbol). The initial special symbol of the same aspect as the above is displayed), and the variation display of the special symbol is performed based on the establishment of the starting condition. Specifically, the lighting position is repeatedly moved one by one in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.25 seconds) from the leftmost LED to the rightmost LED, and finally one or more LEDs are turned on. The loss special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol 1st display 60 is displayed until the variable display is started on the 1st special symbol 1st display 60 (the second special symbol 1st). While the variable display on the display 61 is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed), the state of being stopped and displayed is maintained, and the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first display 61 is Next, until the variation display is started on the second special symbol 1st display 61 (during the execution of the variation display on the 1st special symbol 1st display 60 or during the execution of the jackpot game), the display remains stopped. It is designed to maintain the state of.

In the first special symbol 2nd display 80 and the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81, one LED which is the 4th symbol display area is turned off when the power is turned on (RAM clear) (the same embodiment as the lost 4th symbol). The initial 4th symbol is displayed), and the 4th symbol is variablely displayed so as to be synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, one LED is turned off and turned on repeatedly at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.5 seconds), and finally the LED is turned off or turned on, and the lost 4th symbol or the jackpot 4th symbol is stopped and displayed. The LED lighting cycle may be earlier than the LED lighting cycle (0.25 seconds) of the special symbol first display.

Then, the lost 4th symbol or the jackpot 4th symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the 1st special symbol 2nd display 80 is continuously displayed until the variable display is started on the 1st special symbol 2nd display 80 (the 2nd special symbol). While the variable display on the 2nd display 81 is being executed or the jackpot game is being executed), the state in which the stop display remains is maintained, and the 2nd special symbol is lost on the 2nd indicator 81. The fourth symbol is stopped until the variable display is started on the second special symbol second display 81 (during the execution of the variable display on the first special symbol second display 80 or during the jackpot game). It is designed to maintain the displayed state.

In the image display device, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), the three effect symbols 70a (loss effect symbol and jackpot effect symbol) that are predetermined in the effect symbol display area (left side area, center area, right side area) are different from the initial effect. The symbol) is displayed, and the variable display of the effect symbol 70a is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the three effect symbols 70a are scrolled in the vertical direction, and finally the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, the lost effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area is until the next variable display is started, the customer waiting effect is executed, or the jackpot game is executed. Is maintained in the state of being stopped and displayed, and is not displayed in the effect symbol display area when the customer waiting effect is executed or the jackpot game is executed. The initial effect symbol may be the same as the loss effect symbol.

Further, in the image display device, when the power is turned on (RAM clear), one special symbol (initial special symbol having the same embodiment as the lost special symbol) is displayed in the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2. The variable display of the special symbol is performed so as to synchronize (synchronize) with the variable display of the special symbol. Specifically, the display mode of one special symbol is changed, and finally the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Then, the lost special symbol or the jackpot special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display area is until the next variable display is started, the customer waiting effect is executed, or the jackpot game is executed. Is maintained in the state of being stopped and displayed, and is not displayed in the special symbol display area when the customer waiting effect is executed or the jackpot game is executed.

As described above, the size of the fourth symbol display area arranged inside the game area 5a is smaller than that of the special symbol display area (the special symbol second indicator is smaller than the special symbol first indicator). Since the number of LEDs is smaller in the above), the area inside the game area 5a is not extremely narrowed. In addition, since the size of the special symbol display area is larger than that of the fourth symbol display area (the number of LEDs in the special symbol 1st display is larger than that in the special symbol 2nd display), the player can use it. On the other hand, it becomes easier to accurately notify the result of the game.

Next, a specific example of the display result that is stopped and displayed on each display as a result of the variable display will be described.

In the special symbol first display 60, 61, one of the display result showing one kind of lost special symbol and the display result showing 22 kinds of jackpot special symbols is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the loss special symbol, one LED at the right end is turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off as in the case of turning on the power (RAM clear). That is, the display result showing the lost special symbol of the first special symbol 1st display 60 and the display result showing the lost special symbol of the second special symbol 1st display 61 are the same display result.
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot special symbol, 2 to 5 LEDs are turned on and the remaining LEDs are turned off.

As a result of the special symbol determination, the game is different from the big hit game (the big winning opening 50 is opened for a predetermined time or intermittently, but the degree of advantage to the player is lower than that of the big hit game, and the game state is changed. When the small hit game is enabled, the display result showing the small hit special symbol on the special symbol 1st display 60, 61 is the display result showing the lost special symbol or the display result showing the big hit special symbol. The display result should be different from that of. Further, when there is one type of small hit game, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also one type, but when there are multiple types of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also small. It is advisable to have multiple types according to the type of game.

On the special symbol second indicators 80 and 81, one of the display results indicating one type of lost fourth symbol and the display result indicating one type of jackpot fourth symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the fourth symbol of loss, one LED is turned off as in the case of turning on the power (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result showing the fourth big hit symbol, one LED is lit.

In addition, when the above-mentioned small hit game can be executed, the display result showing the small hit 4 symbol on the special symbol 2 display devices 80 and 81 shows the display result showing the lost 4 symbol and the big hit 4th. It is preferable that the display result is different from the display result showing the design. Further, when there is one type of small hit game, the display result showing the small hit 4th symbol is also one type, but when there are a plurality of types of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit 4th symbol is also displayed. It is advisable to have multiple types according to the type of small game.

In the effect symbol display area of the image display devices 70 and 71, one of the display results showing 23 or more types of lost effect symbols and the display result showing 10 types of jackpot effect symbols is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result showing the lost effect symbol, the combination of the three effect symbols that are not the same and have no regularity (separate stitches) is stopped.
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot effect symbol, the same combination of the three effect symbols (9 types of 111 to 999) or the combination of the three regular effect symbols (753) is stopped.

When the small hit game described above can be executed, the display results showing the small hit effect symbols on the image display devices 70 and 71 include the display result showing the loss effect symbol and the display result showing the big hit effect symbol. May be a different display result, but may be the same display result as the display result showing a predetermined jackpot effect symbol. Further, when there is one type of small hit game, the display result showing the small hit effect symbol is also one type, but when there are multiple types of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit effect symbol is also small. It is advisable to have multiple types according to the type of game.

In the special symbol display area of the image display devices 70 and 71, one of the display result showing one kind of lost special symbol and the display result showing one kind of jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed.
Specifically, in the display result indicating the lost special symbol, the “x” symbol is in a stopped state as in the case of turning on the power (RAM clear).
On the other hand, in the display result showing the jackpot special symbol, the "○" symbol is in a stopped state.
When the above-mentioned small hit game can be executed, the display result showing the small hit special symbol in the special symbol display area of the image display devices 70 and 71 includes the display result showing the lost special symbol and the big hit special symbol. It is advisable to make the display result different from the display result indicating. Further, when there is one type of small hit game, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also one type, but when there are multiple types of small hit games, the display result showing the small hit special symbol is also small. It is advisable to have multiple types according to the type of game.

As explained above, while there are multiple types of display results that show the jackpot special symbol, there is only one type of display result that shows the lost special symbol, so if you remember only the display result that shows the lost special symbol, you will get a jackpot. It is possible to easily determine whether the result is a loss or a loss. If the number of display results indicating the special loss symbol is smaller than the type of display result indicating the special loss symbol, two or more types of display results indicating the special loss symbol may be used.

In addition, while the display result showing the lost special symbol lights up only one LED, the display result showing the jackpot special symbol lights up two or more LEDs, so it is easy to judge whether it is a jackpot or a loss. It becomes possible to do.

In addition, since there are multiple types of display results (LED lighting modes) for each jackpot special symbol, it is difficult to instantly determine which type of jackpot game will be executed, and which type of jackpot game will be executed. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the LED.

In addition, when the display result indicating the lost special symbol is derived and displayed, an LED different from the LED that lights at the start of fluctuation is lit, so even if the fluctuation time is extremely short, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed. It becomes possible to recognize that it has been damaged.

Further, when the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol is derived and displayed, at least one LED different from the LED that is lit at the start of fluctuation is lit, so that the special symbol is lit even when the fluctuation time is extremely short. It becomes possible to recognize that the variable display has been performed.

In addition, since there are fewer types of display results showing the 4th jackpot symbol and display results showing the special jackpot symbol than the types of display results showing the jackpot special symbol, by checking the 4th symbol and the special symbol, It is possible to instantly determine whether it is a big hit or a loss. It should be noted that the number of types of display results indicating the jackpot special symbol may be smaller than the type of display result indicating the jackpot fourth symbol or the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol.

Also, since there are fewer types of display results that show the jackpot effect symbol than the types of display results that show the jackpot special symbol, there are fewer types of display results that show the jackpot special symbol, so check the effect symbols. Makes it easier to predict the type of jackpot game. It should be noted that the number of types of display results indicating the jackpot special symbol may be smaller than the types of display results indicating the jackpot effect symbol.

In addition, since the size of the display result showing the special loss symbol and the size of the display result showing the fourth loss symbol are the same or similar (both are displayed by one LED), it becomes easy to understand the correspondence between the two. , It becomes easy to recognize that it is a loss.

In addition, since the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol includes the LED that lights up in the display result indicating the loss special symbol, the loss special result is shown when the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol is derived. It is possible to reduce the bad impression on the display result.

In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot game, the display result indicating the jackpot special symbol includes the LED that lights up in the display result indicating the loss special symbol, so that the loss special result is obtained. It is possible to further reduce the bad impression on the display result indicating.

Further, during the variable display on the special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, there is no state in which all the LEDs are turned off or a state in which a plurality of LEDs are turned on, and one LED is always turned on. Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display is in progress.

In addition, a plurality of types of special symbols (1 to 5 from the left side) that are not finally stopped and displayed except for the display result indicating the lost special symbol during the variable display on the special symbol first indicators 60 and 61. Since the mode in which the second LED is turned on appears (displayed), it becomes easy to grasp that the variable display is in progress.

(Display example of the first game information display device, the second game information display device, and the first image display device)
69 to 74 are diagrams showing display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. Specifically, FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a display example during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the non-time-saving game state, and FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the reach effect performed in the time-saving game state (SP reach effect). It is a figure which shows the display example in the SP reach effect), FIG. 71 is a figure which shows the display example during the blackout effect, and the movement effect by the movable effect member, and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the display example, and FIG. 74 is a figure which shows the display example at the time of a power failure occurrence.

First, FIG. 69 will be described.
FIGS. 69 (a), (b), and (c) are scenes (e1), (e5), and (e6) of the production example by the music preview pattern 8 of FIG. 55 (e). In FIG. 55 (e), the hold icon (first hold icon H11 to H14, second hold icon H21 to H24), the variable icon TH, and the hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display). ), Special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have been omitted, but will be described in detail here.

FIG. 69 (a) is a main sign effect (pre-reach effect). Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 performs variable display of the first special symbol that lights the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the first special symbol hold first display 63. Indicates that two LEDs are turned on and two first holds are stored.
Further, the second special symbol 1st display 61 and the normal symbol 1st display 62 turn on a predetermined LED to indicate that the 2nd special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the 2nd special symbol hold 1st. The display 64 and the normal symbol hold 1st display 65 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 80 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is held. 2 The display 83 turns on two LEDs to indicate that two first holds are stored.
Further, the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81 and the normal symbol 2nd display 82 turn off the LED to indicate that the 2nd special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped, and the 2nd special symbol hold 2nd indicator. 84 and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the hold icon H11 in the normal display mode is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the special display mode 3 is displayed on the second display unit. The hold icon H12 (red) is displayed, the change icon TH is displayed in the change icon display area 70D, and "2" indicating the first hold number is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. .. Further, in the first special symbol display area DZ1, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol.
Further, since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

FIG. 69 (b) is a reach effect (SP reach effect) after the development effect is performed. Since the first special symbol has been continuously changed and no new hold (first hold, second hold, normal figure hold) has occurred, the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 59. In 79, the same display as in FIG. 69 (a) is continuously displayed.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the hold icons of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon TH of the change icon display area 70D are displayed. Is erased, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed small in the upper left so as not to interfere with the reach effect (SP reach effect).
The number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). , The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) is continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 69 (a).

Then, FIG. 69 (c) is an effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is completed and the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 displays the LED in a lighting mode indicating a loss (for example, only the rightmost LED is lit), and the stop display of the first special symbol is displayed. Is going.
Since no new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, normal figure hold) has occurred, the 1st special symbol hold 1st display 63, the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61, and the 2nd special symbol hold The first display 64, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol hold first display 65 continuously display the same display as in FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b).

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 80 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol, indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is a loss. There is.
Since no new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, normal figure hold) has occurred, the 1st special symbol hold 2nd indicator 83, the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81, and the 2nd special symbol hold The second display 84, the normal symbol second display 82, and the normal symbol hold second display 85 continuously display the same display as in FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variation thereof, which were not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect). The display of the icon display area 70D is displayed again, the hold icon H11 is displayed on the first display unit 70B1 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the hold icon H12 is displayed on the second display unit. Further, the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 70D disappears because the fluctuation is completed. Further, "2" indicating the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area SH1. Further, the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol display area DZ1 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

As described above, in the variation effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the non-time saving game state, the variation display of the special symbol is the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59. , 61, the special symbol second display 80, 81 of the second game information display device 79, the effect symbol 70a of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1). , The second special symbol display area DZ2) is displayed, so that it is easy to grasp the variable display of the special symbol.
Further, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed by the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold of the second game information display device 79. 2 Display 83, 84, hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and hold number display area (hold number display area) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4). Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), it is easy to grasp the hold number (first hold number, second hold number).

On the other hand, in the reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is to pay attention to the reach effect (SP reach effect). , The display of the hold icon in the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) is erased, but the display of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) is the special symbol hold of the first game information display device 59. The hold number display area (first hold number display) of the first display 63, 64, the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Since it is displayed in the area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.

In addition, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during a normal gaming state, an effect symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 so as not to interfere with the reach effect (SP reach effect). Although 70a is reduced and displayed, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second display 80, 81, and the special symbol display area DZ1, Since the size of the special symbol displayed on the DZ2 is maintained without being reduced, even if the effect symbol 70a is lost, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display. Is possible.

In the first special symbol hold second display 83 and the second special symbol hold second display 84, the hold change notice that changes the display mode is not executed, so that the display indicating the number of holds is always normal. It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it is easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon in which the hold change notice is executed.

Further, in the first special symbol holding first display 63 and the second special symbol holding first display 64, the holding change notice that changes the display mode is not executed, so that the display indicating the number of holdings is always normal. It will be displayed in the display mode. Therefore, it is easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon in which the hold change notice is executed.

Further, in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2, the hold change notice that changes the display mode is not executed, so that the display indicating the hold number is always displayed in the normal display mode. It will be. Therefore, it is easier to grasp the number of holds itself than the hold icon in which the hold change notice is executed.

Further, in the icon display area composed of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D, the first hold corresponds to the start of the variable display. When the number or the second hold number decreases, the hold decrease effect displayed as the change icon by moving (shifting) the first hold icon or the second hold icon to the change icon display area 70D (the number of holds decreases). (Specific effect suggesting that this has been done) is executed, but in the hold number display area composed of the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2, the first hold corresponds to the start of the variable display. When the number or the second hold number decreases, the hold decrease effect as described above is not performed and only the number is subtracted. Therefore, by checking the hold number display area, it becomes easy to grasp the pure hold number itself. It should be noted that displaying as the icon may be included in the specific effect.

Even during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the number of holds (the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH2) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is held. The display of 1 hold number and 2 hold number was displayed without being erased, but the hold number (1st hold) of the hold number display area (1st hold number display area SH1 and 2 hold number display area SH2) was displayed. The display of the number and the second hold number) may also be deleted. Further, in the SP reach effect of FIG. 70 (b), the blackout effect of FIG. 71 (a), the movement effect of FIG. 71 (b), and the SPSP reach effect, which will be described later, the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1) is similarly obtained. , The display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) in the second hold number display area SH2) may also be deleted.
In this way, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 during a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect). , 2nd hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) hold icon display and hold number display area (1st hold number display area SH1, 2nd hold number display area SH2) hold number (1st hold number, 2nd hold) Even if the display of the number) is deleted, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79. Since the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed, the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.

Next, FIG. 70 will be described.
FIG. 70 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 during the reach effect (SP reach effect) performed in the time-saving game state. be.

FIG. 70A is a variable effect before the reach effect (SP reach effect) is achieved in the time-saving game state. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the second special symbol first display 61 performs variable display of the second special symbol that blinks the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the second special symbol hold first display 64. Indicates that two LEDs are turned on and two second holds are stored. Further, the normal symbol first display 62 performs variable display of the normal symbol by blinking the LEDs in a predetermined order. Further, since the right-handed first display 67 is in the time-saving game, the LED is turned on to perform the right-handed display.
The first special symbol 1st display 60 is turned on to indicate that the 1st special symbol is stopped, and the 1st special symbol hold 1st display 63 and the normal symbol hold 1st display 65 are shown. Turns off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (first hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 81 performs a variation display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in response to the variation display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold second. The display 84 turns on two LEDs to indicate that two second holds are stored. Further, the normal symbol second display 82 performs a variable display of the normal symbol by blinking the LEDs in a predetermined order in response to the variable display of the normal symbol. Further, since the right-handed second display 87 is in the time-saving game, the LED is turned on to perform the right-handed display.
The first special symbol second display 80 turns off the LED to indicate that the first special symbol is stopped, and the first special symbol hold second display 83 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 indicate that the LED is stopped. All the LEDs are turned off, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display area DZ2 are variablely displayed in correspondence with the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, the hold icons H21 and H22 are displayed in the first display units 70C1 and the second display units 70C2 of the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon is displayed in the change icon display area 70D. 2 In the hold number display area SH2, "2" indicating the second hold number is displayed. Further, since the game is being played for a short time, the image G10 “Right-handed →→” is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70.
Since the first hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol has not changed, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating that the second specific gaming state (“high probability gaming state” and “short-time gaming state”) is displayed is displayed. ing.

FIG. 70 (b) is a reach effect (SP reach effect). Here, in the first game information display device 59, since the second special symbol is continuously changed, the second special symbol first display 61 is performing the change display in the same manner as in FIG. 70 (a). .. Then, since one new second hold is generated and the number of second holds is three, the second special symbol hold first display 64 blinks the LED on the left side and turns on the LED on the right side. It shows that three second holds are stored. In addition, since two new normal figure hold have occurred and the number of normal figure hold has become two, the normal symbol hold 1st display 65 turns on two LEDs, and two normal figure hold are stored. It shows that there is.
Since the first hold has not been newly generated, the first special symbol hold first indicator 63 remains off.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 81 performs variable display corresponding to the second special symbol as in FIG. 70 (a). Then, since one new second hold is generated and the number of second holds is three, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 blinks the LED on the left side and turns on the LED on the right side. It shows that three second holds are stored. In addition, since two new normal figure hold have occurred and the number of normal figure hold has become two, the normal symbol hold second display 85 turns on two LEDs, and two normal figure hold are stored. It shows that there is.
Since the first hold has not been newly generated, the first special symbol hold second indicator 83 remains off.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, a reach effect (SP reach effect) using a character image is performed. Further, the display of the hold icons in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the hold icons in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the effect symbol 70a is displayed small in the upper left. Therefore, the reach production (SP reach production) is not hindered. In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). , The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) is continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 70 (a). Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, the character information G12 (“SP reach”) indicating that the reach effect (SP reach effect) is in progress is displayed.

Then, FIG. 70 (c) is an effect in which the reach effect (SP reach effect) is completed and the effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the second special symbol 1st display 61 displays the LED in a lighting mode indicating a loss (for example, only the rightmost LED is lit), and the stop display of the second special symbol is displayed. Is going.
Since no new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, normal figure hold) has occurred, the 1st special symbol 1st display 60, the 1st special symbol hold 1st display 63, and the 2nd special symbol hold The first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 display the same as in FIG. 70 (b). Further, the right-handed first indicator 67 is also lit.

In the second game information display device 79, the second special symbol second display 81 turns off the LED corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol, indicating that the fluctuation of the second special symbol is a loss. There is.
Since no new hold (1st hold, 2nd hold, normal figure hold) has occurred, the 1st special symbol 2nd display 80, the 1st special symbol hold 2nd display 83, and the 2nd special symbol hold The second display 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 display the same as in FIG. 70 (b). Further, the right-handed second indicator 87 is also lit.

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the effect symbol 70a and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display area DZ2 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss corresponding to the stop display of the second special symbol. ing. In addition, the displays of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D, which were not displayed during the reach effect (SP reach effect), are displayed again. 2 The hold icon H21 is displayed on the first display unit 70C1 of the hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, the hold icon H22 is displayed on the second display unit 70C2, and the hold icon H23 is displayed on the third display unit 70C3. ing. Further, the fluctuation icon displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 70D disappears because the fluctuation is completed. Further, "3" indicating the second reserved number is displayed in the second reserved number display area SH2.
Since the first hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and "0" is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1. Further, since the first special symbol has not changed, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display area DZ1 is stopped and displayed. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, character information (“sorry”) indicating that the image is lost is displayed.

As described above, in the variation effect (other than the reach effect (SP reach effect)) performed in the time-saving game state, the variation display of the special symbol is the special symbol first display 60 of the first game information display device 59. 61, the special symbol second display 80, 81 of the second game information display device 79, the effect symbol 70a of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, and the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1, Since it is displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2), it is easy to grasp the variable display of the special symbol.
Further, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed by the special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol hold of the second game information display device 79. 2 Display 83, 84, hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and hold number display area (hold number display area) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4). Since it is displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2), it is easy to grasp the hold number (first hold number, second hold number).
Further, the right-handed display is the right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. Since the image G10 "right-handed → →" display is displayed, the right-handed display is easy to understand.

On the other hand, during the reach effect (SP reach effect), the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is held. Although the display of the icon is erased, the display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed as the special symbol hold first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information. In the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 of the display device 79, and the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second holding number display area SH2) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. Since it is displayed, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.

In addition, during a specific reach effect (SP reach effect) executed during the time-saving game state, the effect symbol displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 so as not to interfere with the reach effect (SP reach effect). Although 70a is reduced and displayed, the special symbol displayed on the special symbol first display 60, 61, the fourth symbol displayed on the special symbol second display 80, 81, and the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2. Since the size of the special symbol to be displayed is maintained without being reduced, it is possible to grasp whether or not the variable display is performed by checking each display even if the effect symbol 70a is lost. Will be.

Further, the hold icons of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon TH of the change icon display area 70D displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. As an effect of erasing the display, the SP reach effect has been described as an example as shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, but the effect is not limited to the SP reach effect.

For example, during the fluctuation effect as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the displays of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 suddenly go dark and shift to a specific advance notice effect. During the effect (so-called blackout effect) that develops into a reach effect, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. The display of the hold icon and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed as the special symbol hold of the first game information display device 59. 1 Display 63, 64, special symbol reservation of the second game information display device 79 Second display 83, 84, and the hold number display area (first hold number display area) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. It is displayed in SH1 and the second reserved number display area SH2).

By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the blackout effect from being hindered.

Further, when the movement effect using the movable effect member 73 is performed during the variable effect, the first hold on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 when the movable effect member 73 is moved as shown in FIG. 71 (b). The display of the hold icons in the icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon TH in the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number). ) Is displayed by the special symbol holding first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (). The display is performed in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1 and second hold number display area SH2) of the main liquid crystal) 70.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the movement effect from being hindered.

Further, although not shown, in the SPSP reach effect, the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is the same as in FIGS. 69 (b), 70 (c), and 71 (a) (b). The display of the hold icon of the hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, the hold icon of the second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4, and the change icon TH of the change icon display area 70D is erased, and the hold number (first hold number, second hold number, second). The display of the number of holdings) is the special symbol holding first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display. It is displayed in the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1 and second hold number display area SH2) of the device (main liquid crystal display) 70.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player grasp the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) while preventing the SPSP reach effect from being hindered.

Next, FIGS. 72 to 73 will be described.
72 to 73 are display examples of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 during the jackpot game.

FIG. 72 (a) is the first round game production of the jackpot game. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 is an LED in a stop mode (for example, only the second LED from the left is lit) indicating a probability variation jackpot 2 (special symbol “B”). Is turned on, the stop display of the first special symbol is performed, and the round number display 66 lights the LED in a mode indicating the number of rounds (8 rounds) of the probability variation jackpot 2 (for example, only the fourth LED from the left is lit). , Indicates that the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time is eight, the first special symbol hold first display 63 blinks two LEDs, and indicates that four first holds are stored. .. Further, since the right-handed first display 67 is in the big hit game, the LED is turned on to perform the right-handed display.
The second special symbol 1st display 61 and the normal symbol 1st display 62 turn on a predetermined LED to indicate that the 2nd special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 80 turns on the LED to display a stop indicating that it is a big hit, and the first special symbol hold second display 83 sets the LED to 2. It blinks once to indicate that four first holds are stored. Further, the right-handed second display 87 turns on the LED to perform right-handed display.
The second special symbol 2 display 81 and the normal symbol 2 display 82 turn on a predetermined LED to indicate that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the first round game effect of the jackpot game is performed, and the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4 and the second hold that were displayed before the start of the jackpot game are performed. The display of the hold icon in the icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4 and the variable icon in the variable icon display area 70D is erased. Further, "4" indicating the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area SH1. Further, in the first special symbol display area DZ1, a stop display indicating a jackpot of the first special symbol is performed corresponding to the stop display of the first special symbol. Further, since the jackpot game is in progress, the image G10 “right-handed →→” is displayed on the upper right of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70.
Since the second hold is not stored, "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2, and the second special symbol has not changed, so that the second special symbol display area DZ2 is stopped and displayed. ing. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, character information G13 (“round 1”) indicating the number of round games currently being performed is displayed.

FIG. 72 (b) is a promotion effect performed between the first opening of the large winning opening 50 of the fifth round game and the closing of the fourth round game. Here, in the first game information display device 59, since the normal figure hold is newly generated, the normal symbol hold first display 65 blinks four LEDs, and four normal figure hold are stored. As shown, the normal symbol first display 62 performs variable display of the normal symbol by blinking the LEDs in a predetermined order. The displays other than the normal symbol 1st display 62 and the normal symbol hold 1st display 65 continue to display the same display as in FIG. 72 (a).
Further, in the second game information display device 79, the normal symbol holding second display 85 blinks four LEDs to indicate that four normal symbol holdings are stored, and the normal symbol second display 82 is predetermined. The fluctuation display of the normal symbol that blinks the LED in the order of. The displays other than the normal symbol second display 82 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 continue to display the same display as in FIG. 72 (a).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, an effect using a character image corresponding to the promotion effect is displayed. Here, the image G10 "right-handed → →" display that was displayed before the promotion effect is performed is deleted.
The number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). , The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) is continuously displayed. Further, in the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, the character information indicating the number of round games is erased (hidden).

Then, FIG. 72 (c) shows the movement effect of the movable effect member 73 during the promotion effect. Here, in the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79, the same display as in FIG. 72 (b) is continuously displayed.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the effect image G15 is displayed in accordance with the movable effect member 73 moving to the front of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Further, as in FIG. 72 (b), the image G10 “right-handed →→” display remains erased, and the special symbol in the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1 and second special symbol display area DZ2) remains erased. (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) is continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 72 (b). On the other hand, the display position of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) is changed, and FIG. 72 (c) ), It is displayed below the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1 and second special symbol display area DZ2).

In this way, the number of holds (first number of holds, first hold number, 2nd hold number display area SH2) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1 and second hold number display area SH2) is produced by the effect performed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. By changing the display position of the second hold number), the effect performed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the display of the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) are mutually displayed (the first hold number, the second hold number). It prevents the production) from being hindered.

Then, FIG. 73A is an effect performed from the fifth opening of the grand prize opening 50 of the fifth round game after the promotion effect. Here, in the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79, the same display as in FIG. 72 (c) is performed.

The first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 displays an effect of notifying (notifying) that the jackpot game will be continuously performed even after the fifth round game using the character image. In addition, the image G10 "right-handed → →" display, which was not displayed during the promotion effect, is displayed again.
The number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) and special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2). , The special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) of the second special symbol display area DZ2) is continuously displayed. Further, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 displays character information G13 (round 5) indicating the number of round games that have been erased (hidden).

FIG. 73 (b) is an ending effect of the jackpot game. Here, in the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79, the same display as in FIG. 73A is performed.

On the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, an effect using a character image corresponding to the ending effect is displayed. In addition, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2), special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1). , 2nd special symbol display area DZ2) special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) and image G10 "right-handed → →" display are continuously displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 73 (a). There is. Further, the second image display device (sub-liquid crystal display) 71 displays character information G13 (“BONUS end”) indicating that the jackpot game has ended.

FIG. 73 (c) is an effect indicating that the jackpot game has ended and the game has shifted to the time-saving game. Here, the round number display 66 of the first game information display device 59 ends (turns off) the display of the number of rounds when the jackpot ends. In the first game information display device 59, the same display as in FIG. 73 (b) is performed except for the round number display 66. Further, the second game information display device 79 is also displayed in the same manner as in FIG. 73 (b).

On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D, which were not displayed during the jackpot game, The display is displayed again, and the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4. There is. Further, "4" indicating the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area SH1.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, in the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1 and second special symbol display area DZ2), since the first special symbol and the second special symbol have not changed, stop display is performed. Further, on the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, character information G11 (“MM RUSH”) indicating that the second specific gaming state (“high probability gaming state” and “short-time gaming state”) is displayed is displayed. To.

As described above, during the jackpot game, the hold icon in the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) in order to pay attention to the jackpot game effect, the variation thereof. Although the display of the variable icon TH in the icon display area 70D is erased, the display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the special symbol hold first display 63 of the first game information display device 59. , 64, the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the holding number display area (first holding number display area SH1, second) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70. Since it is displayed in the hold number display area SH2), the hold number (first hold number, second hold number) can be grasped.
Further, the right-handed display is the right-handed first display 67 of the first game information display device 59, the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. Since the image G10 "right-handed → →" display is displayed, it is easy to understand the right-handed display.

Further, even during the jackpot game, the image G10 "right-handed → →" display of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is erased during the promotion effect, but the right-handed display is the first game information display. Since the display is performed by the right-handed first display 67 of the device 59 and the right-handed second display 87 of the second game information display device 79, the right-handed display (right-handed) can be grasped.

In the right-handed display, the LED of the right-handed first display 67, which is not marked with anything, is lit, the LED of the right-handed second display 87, which is marked "right-handed", is lit, and the first. The image G10 "right-handed → →" of the image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed. That is, the display mode of the right-handed display is such that the right-handed second display 87 is easier for the player to recognize than the right-handed first display 67, and further, the right-handed second display 87. The first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is displayed in a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize. Further, the right-handed second display 87 is provided closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 than the right-handed first display 67, and is also right-handed in that the position is easy for the player to see. The right-handed second display 87 is easier for the player to recognize than the first display 67.

Next, FIG. 74 will be described.
FIG. 74 is a display example of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 when a power failure occurs.

FIG. 74 (a) is a variable effect before the reach effect is achieved in the normal gaming state. Here, in the first game information display device 59, the first special symbol first display 60 performs variable display of the first special symbol that blinks the LEDs in a predetermined order, and the first special symbol hold first display 63. Blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored.
The second special symbol 1st display 61 and the normal symbol 1st display 62 turn on a predetermined LED to indicate that the 2nd special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold first display 64 and the normal symbol hold first display 65 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the second game information display device 79, the first special symbol second display 80 performs a variable display in which the LED blinks at a predetermined interval in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol is held. 2 The display 83 blinks four LEDs, indicating that four first holds are stored.
The second special symbol 2 display 81 and the normal symbol 2 display 82 turn off the LED, indicating that the second special symbol and the normal symbol are stopped. Further, the second special symbol hold second indicator 84 and the normal symbol hold second indicator 85 turn off all the LEDs, indicating that the hold (second hold, normal figure hold) is not stored.

In the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the effect symbol 70a and the first special symbol of the first special symbol display area DZ1 are variablely displayed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the hold icons H11 to H14 are displayed on the first display unit 70B1, the second display unit 70B2, the third display unit 70B3, and the fourth display unit 70B4 of the first hold icon display areas 70B1 to 70B4, and the variable icon display. The fluctuation icon TH is displayed in the area 70D. Further, "4" indicating the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area SH1.
Since the second hold is not stored, the hold icon is not displayed in the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and "0" is displayed in the second hold number display area SH2. Further, since the second special symbol has not changed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display area DZ2.

Then, since a power failure occurred and the supply of the power supply voltage was cut off, nothing was done in any of the first game information display device 59, the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. Not displayed (FIG. 74 (b)).

After that, when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79 are restored at substantially the same timing. Specifically, the first game information display device 59 controlled by the main CPU 110a displays all the displays (special symbol first display 60, 61, normal symbol first display 62, special symbol hold) based on the backup data. Restored 1st display 63, 64, normal symbol hold 1st display 65, round number display 66, right-handed 1st display 67, high-probability game status display 68, and time-saving game status display 69). However, the second game information display device 79 controlled by the sub CPU 130a is special based on the special symbol hold storage designation command (step S13) and the normal symbol storage designation command (step S14) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of recovery. The display of the symbol hold second display 83, 84 and the normal symbol hold second display 85 is restored. On the other hand, in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the image control unit 140 notifies that the power is being restored based on the fact that the image control unit 140 has received the power restoration designation command (step S7) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of restoration. Perform power restoration production.

Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image control unit 140 displays the number of holds on the display unit of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 based on the special symbol hold storage designation command (step S13) transmitted from the main CPU 110a at the time of restoration. The hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display) of the area (first hold number display area SH1, second hold number display area SH2) is restarted (recovered) (FIG. 74 (d)).

As described above, when a power failure occurs and recovery is performed, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed as the special symbol first display 60, 61 of the first game information display device 59. And the special symbol second display 80, 81 of the second game information display device 79 are restored and displayed at substantially the same timing, and then the hold number display area (first hold) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is displayed. The hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display) of the number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2) is restored and displayed. That is, when the power is restored, the number of holdings on the second game information display device 79 is larger than the number of holdings (first holding number, second holding number) displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. The display of (first hold number, second hold number) will be displayed (recovered) first.

In this way, by restoring the display of the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) on the second game information display device 79 prior to the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the first Even during the power restoration effect on the image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed on the second game information display device 79, so that the number of holds (first hold number, second hold number) is displayed. The player can grasp the first hold number and the second hold number).

Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the number of reserved special symbols is usually displayed by the special symbol reserved first indicators 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol reserved of the second game information display device 79. 2 Display 83, 84, hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4, second hold icon display area 70C1 to 70C4) and hold number display area (hold number display area) of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 (first hold icon display area 70B1 to 70B4). It is displayed in four places (1st hold number display area SH1, 2nd hold number display area SH2), but during specific effects (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect) and jackpot effect. If it is inside, the special symbol holding first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59, the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79, and the first image display device. (Main liquid crystal display) It is displayed in three places of the hold number display area (first hold number display area SH1 and second hold number display area SH2) of 70. Further, after the restoration after the power failure, the special symbol holding first display 63, 64 of the first game information display device 59 and the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 of the second game information display device 79 are obtained. It is displayed in two places.
That is, the display of the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed in two places, three places, or four places depending on the progress of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icon displayed there are more than the LEDs of the special symbol hold 1st display 63, 64 and the special symbol hold 2 display 83, 84. Is large and is displayed near the center of the gaming machine so that it is easy for the player to see, but it is a special symbol than the holding icon display areas 70B and 70C and the holding icon displayed there. Even if the LEDs of the hold 1st display 63, 64 and the special symbol hold 2nd display 83, 84 are enlarged or placed near the center of the gaming machine to make it easier for the player to see. good.

In FIGS. 68 to 74, the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numbers displayed therein are larger than the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icons displayed therein. Although it is easy to see, the hold icon display areas 70B and 70C and the hold icon displayed there are larger than the hold number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the arithmetic numbers displayed there. It may be easy.

(Structure of 1st Game Information Display Device 59 and 2nd Game Information Display Device 79)
FIG. 75 is a front view of the first game information display device 59. In the present embodiment, the first game information display device 59 is arranged adjacent to the outer rail 2410a at the lower left of the game area 5a, but is not limited to this, and may be arranged at various positions. can.

The first game information display device 59 mainly displays information related to special symbol determination and normal symbol determination (in other words, information related to profits given to the player in the game). More specifically, the first game information display device 59 includes first and second special symbol first display devices 60 and 61, first and second special symbol hold first display devices 63 and 64, and round number display device 66. It can be configured as a right-handed first display 67, a high-probability game state display 68, a time-saving game state display 69, a normal symbol first display 62, and a normal symbol hold first display 65.

Further, the second game information display device 79 also displays information regarding the profit given to the player in the game, and similarly, the first and second special symbols second display devices 80, 81, and the first. 1. It can be configured as a second special symbol holding second display 83, 84, a right-handed second display 87, a normal symbol second display 82, and a normal symbol holding second display 85.

(Details of the structure of the first game information display device 59)
As shown in FIG. 75, the first game information display device 59 has a plurality of LEDs 4045 arranged in two rows. These LEDs 4045 include the first and second special symbol first indicators 60 and 61, the first and second special symbol hold first indicators 63 and 64, the high-probability gaming state indicator 68, and the time-saving gaming status indicator 69. , Right-handed first display 67, round number display 66, normal symbol first display 62, and normal symbol hold first display 65. The LEDs 4045 are arranged in two rows in parallel along the launch ball guide path of the game ball formed by the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 (see FIG. 1). The arrangement of the LEDs 4045 is not limited to this, and each LED 4045 may be arranged in one row along the launch ball guide path of the game ball, or may be arranged in three or more rows. , May be arranged regardless of the launch ball guide path.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the first game information display device 59 includes a first display board 4200 on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are surface-mounted, and a first cover that covers at least the front side of the first display board 4200. It includes a member 4202 and a protective member 4204 that covers the rear side of the first display substrate 4200. That is, the first display substrate 4200 is accommodated by the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204. In the first game information display device 59, the first display board 4200 arranged between the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 is installed in an upright posture along the board surface of the game board 5. The first game information display device 59 is configured by the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 so that the first display board 4200 is difficult or inaccessible from the outside. The first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member by fitting it into a mounting opening (not shown) formed in the plate member constituting the game board 5, and the front surface faces the front side of the game board 5 to play a game. The light of the LED 4045 is visible to the person. Further, the first game information display device 59 has a back surface facing the back side of the game board 5 (plate member), and the game board 5 has a connector 4100 (FIG. 76) provided so as to face the back side. It is accessible from the back side. The first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 may be combined to form a cover member.

The first game information display device 59 fixes the first cover member 4202 or the protective member 4204 constituting the outer shell of the first game information display device 59 to the game board 5 by screwing, bonding, or other methods. It is attached. Here, the first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove or reassemble with respect to the game board 5 due to adhesion or the like, or when the first game information display device 59 is removed from the game board 5, the first game information display device 59 and the game board 5 It may be attached in a configuration in which a trace remains on either side. In other words, the mounting structure of the first game information display device 59 and the game board 5 has a configuration that is difficult to remove without destroying the game board 5 or the first game information display device 59, and the game board 5 or the first by removal. 1 The game board 5 or the first game information display device 59 is destroyed or deformed due to a configuration that cannot be reassembled due to the destruction or deformation of the game information display device 59, or the game board 59 due to removal. 5 or at least one of the configurations in which the trace of removal remains on the first game information display device 59 may be used.

As shown in FIG. 80, the first display board 4200 is a printed circuit board provided with a plurality of LEDs 4045 on the front surface facing the player, and can irradiate light from each LED 4045 toward the front side. ing. The LED 4045 is surface-mounted on the first display board 4200, not through-hole mounting in which the leads of the LED 4045 are fixed to holes in the printed circuit board. In the first display board 4200, the light emitting element of the LED 4045 and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the first display board 4200 are on the same front surface of the first display board 4200. That is, the lead for connecting the LED 4045 to the circuit does not protrude from the rear surface of the first display board 4200, and the solder for fixing the LED 4045 is not arranged on the rear surface. In this embodiment, a plurality of LEDs 4045 are arranged side by side in two rows above and below in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As the LED 4045, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. Further, as the LED 4045, either a chip type or a cannonball type can be used as long as it can be surface-mounted, but the chip type is preferable because of the advantage that the space can be reduced. In the first display board 4200, the states such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of a plurality of LEDs 4045 are controlled under the control of the control means of the main control board 110 (see FIG. 5), and the states such as lighting, extinguishing, and blinking are controlled. Information on the profit given to the player is displayed by the combination of these or the change of the state.

By surface-mounting the LED 4045 on the first display board 4200 in this way, the placement space of the LED 4045 on the first display board 4200 can be reduced, and the first display board 4200 can be made more compact. can. Further, by surface-mounting the LED 4045 on the first display board 4200, the weight can be reduced and the failure can be reduced. Further, by surface-mounting the LED 4045 on the front surface of the first display board 4200, the mounting of the LED 4045 does not affect the rear surface of the first display board 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display board 4200, other electronic components can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the first display board 4200 is effectively used. It can be used, and the first display board 4200 can be made more compact.

The LED 4045 has either a configuration in which the light emitting element is arranged so as to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200 (see FIG. 77) or a configuration in which the light emitting element is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the first display substrate 4200. You may. The first display substrate 4200 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects light such as white in the front region on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect light such as black in the front region. An absorption unit may be provided. When the light emitting element of the LED 4045 protrudes from the surface of the first display substrate 4200, by providing a reflecting portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED 4045 is reflected by the reflecting portion and can be efficiently used. When the light emitting element of the LED 4045 is embedded in the first display substrate 4200, the light emitted from the LED 4045 by the absorbing unit is diffused on the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 by providing an absorbing portion around the light emitting element. Can be prevented from doing so.

FIG. 80 is a front view of the first display substrate 4200 as viewed from the front surface side. The first special symbol first display 60 is composed of six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row, and the second special symbol first display 61 is composed of six LEDs 4045 in the upper row. The first special symbol hold first display 63 is composed of two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol first display 60 and the second special symbol first display 61, and is composed of the second special symbol. The hold first display 64 is composed of two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first display 61. On the right side of the second special symbol hold first display 64, the high-probability game state display 68, the time-saving game state display 69, and the right-handed first display 67 are arranged one by one in this order. They are arranged side by side. Further, the round number display 66 is composed of eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row, and the normal symbol first display 62 is composed of three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display 66. 65 is composed of two LEDs 4045 from the right side of the lower row. The number and arrangement of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in each display is not limited to the above.

As shown in FIG. 81, the first display board 4200 is provided with a connector 4100 on the rear surface opposite to the surface on which the LED 4045 is mounted, and is provided via a harness (not shown) connected to the connector 4100. , The first game information display device 59 and the main control board 110 are electrically connected. The connector 4100 is a so-called jack to which a plug provided at the end of the harness can be attached and detached, and may have either a male terminal shape or a female terminal shape. The connector 4100 may be mounted through a hole in which the lead of the connector 4100 is fixed to a hole in the printed circuit board, but in the present embodiment, the connector 4100 is surface-mounted on the rear surface of the first display board 4200. Further, in the connector 4100, the connector opening into which the plug provided at the end of the harness is inserted is opened toward the rear in FIG. 81. As described above, the main body of the connector 4100 and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 to the first display board 4200 are on the same rear surface of the first display board 4200. That is, the lead for connecting the connector 4100 to the circuit does not protrude from the front surface of the first display board 4200, and the solder for fixing the connector 4100 is not arranged on the front surface. By surface-mounting the connector 4100 on the first display board 4200 in this way, the placement space of the connector 4100 on the first display board 4200 can be reduced, and the first display board 4200 can be made more compact. be able to.

The connector 4100 is arranged on the rear surface of the first display board 4200 at a position corresponding to a mounting area of a plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display board 4200. That is, the mounting areas of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the connector 4100 overlap each other with the first display board 4200 sandwiched between the front and back surfaces. By surface-mounting the connector 4100 on the rear surface of the first display board 4200 in this way, the mounting of the connector 4100 does not affect the front surface of the first display board 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display board 4200, the connector 4100 can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front surface and the rear surface of the first display board 4200 can be effectively used. It can be used to make the first display board 4200 more compact.

As shown in FIG. 81, a chip-type resistor 4500 as a current limiting means is mounted on the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200, and in the present embodiment, the plurality of resistors 4500 are positioned so as not to overlap with the connector 4100. They are arranged side by side. Further, the resistor 4500 may be mounted through a hole in which the lead of the resistor 4500 is fixed to a hole in the printed circuit board, but in the present embodiment, the resistor 4500 is surface-mounted on the first display board 4200. The first display board 4200 has a resistor 4500 and solder for fixing the resistor 4500 to the first display board 4200 on the same rear surface of the first display board 4200. That is, the lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit does not protrude from the front surface of the first display board 4200, and the solder for fixing the resistor 4500 is not arranged on the front surface. In this embodiment, a plurality of resistances 4500 are arranged side by side in the upper region of the first display substrate 4200. As shown in FIG. 83, the resistor 4500 is arranged between the connector 4100 and the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the circuit of the first display board 4200, and limits the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined value. This prevents an excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045.

In this way, by mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display board 4200, even if the resistor 4500 fails, it can be dealt with by replacing the first game information display device 59, and maintenance can be performed. It will be easier. Since the first game information display device 59 can be easily replaced, it is possible to shorten the pause period of the game and avoid spoiling the interest of the game. Further, by surface-mounting the resistor 4500 on the first display board 4200, the space for arranging the resistor 4500 on the first display board 4200 can be reduced, and the first display board 4200 can be made more compact. can.

The resistor 4500 may be arranged on the rear surface of the first display board 4200 at a position corresponding to a mounting area of a plurality of LEDs 4045 mounted on the front surface of the first display board 4200. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 may be either in a configuration in which the first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched in the front-rear direction and all overlapped, or in a configuration in which the first display substrate 4200 is partially overlapped. By surface-mounting the resistor 4500 on the rear surface of the first display board 4200 in this way, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display board 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the first display board 4200, the resistor 4500 can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area on which a plurality of LEDs 4045 are mounted on the front surface, and the front surface and the rear surface of the first display board 4200 can be effectively used. It can be used to make the first display substrate 4200 more compact. It should be noted that the mounting areas of the plurality of LEDs 4045 and the mounting areas of the plurality of resistors 4500 may not overlap with the first display board 4200 sandwiched between the front and back sides.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the first cover member 4202 includes a front cover portion 4208 in which a window 4206 corresponding to each of the LEDs 4045 mounted on the surface of the first display substrate 4200 is formed, and a front cover portion. A lateral cover portion 4210 formed so as to stand up to the rear side is provided on the peripheral edge of the 4208. The first cover member 4202 is formed in a box shape that opens rearward by the front cover portion 4208 and the horizontal cover portion 4210, and is used for the first display in the inner region surrounded by the front cover portion 4208 and the horizontal cover portion 4210. The board 4200 can be stored. When the first display board 4200 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the first display board 4200 is on the front cover portion 4208 side (rear end) of the horizontal cover portion 4210. Located on the front side), the entire first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display board 4200 on which the LED 4045 is mounted with the front cover portion 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display board 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. 1 The presence of the cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. In the first cover member 4202 of the present embodiment, the inner region is formed so as to be aligned with a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and when the first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner region, the horizontal cover portion 4210 Since the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held so as not to be displaced.

In this way, since the first display board 4200 is arranged in a state of being housed in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display board 4200 from the front side or the side side, and the first display board 4200 is used. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the board 4200. Further, even if the first display board 4200 is to be removed, it is difficult to access the first display board 4200 as described above. Therefore, the first display board 4200 should be removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 82, in the first cover member 4202, a window 4206 that penetrates the front cover portion 4208 in the front-rear direction corresponding to the LED 4045 is provided by the window image forming portion 4212 formed in the front cover portion 4208. It is imaged. The window 4206 may be provided corresponding to each of the plurality of LEDs 4045 (this embodiment), or may be provided so as to correspond to two or more predetermined number of LEDs 4045 among the plurality of LEDs 4045. The window 4206 has a polygonal shape such as a quadrangle or a circular shape, and is formed to be larger than the outer shape of the corresponding LED 4045 so that the entire corresponding one or more LED 4045s are inside. In the first cover member 4202, the windows 4206 are formed side by side in two rows, and when the first cover member 4202 is arranged so as to cover the front side of the first display substrate 4200, each window 4206 has each LED 4045. It is arranged at a position corresponding to the above, and the state of lighting and the like of each LED 4045 facing each window 4206 can be visually recognized through the window 4206.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 82, the first cover member 4202 penetrates the front cover portion 4208 in the front-rear direction and partitions the window 4206 formed corresponding to the LED 4045, so that the state of the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be checked. Each window 4206 has a window image forming unit 4212 that is configured to be distinguishable. The window image forming portion 4212 has a structure formed in a cylindrical shape protruding rearward from the front cover portion 4208 (the present embodiment), and a portion of the front cover portion 4208 corresponding to the front side of the mounting area of the LED 4045 is thickly formed. It is provided depending on the configuration and the like. When the window image forming portion 4212 is formed of a tubular body, the window image forming portion 4212 may be separated from each other and independent of each other, or a part of the adjacent window image forming portions 4212 may be integrated with each other. .. Between the front opening of the window 4206 facing the front side and the rear opening of the window 4206 facing the corresponding LED 4045, the window image forming portion 4212, for example, the thickness of the horizontal cover portion 4210 or the first display substrate 4200 or more. A certain long distance is provided, and the window image forming portion 4212 functions as a light guide portion for guiding the light emitted from the LED 4045, and prevents the light from being diffused. In other words, even if a gap is provided between the front cover portion 4208 and the front surface of the first display board 4200, or the portion corresponding to the LED 4045 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 is configured to project forward. The window imager 4212 defining the window 4206 can guide the light of the LED 4045 to the front side without exception.

As shown in FIG. 77, the first cover member 4202 is combined with the first display substrate 4200 so that the window image forming portion 4212 faces the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the first display substrate 4200 The entire circumference of the LED 4045 mounted on the front surface is individually surrounded by the window image forming portion 4212. In the present embodiment, the rear end of the window image forming portion 4212 formed in a cylindrical shape is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200, and the space between the adjacent LEDs 4045 is partitioned by the window image forming portion 4212. The first cover member 4202 and the first display board 4200 are in contact with the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208 only when the window image area 4212 of the first cover member 4202 and the front surface of the first display board 4200 are in contact with each other. It is basically configured so that there is a gap between it and the surface of the first display substrate 4200. As described above, since the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is surrounded by the window image forming portion 4212 defining the window 4206, the light emitted from the LED 4045 does not diffuse, and the LED 4045 is in a state of the LED 4045 through the window 4206. Can be made easier to identify. Further, since the rear end of the window image forming portion 4212 is in contact with the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 and closes the gap between the front cover portion 4208 and the first display substrate 4200, light is next to the gap. It is possible to prevent leakage to the window 4206, and the state of the LED 4045 can be clearly distinguished. Moreover, even if the fraudulent tool is invaded from the window 4206, the fraudulent tool can be blocked only in the window 4206 by the window image forming unit 4212, and the fraudulent activity can be prevented more appropriately. It should be noted that the rear end (rear surface) of the window image forming portion 4212 and the front surface of the first display substrate 4200 may face each other so as to have a slight gap.

As shown in FIG. 82, the first cover member 4202 includes a protrusion-shaped alignment portion 4600 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208. The alignment portion 4600 is integrally formed with the window image forming portion 4212 so as to project rearward from the rear surface of the window image forming portion 4212 facing the front surface of the first display substrate 4200. The alignment portion 4600 is configured to be fitted in a substrate hole 4400 (see FIG. 80) formed in the first display substrate 4200 so that the first display substrate 4200 can be aligned with the first cover member 4202. ing. In the first cover member 4202, a plurality of alignment portions 4600 are dispersedly arranged on the rear surface of the front cover portion 4208 so as to be separated from each other. Of the plurality of alignment portions 4600, there may be one formed apart from the window image forming portion 4212. Each alignment portion 4600 is formed in a columnar shape. Although the alignment portion 4600 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the window image forming portion 4212, its rear end is located on the front side of the rear end of the lateral cover portion 4210 and is housed inside the first cover member 4202. ..

The first display substrate 4200 includes a substrate hole 4400 formed so as to penetrate in the plate thickness direction, and the substrate hole 4400 is also formed in a circular shape in accordance with the columnar alignment portion 4600. Further, the substrate hole 4400 is set to have the same or slightly larger opening size as the outer shape of the alignment portion 4600. The alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are provided so as to correspond in number and position, and the alignment portion 4600 is fitted into the substrate hole 4400 so that the first display substrate is formed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202. It defines the relative position of the 4200. Therefore, the first cover member 4202 and the first display board 4200 are assembled in a state of being vertically and horizontally positioned with each other by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the board hole 4400.

As described above, the first cover member 4202 and the first display board 4200 are assembled in a state of being positioned with each other by fitting the alignment portion 4600 and the board hole 4400, and thus correspond to the LED 4045. The window 4206 can be aligned with the window 4206 without any deviation, and the state of the LED 4045 can be more preferably identified. Further, since the alignment portion 4600 is integrally formed with the window image alignment portion 4212 and reinforced by the window image alignment portion 4212, the alignment portion 4600 can be configured to project rearward from the window image alignment portion 4212. You can avoid damage and deformation of the window. By integrally forming the alignment portion 4600 with the window image forming portion 4212, the protruding dimension thereof can be shortened, and damage or deformation of the alignment portion 4600 can be more preferably avoided.

As shown in FIG. 81, the first display board 4200 includes a plurality of board holes 4400 formed in an arrangement that sandwiches the connector 4100. The first cover member 4202 is provided with an alignment portion 4600 corresponding to each of the plurality of board holes 4400 in an arrangement that sandwiches the connector 4100 mounted on the first display board 4200. More specifically, the first display board 4200 has a pair of board holes 4400 arranged in a symmetrical positional relationship with the connector 4100 sandwiched between the left and right (this embodiment), the top and bottom, or the diagonal direction. A pair of alignment portions 4600 is provided in the first cover member 4202 corresponding to each of the paired substrate holes 4400. As described above, in the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure by the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 into which the alignment portion 4600 is fitted is not unevenly distributed only in one region of the connector 4100, but sandwiches the connector 4100. It is distributed in the areas on both sides.

In the first game information display device 59, the alignment structure of the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 by the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 into which the alignment portion 4600 is fitted is provided in the areas on both sides of the connector 4100. It is provided in a distributed manner. The connector 4100 is a portion to which a force is applied when the plug of the harness is attached / detached, but the alignment structure arranged so as to sandwich the connector 4100 can prevent the first display board 4200 from being displaced.

As shown in FIG. 79, the protective member 4204 has a plate shape, and a connector opening 4300 penetrating in the front and back directions is formed in accordance with the connector 4100 protruding from the rear surface of the first display board 4200. The connector opening 4300 is formed according to the outer shape of the connector 4100 so that there is no large gap between the connector opening 4300 and the connector 4100 passed through the connector opening 4300. The protective member 4204 is a state in which at least a part of the rear surface of the first display board 4200 housed in the first cover member 4202 is covered with the rear surface of the first display board 4200 from the outside so as to be difficult to access. It is attached to the cover member 4202 (the present embodiment) or the first display substrate 4200. The protective member 4204 is arranged so as to be fitted inside the first cover member 4202, and is arranged behind the first display substrate 4200 also housed inside the first cover member 4202. The protective member 4204 of the present embodiment is formed in an outer shape that matches the inner region of the first cover member 4202 defined by the horizontal cover portion 4210. When the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the peripheral surface of the protective member 4204 comes into contact with the inner surface of the horizontal cover portion 4210, and the protective member 4204 is held so as not to be displaced vertically and horizontally. .. When the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the rear surface of the protective member 4204 is aligned with the open end (rear end) of the lateral cover portion 4210, or the front cover portion is in front of the open end. Arranged on the 4208 side (front side), the entire protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202.

As described above, since the rear side of the first display board 4200 is covered with the protective member 4204, it becomes difficult to access the first display board 4200 from the rear, and the first display board 4200 is cheated. Can be prevented. Further, the presence of the protective member 4204 makes it difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202. Here, since the protective member 4204 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to remove the protective member 4204 itself because it is obstructed by the first cover member 4202.

As shown in FIG. 77, the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 are assembled in a fitting structure due to unevenness, and after being assembled, the first cover is difficult to remove, reassemble, or disassemble. It is configured so that a trace of removal remains on either the member 4202 or the protective member 4204. In the fitting structure, the claw-shaped engaging portion 4214 provided on one of the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 (in this embodiment, the protective member 4204) is provided with the claw-shaped engaging portion 4214 of the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204. On the other hand (in this embodiment, the first cover member 4202) is fitted into the engagement receiving portion 4216, and the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 are caught by the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216. It is integrated. The fitting structure is provided at a plurality of locations corresponding to the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204, and is dispersed on the opposite sides of the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 with the first display substrate 4200 interposed therebetween. It is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the first cover member 4202 is provided with an engagement receiving portion 4216 on the lateral cover portion 4210. The engagement receiving portion 4216 is provided on the open end side of the lateral cover portion 4210 so as to form a rear opening edge in the engaging opening formed through the lateral cover portion 4210. The lateral cover portion 4210 has a concave shape that opens the front side portion outward from the engagement opening to form a thin plate, and the engagement receiving portion 4216 is erected over the opening side of the concave portion. That is, in the present embodiment, the engagement receiving portion 4216 has a plate thickness thinner than the plate thickness of the lateral cover portion 4210, and is provided so that the inside is recessed so that the engaging portion 4214 can be easily fitted.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the protective member 4204 is provided with an engaging portion 4214 that protrudes from the outer edge along the plate surface of the protective member 4204. The width of the engaging portion 4214 and the width of the engaging receiving portion 4216 (engaging opening) are set to be substantially the same, and the thickness of the engaging portion 4214 in the front-rear direction and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the engagement opening are When the engaging portion 4214 is fitted to the engaging receiving portion 4216, the engaging portion 4214 is positioned by hitting the opening edge of the engaging opening. The engaging portion 4214 has an arcuate or flat inclined surface that inclines rearward as the front surface toward the protruding end, and the rear surface is a flat surface along the rear surface of the protective member 4204. In other words, the engaging portion 4214 extends so that the front surface intersects the engaging receiving portion 4216 at an angle, and the rear surface intersects the engaging receiving portion 4216 in an orthogonal or nearly orthogonal relationship. It is postponed. As a result, when the engaging portion 4214 is fitted to the engaging receiving portion 4216, the first cover member 4202 is elastically deformed so as to be expanded by the inclination of the front surface of the engaging portion 4214 that hits the engaging receiving portion 4216, and engaged. It is possible to easily fit the engaging portion 4214 into the engaging opening by overcoming the receiving portion 4216. Then, when the engaging portion 4214 fits into the engaging opening, it is caught by the engaging receiving portion 4216 and the backward movement of the engaging portion 4214 is prevented. Here, when the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216 are fitted, the rear surface of the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216 are caught facing each other in a parallel relationship, so that the engaging portion 4214 is engaged. The first cover member 4202 is not guided so as to be expanded by the engaging portion 4214 as in the case of fitting the first cover member 4216 into the engaging receiving portion 4216. Therefore, the protective member 4204 cannot be substantially removed from the first cover member 4202 by fitting the engaging portion 4214 into the engaging receiving portion 4216.

As described above, according to the fitting structure of the engaging portion 4214 and the engaging receiving portion 4216, it becomes difficult to remove the protective member 4204 from the first cover member 4202, and the protective member 4204 makes the first display substrate 4200. It can be protected to prevent fraudulent activity against the first display substrate 4200. Further, when the engaging portion 4214 or the engaging receiving portion 4216 is destroyed and the protective member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, the first cover member 4202 has a trace of the destruction of the engaging receiving portion 4216. Remaining, traces of breaking the engaging portion 4214 will remain on the protective member 4204, and it will be easy to detect that there has been fraudulent activity. Further, when the protective member 4204 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, at least one of the engaging portion 4214 or the engaging receiving portion 4216 is broken, so that the protective member 4204 is reattached to the first cover member 4202. It becomes difficult to reassemble.

The first game information display device 59 of the present embodiment is configured such that the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 are difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble, and traces of removal remain. As a result, the first display substrate 4200 arranged sandwiched between the first cover member 4202 and the protective member 4204 is substantially difficult to remove from the first cover member 4202, with respect to the first cover member 4202. Difficult to reassemble and leaving traces of removal on the first cover member 4202. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent activity against the first display board 4200, and even if there is fraudulent activity, it can be easily detected.

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, identification means 4220 that can identify the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of the light emitting modes of two or more LEDs 4045 are arranged. .. The identification means 4220 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around the transmitting portion 4222 as a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light, and is provided around the transmitting portion 4222 from the transmitting portion 4222. Also includes a shielding portion 4224 as a second region that is difficult to transmit light. Further, the identification means 4220 may include a combination area 4226 (FIG. 75) displayed on the shielding unit 4224 and showing the light emitting modes of two or more LEDs 4045 as a combination. The identification means 4220 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The identification means 4220 is often formed in a shape that matches the front region of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 opens, and in the present embodiment, the identification means 4220 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the identification means 4220 and the first cover member 4202 are adhered to each other, but the size of the identification means 4220 and the method of attaching to the first cover member 4202 are not limited to this.

The transmission portion 4222 of the present embodiment is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202 so that the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 can be transmitted and affects the transmitted light. It has become. The transmission portion 4222 is provided so as to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206 so that the opening of the window 4206 and the LED 4045 arranged inside the window 4206 cannot be directly seen from the front side by the transmission portion 4222 on the front side of the window 4206. It is set to. Here, "affecting light" means, for example, a mode in which the LED 4045 is made difficult to see by making it translucent, a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is colored by making it colored, and a mode in which the light is colored. It refers to a mode in which the light diffused and emitted from the LED 4045 is made to appear large, a mode in which the light is converged to make the light emitted from the LED 4045 appear small, and a mode in which these are combined. Light is diffused by the transmitting portion 4222. The transmission portion 4222 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and is arranged in accordance with a plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202, and the plurality of transmission portions 4222 are identification means. It is provided in 4220. That is, in the identification means 4220, the transparent portion 4222 having a rectangular shape matching the window 4206 is formed in the same size as the window 4206, and the front opening of the window 4206 is closed by the transparent portion 4222.

Since the front side of the window 4206 is blocked by the transmissive portion 4222 in this way, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 surface-mounted on the first display board 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. Can be done. That is, the transparent portion 4222 can prevent fraudulent acts against the first display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 penetrating to the inside of the first cover member 4202. Moreover, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmitting portion 4222, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the states of the adjacent LEDs 4045 can be easily distinguished.

Around the transmissive portion 4222, a shielding portion 4224 is provided so as to make it more difficult for light to pass through than the transmissive portion 4222 that covers the window 4206. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, the shielding portion 4224 is arranged so as to surround the window 4206. The shielding portion 4224 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmissing portion 4222, and in the present embodiment, a portion other than the transmissing portion 4222 is formed in one sheet forming the identification means 4220. The shielding portion 4224 is arranged so as to overlap the region other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding unit 4224 is composed of a color that absorbs light of a wide range of wavelengths such as black, and a dark color that has a low degree of brightness (absorbs light well) such as a cold color such as dark blue. It's different.

As described above, since the shielding portion 4224 that is difficult to transmit light is provided around the transmitting portion 4222, the transmitting portion 4222 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmitting portion 4222 can be further improved. It becomes easy to distinguish. Further, even if the window 4206 and the transmissive portion 4222 are misaligned, it is difficult to tell that the window 4206 is misaligned because the window 4206 cannot be directly visually recognized. Moreover, if the transmissive portion 4222 is applied to the window 4206, the transmissive portion 4222 surrounded by the shielding portion 4224 illuminates, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

The shielding portion 4224 is not limited to the configuration in which the transparent portion 4222 is set on the same sheet, and the front surface itself of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding portion 4224, and the transparent portion of the sheet is set. Other configurations may be used, such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 4224 appears on the front side through or by not arranging the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 4224.

As shown in FIG. 75, the combination area 4226 is partitioned by a partition sign 4228 composed of a frame line (this embodiment) or the like displayed on the shielding portion 4224. The compartment sign 4228 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of transmissive portions 4222, so that the combined region 4226 surrounded by the compartment sign 4228 can be recognized separately from other regions. For example, the first and second special symbol first display 60, 61, the first and second special symbol hold first display 63, 64, high probability game state display 68, time saving game state display 69, right-handed In the first display 67, the round number display 66, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol hold first display 65, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (transmission unit 4222) constitute the display. For those, a group of transmissive portions 4222 corresponding to the display is surrounded by a partition marker 4228 to form a combination area 4226 corresponding to each display. The section sign 4228 is not limited to the mode of the frame line, and may be configured so as to be able to recognize that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination area 4226. ..

As shown in FIG. 75, specifically, the transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row is surrounded by the partition sign 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60. do. The transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the six LEDs 4045 in the upper row is surrounded by the partition sign 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61. The transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol 1st display 60 and the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61 is surrounded by the partition sign 4228, and the 1st special symbol is reserved. 1 The combination area 4226 corresponding to the display 63 is displayed. The transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol 1st display 61 is surrounded by the partition sign 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol hold 1st display 64. Further, the transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row is surrounded by the partition sign 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the round number display 66. The transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display 66 is surrounded by the division sign 4228 to display the combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62. From the right side of the lower row, the transmissive portion 4222 corresponding to the two LEDs 4045 is surrounded by the partition sign 4228, and the combination area 4226 corresponding to the normal symbol hold first display 65 is displayed.

By displaying the combination area 4226 in this way, the state of the LED 4045 in the area is associated and recognized, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the information due to the combination of the LED 4045.

As shown in FIG. 78, the identification means 4220 includes a first layer 4230 that easily transmits light and a first layer 4230.
It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 4232 which is arranged on the first layer 4230 on the front side of the region other than the window 4206 in the first cover member 4202 and is more difficult to transmit light than the first layer 4230. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmitting portion 4222 is composed of only the first layer 4230 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 4224 that is difficult to transmit light is composed of the first layer 4230 and the second layer 4232. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the laminated portion has the second layer 4232, it is difficult for light to transmit as a whole, and the light is prevented from transmitting from the shielding portion 4224. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 4230 is arranged on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 4232 is arranged on the front side (front side). The identification means 4220 is obtained, for example, by laminating the second layer 4232 on a sheet made of the first layer 4230 by painting, printing, or the like, and there is a visible step between the transmissive portion 4222 and the shielding portion 4224. do not have.

When the first game information display device 59 is attached to the plate member of the game board 5, the connector 4100 on the rear surface is exposed to the rear side of the game board 5. The first game information display device 59 can be attached to and detached from the connector 4100 in a state of being attached to the plate member of the game board 5, and is easy to use.

The first cover member 4202 includes a thermoplastic resin or the like in which each part such as the front cover part 4208, the horizontal cover part 4210, the window drawing part 4212, the engagement receiving part 4216, and the alignment part 4600 is integrally formed. A molded product made of synthetic resin is used. Further, as the protective member 4204, a molded product made of a synthetic resin such as a thermoplastic resin in which each portion such as the engaging portion 4214 is integrally formed is used.

The first display substrate 4200 is attached to the first cover member 4202 by welding or adhering the first display substrate 4200 to the first cover member 4202 while the surface is covered with the first cover member 4202. On the other hand, it may be attached in a state where it is difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble, or a trace of removal remains.

(Modification example of the first game information display device 59)
Next, a modified example of the first game information display device 59 will be described. Here, the differences from the first game information display device 59 described above will be mainly described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

As shown in FIG. 84, the first game information display device 59 is arranged on the rear side of the covering member 4800 installed on the game board 5, and the front side is covered with the covering member 4800. The covering member 4800 is a member that functions to close or fill the front-rear region on the front side of the game board 5, and is a rear portion including a plate portion constituting the front surface and a wall portion extending rearward from the outer peripheral edge of the plate portion. It has a box shape that opens to (Fig. 85). Here, the "front-back area" is an area formed for providing a game area 5a through which a game ball passes on the front side of a plate member of the game board 5. The covering member 4800 is arranged so that the front surface is substantially the same as the front end of the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, and when it is arranged outside the outer rail 36 (game area 5a) as in the present embodiment, it is a board decoration. May also serve as. When the first game information display device 59 is arranged inside the game area 5a, some of the game parts installed in the game area 5a such as the first and second starting ports 45 and 47 and the big winning opening 50. May be composed of a covering member 4800.

The covering member 4800 has a portion that covers the front side of the first game information display device 59, such as transparent or translucent, or has an opening corresponding to the window 4206 of the first game information display device 59, so that the front side thereof. The state of the LED 4045 can be visually recognized from the window 4206. The covering member 4800 is replaceably attached to the plate member of the game board 5 by screwing or the like. The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800 so as to be housed inside the covering member 4800. At this time, the first game information display device 59 has a game board with respect to a connector 4100 (FIG. 88) described later, which is provided so that the back surface thereof faces the back side of the game board 5 (plate member) and faces the back side. It becomes accessible from the back side of 5. In this way, the covering member 4800 can be attached to and detached from the plate member with the first game information display device 59 attached, and the covering member can be replaced or the model of the first game information display device 59 can be replaced. The 4800 can be easily replaced.

Since the first game information display device 59 is covered with the covering member 4800, it is more difficult to access from the outside. Even if a fraudulent act is committed, the time required to reach the first display board 4200 can be gained, and the fraudulent act can be made more difficult.

The first game information display device 59 of the present embodiment is detachably attached to the covering member 4800 by screwing or the like. Therefore, by removing the covering member 4800 from the plate member, the first game information display device 59 can be easily replaced when it breaks down or the like. The first game information display device 59 is difficult to remove or reassemble with respect to the covering member 4800 due to adhesion or the like, or when it is removed from the covering member 4800, either the first game information display device 59 or the covering member 4800. It may be installed in a configuration that leaves a trace of crab. In other words, the mounting structure of the first game information display device 59 and the covering member 4800 has a configuration that is difficult to remove without destroying the covering member 4800 or the first game information display device 59, and the covering member 4800 or the covering member 4800 or the first by removal. (1) A configuration that cannot be reassembled due to the destruction or deformation of the game information display device 59, or a covering member due to the destruction or deformation of the covering member 4800 or the first game information display device 59 due to removal. The 4800 or the first game information display device 59 may have at least one configuration in which a trace of removal remains.

The first game information display device 59 is attached to the covering member 4800, and the light of the LED 4045 can be visually recognized by the player via the covering member 4800. Further, the first game information display device 59 faces the back side of the game board 5 (plate member) and the connector 4100 (FIG. 88) provided so as to face the back side of the first game information display device 59 from the back side of the game board 5. It is accessible.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, in this modification, current limiting means 4500 and 4500 for controlling the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 are provided on the main control board 110 side. If the first game information display device 59 is electrically connected to the effect control board 130, the current limiting means 4500 and 4500 may be provided on the effect control board 130. As shown in FIG. 92, an excessive current flows through each LED 4045 by mounting a resistor 4500 as a current limiting means on the main control board 110 and limiting the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined value. Is prevented. The resistor 4500 may be mounted through a hole in which the lead of the resistor 4500 is fixed to a hole in the printed circuit board, or may be surface-mounted on the main control board 110. As a result, in the main control board 110, the lead for connecting the resistor 4500 to the circuit does not protrude on the side opposite to the mounting surface of the resistor 4500, and the surface opposite to the mounting surface can be effectively used.

The resistance 4500 is provided on the other side of the main control board 110 on the opposite side to the one on which the electric components are mounted.
It may be arranged at a position corresponding to the mounting area of the electric component. In this case, the mounting area of the plurality of resistors 4500 and the mounting area of the electronic component may be either a configuration in which the main control board 110 is sandwiched between the front and rear and the configuration in which all of the resistors 4500 are overlapped or a configuration in which the main control board 110 is partially overlapped. By surface-mounting the resistor 4500 on one surface of the main control board 110, the mounting of the resistor 4500 does not affect the front surface of the first display board 4200 as in the case of through-hole mounting. In this way, the main control board 110 can be made more compact by effectively using both sides of the main control board 110.

As shown in FIG. 93, the current limiting means 4500 may be provided as the driver 5600 on the main control board 110. The current limiting means 4500 limits the current flowing through the plurality of LEDs 4045 so as to be equal to or less than a predetermined value, thereby preventing an excessive current from flowing through each LED 4045. By providing the current limiting means 4500 and 4500 on the main control board 110 side in this way, the resistance of the first display board 4200 can be eliminated or reduced, so that the first display board 4200 can be made more compact. , The first game information display device 59 can be miniaturized.

As shown in FIGS. 89, 90, and 91, when the first display board 4200 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202, the first display board 4200 is the open end of the horizontal cover portion 4210. The entire first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner region of the first cover member 4202 at a position aligned with (rear end) (in the present embodiment) or on the front cover portion 4208 side (front side) of the open end. The cover. In other words, the first cover member 4202 covers the front surface of the first display board 4200 on which the LED 4045 is mounted with the front cover portion 4208, and covers the peripheral surface of the first display board 4200 with the horizontal cover portion 4210. 1 The presence of the cover member 4202 makes it difficult to access the front surface and the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 from the outside. In the first cover member 4202 of the present embodiment, the inner region is formed so as to be aligned with a part of the outer edge of the first display substrate 4200, and when the first display substrate 4200 is housed in the inner region, the horizontal cover portion 4210 Since the peripheral surface of the first display substrate 4200 is in contact with the inner surface, the first display substrate 4200 can be held so as not to be displaced.

In this way, since the first display board 4200 is arranged in a state of being housed in the first cover member 4202, it is difficult to access the first display board 4200 from the front side or the side side, and the first display board 4200 is used. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the board 4200. Further, even if the first display board 4200 is to be removed, it is difficult to access the first display board 4200 as described above. Therefore, the first display board 4200 should be removed from the first cover member 4202. Can be difficult.

As shown in FIG. 89, the first cover member 4202 and the first display substrate 4200 are assembled by an engaging structure in which the alignment portion 4600 is melted and engaged with the first display substrate 4200, and after assembly. Are configured so that when they are difficult to remove from each other, difficult to reassemble, or disassembled, traces of removal remain on either the first cover member 4202 or the first display substrate 4200. Specifically, when the alignment portion 4600 and the substrate hole 4400 are fitted together, the tip of the alignment portion 4600 protruding from the rear surface of the first display substrate 4200 is melted and becomes larger than the substrate hole 4400. By crushing in this way, a hooking portion 4600a is formed at the tip of the positioning portion 4600. The first display substrate 4200 is sandwiched between the rear end of the window image forming portion 4212 and the hooking portion 4600a of the alignment portion 4600, and is fixed to the first cover member 4202.

As described above, according to the above-mentioned engaging structure, it becomes difficult to remove the first display substrate 4200 from the first cover member 4202, and the first cover member 4202 protects the first display substrate 4200 to protect the first display substrate 4200. 1 It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the display board 4200. Further, when the hooking portion 4600a is destroyed and the first display board 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, a trace of the destruction of the hooking portion 4600a remains on the first cover member 4202, which is a fraudulent act. It becomes easier to discover that there was. Further, when the first display board 4200 is forcibly removed from the first cover member 4202, the hooking portion 4600a is broken and the first display board 4200 cannot be reattached to the first cover member 4202. , It becomes difficult to reassemble.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, identification means 4220 that can identify the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs 4045 individually or as a combination of the light emitting modes of two or more LEDs 4045 are arranged. .. The identification means 4220 may be arranged in association with the display by the LED 4045 or the LED 4045, such as being provided only on the first cover member 4202, only the covering member 4800, or dispersedly provided on the first cover member 4202 and the covering member 4800. Further, the identification means 4220 may have either a configuration attached to the front surface or the rear surface of the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800, or a configuration provided inside the first cover member 4202 or the covering member 4800. The identification means 4220 of the present embodiment includes a first identification unit 5122 provided on the front surface of the first cover member 4202 and a second identification unit 5124 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the first identification unit 5122 is provided. The second identification unit 5124 is arranged so as to overlap with the front side of the above. Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the identification means 4220 includes a third identification unit 4802 provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800 separately from the second identification unit 5124.

As shown in FIG. 89, the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and has a transmission unit 5126 as a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light, and a transmission unit 5126. It is provided with a shielding portion 5128 as a second region which is provided around and is less likely to transmit light than the transmitting portion 5126. The first identification unit 5122 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202. The first identification unit 5122 is often formed in a shape that matches the front area of the first cover member 4202 where the window 4206 opens. In the present embodiment, the first identification unit 5122 is first identified so as to cover the entire front surface of the first cover member 4202. The portion 5122 is formed. In the present embodiment, the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member 4202 are adhered to each other by the adhesive layer provided on the first identification unit 5122, but the size of the first identification unit 5122 and the first cover member The method of attaching to the 4202 is not limited to this. The first identification unit 5122 may be provided with a combination region showing two or more LED 4045 light emitting modes as a combination.

The transmitting portion 5126 is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202, and can transmit the light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206. The transmission portion 5126 is provided so as to cover the entire front opening of the window 4206, and the transmission portion 5126 on the front side of the window 4206 covers the front opening of the window 4206. The transmitting portion 5126 may be configured to be transparent, or may be configured to affect the transmitted light so that the LED 4045 arranged inside the window 4206 cannot be directly seen from the front side. Here, "affecting light" means, for example, a mode in which the LED 4045 is made difficult to see by making it translucent, a mode in which the light emitted from the LED 4045 is colored by making it colored, and a mode in which the light is colored. It refers to a mode in which the light diffused and emitted from the LED 4045 is made to appear large, a mode in which the light is converged to make the light emitted from the LED 4045 appear small, and a mode in which these are combined. Light is diffused by the transmitting portion 5126. The transmission portion 5126 is configured as a part of a sheet attached to the front surface of the first cover member 4202, and is arranged in accordance with the plurality of windows 4206 provided in the first cover member 4202, and the plurality of transmission portions 5126 are first. It is provided in the identification unit 5122. That is, in the first identification unit 5122, a square-shaped transmissive portion 5126 that matches the window 4206 is formed to have the same size as the window 4206, and the transmissive portion 5126 closes the front opening of the window 4206 without a gap. ..

Since the front side of the window 4206 is covered with the transmission portion 5126 in this way, it is difficult to access the LED 4045 surface-mounted on the first display board 4200 from the front side of the first game information display device 59. can. That is, the transmission unit 5126 can prevent fraudulent acts against the first display substrate 4200 through the window 4206 penetrating to the inside of the first cover member 4202. Moreover, since the light emitted from the LED 4045 can be adjusted by the transmission unit 5126, the state of the LED 4045 can be more easily identified, and the states of the adjacent LEDs 4045 can be easily distinguished.

A shield portion 5128 is provided around the transmissive portion 5126 so that light is less likely to pass through than the transmissive portion 5126 that covers the window 4206. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, the shielding portion 5128 is arranged so as to surround the window 4206. The shielding portion 5128 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the transmission portion 5126, and in the present embodiment, a portion other than the transmission portion 5126 is formed in one sheet forming the first identification portion 5122. The shielding portion 5128 is arranged so as to overlap the region other than the window 4206 on the front surface of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The shielding unit 5128 is composed of a color that absorbs light of a wide range of wavelengths such as black, and a dark color that has a low degree of brightness (absorbs light well) such as a cold color such as dark blue. It's different.

As described above, since the shielding portion 5128 that makes it difficult for light to pass through is provided around the transmitting portion 5126, the transmitting portion 5126 can be easily understood, and the situation of the LED 4045 recognized through the transmitting portion 5126 is more likely to occur. It becomes easy to distinguish. Further, even if the window 4206 and the transmissive portion 5126 are misaligned, it is difficult to tell that the window 4206 is misaligned because the window 4206 cannot be directly visually recognized. Moreover, if the transmissive portion 5126 is applied to the window 4206, the transmissive portion 5126 surrounded by the shielding portion 5128 illuminates, so that the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced.

The shielding portion 5128 is not limited to the configuration in which the transparent portion 5126 is set on the same sheet, and the front surface itself of the front cover portion 4208 of the first cover member 4202 is set as the shielding portion 5128 to form a transparent portion of the sheet. Other configurations may be used, such as a configuration in which the shielding portion 5128 appears on the front side through or by not arranging the sheet on the front side of the shielding portion 5128.

As shown in FIG. 90, the first identification unit 5122 is arranged so as to overlap the first layer 5130, which easily transmits light, and the first layer 5130 on the front side of the region other than the window 4206 in the first cover member 4202. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 5131 that is less likely to transmit light than the first layer 5130. In other words, the portion corresponding to the transmitting portion 5126 is composed of only the first layer 5130 that transmits light, and the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128 that is difficult to transmit light is composed of the first layer 5130 and the second layer 5131. It is composed of laminated parts. Since the laminated portion has the second layer 5131, it is difficult for light to pass through in the stacking direction (thickness direction), and the light is prevented from transmitting from the shielding portion 5128. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 5130 is arranged on the first cover member 4202 side (rear side), and the second layer 5131 is arranged on the front side (front side). The first identification unit 5122 is obtained, for example, by laminating the second layer 5131 on a sheet made of the first layer 5130 by painting, printing, or the like, and is visible between the transmission unit 5126 and the shielding unit 5128. There are no steps.

By configuring the first identification unit 5122 in this way, even if the window 4206 and the transmission unit 5126 are misaligned, the first layer 5130 can guide light to the transmission unit 5126, and the shielding unit 5128 can be guided. Since the transmissive portion 5126 surrounded by the light illuminates, the influence on the identification of the LED 4045 can be reduced. Moreover, in the portion corresponding to the shielding portion 5128, the light incident on the first layer 5130 is blocked by the second layer 5131 on the front side and does not leak to the front side, so that the transmitting portion 5126 can be clearly identified.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the second identification unit 5124 is located on the front side of the window 4206 and is attached to the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is provided on the front side of the window 4206, and is provided around the light transmission unit 5132 as a first region that can transmit light or affects the transmitted light, and around the light transmission unit 5132. It is provided with a light-shielding unit 5134 as a second region that is less likely to transmit light than the light-transmitting unit 5132. Further, the second identification unit 5124 may include a combination area 4804 displayed on the light shielding unit 5134 and showing the light emitting modes of two or more LEDs 4045 as a combination. The second identification portion 5124 of the present embodiment is formed in a sheet shape and is attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. The second identification unit 5124 is formed to fit the range of the plurality of windows 4206, and the front side of the plurality of windows 4206 is covered by one second identification unit 5124. In the present embodiment, the second identification portion 5124 and the covering member 4800 are adhered to each other by the adhesive layer of the second identification portion 5124, but the size of the second identification portion 5124 and the method of attaching to the covering member 4800 are different. Not limited to this.

The light transmitting portion 5132 of this modification is located on the front side of the window 4206 of the first cover member 4202.
The light emitted from the LED 4045 corresponding to the window 4206 is transparent or affects the transmitted light. The light transmitting unit 5132 is provided so as to cover at least the entire front side opening of the window 4206, and the state of the LED 4045 is made visible through the window 4206 by the light transmitting unit 5132 on the front side of the window 4206. The light transmitting portion 5132 of the present embodiment is transparently configured and is formed in a range corresponding to a plurality of windows 4206. The light transmission unit 5132 may be configured to affect the transmitted light, similarly to the transmission unit 5126 of the first identification unit 5122. Then, by adjusting the light emitted from the LED 4045 by the light transmitting unit 5132, it becomes easier to distinguish the state of the LED 4045, and it becomes easier to distinguish the states of the adjacent LEDs 4045.

Around the light-transmitting portion 5132, a light-shielding portion 5134 is provided, which is configured to make it more difficult for light to pass through than the light-transmitting portion 5132 that covers the window 4206. In other words, on the front side of the first cover member 4202, a light-shielding portion 5134 is arranged so as to surround the window 4206. The light-shielding portion 5134 is provided so as to surround the entire circumference of the light-transmitting portion 5132, and in the present embodiment, a portion other than the light-transmitting portion 5132 is formed in one sheet forming the second identification portion 5124. The light-shielding portion 5134 is arranged so as to overlap the region other than the window 4206 on the front side of the first cover member 4202 so as not to cover the inside of the window 4206. The light-shielding unit 5134 is composed of a color that absorbs light of a wide range of wavelengths such as black, and a dark color that has a low degree of brightness (absorbs light well) such as a cold color such as dark blue, and is the color of the light-transmitting unit 5132. Is different from.

As described above, since the light-shielding portion 5134 that makes it difficult for light to pass through is provided around the light-transmitting portion 5132, the light-transmitting portion 5132 can be easily understood, and the LED 4045 recognized via the light-transmitting portion 5132. The situation is easier to discern. Further, even if the window 4206 and the light transmitting portion 5132 are misaligned, it can be difficult to tell that they are misaligned.

The light-shielding portion 5134 is not limited to the configuration set to the same sheet of the light-transmitting portion 5132, and the front surface of the portion corresponding to the front side of the window 4206 in the covering member 4800 is set as the light-shielding portion 5134 to set the transparent portion of the sheet. Other configurations may be used, such as a configuration in which the light-shielding portion 5134 appears on the front side through the light-shielding portion 5134 or by not arranging the sheet on the front side of the light-shielding portion 5134. The covering member 4800 may be provided with an opening corresponding to the window 4206, and the opening may be closed by a second identification unit 5124 (light-transmitting unit 5132 and / or light-shielding unit 5134).

The combination area 4804 is partitioned by a partition sign 4806 composed of a frame line (this embodiment) or the like displayed on the light-shielding portion 5134. The compartment sign 4806 is displayed so as to surround the plurality of light-transmitting portions 5132, and the combination area 4804 surrounded by the compartment sign 4806 can be recognized separately from other regions. For example, the first and second special symbol first display 60, 61, the first and second special symbol hold first display 63, 64, high probability game state display 68, time saving game state display 69, right-handed In the first display 67, the round number display 66, the normal symbol first display 62, and the normal symbol hold first display 65, among these, a plurality of LEDs 4045 (transmission unit 5126 or light transmission unit 5132) are used. For those constituting the display, a group of LEDs 4045 (transmission unit 5126 or light transmission unit 5132) corresponding to the display is surrounded by a partition marker 4806 to form a combination area 4804 corresponding to each display. The section sign 4806 is not limited to the mode of the frame line, and may have a configuration capable of recognizing that it is distinguished from other areas, such as adding characters or changing the color in the combination area 4804. ..

Specifically, the combination area 4804 corresponding to the first special symbol first display 60 is displayed by surrounding with a section sign 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4045 on the left side of the upper row. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol first display 61 is displayed by surrounding with a partition marker 4806 so as to correspond to the six LEDs 4845 in the upper row. The first special symbol hold 1st display is surrounded by a section sign 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 arranged between the first special symbol 1st display 60 and the 2nd special symbol 1st display 61. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the device 63 is displayed. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the second special symbol hold first display 64 is displayed by surrounding with a section sign 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045 on the right side of the second special symbol first display 61. Further, the combination area 4804 corresponding to the round number indicator 66 is displayed by surrounding it with a division sign 4806 so as to correspond to the eight LEDs 4045 on the left side of the lower row. The combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol first display 62 is displayed by surrounding it with a division sign 4806 so as to correspond to the three LEDs 4045 on the right side of the round number display. From the right side of the lower row, the combination area 4804 corresponding to the normal symbol hold first display 65 is displayed by surrounding it with a division sign 4806 so as to correspond to the two LEDs 4045.

By displaying the combination area 4804 in this way, the state of the LED 4045 in the area is associated and recognized, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the information due to the combination of the LED 4045.

As shown in FIG. 90, the second identification unit 5124 is arranged so as to be overlapped on the front side of the first layer 5136 in addition to the first layer 5136 which easily transmits light and the region corresponding to the window 4206, and the first layer. It is in the form of a sheet having a second layer 5138 that is less likely to transmit light than 5136. In other words, the light-transmitting portion 5132 corresponding to the window 4206 is composed of only the first layer 5136 that transmits light, and the portions corresponding to the light-shielding portion 5134 that is difficult to transmit light are the first layer 5136 and the second layer 5138. It is composed of a laminated part with. Since the laminated portion has the second layer 5138, it is difficult for light to pass through as a whole, and the light is prevented from passing through the light-shielding portion 5134. Here, in the laminated portion, the first layer 5136 is arranged on the rear side, and the second layer 5138 is arranged on the front side (front side). The second identification unit 5124 is obtained, for example, by laminating the second layer 5138 on a sheet made of the first layer 5136 by painting, printing, or the like, and is visible between the light transmission unit 5132 and the light shielding unit 5134. There is no step.

The third identification unit 4802 is an area where various information is displayed, and is attached to the covering member 4800. The third identification unit 4802 is formed in a sheet shape and is arranged at a position different from that of the second identification unit 5124 (upper side in the present embodiment) on the front surface of the covering member 4800. The displayed information of the third identification unit 4802 is visible to the player. In the present embodiment, the third identification portion 4802 and the covering member 4800 are adhered to each other by the adhesive layer of the third identification portion 4802, but the size of the third identification portion 4802 and the method of attaching to the covering member 4800 are different. Not limited to this. Further, the information displayed by the third identification unit 4802 may be displayed on the second identification unit 5124 or the first identification unit 5122, or may be displayed separately from the identification means 4220, and the third identification unit 4802 may be omitted. ..

By providing the third identification unit 4802 in this way, the amount of information that can be displayed increases, and the information displayed by the first game information display device 59 can be made easier to understand. In addition, by separating each piece of information and displaying it in a plurality of identification units 4802, 5122, and 5124, it is possible to flexibly respond to changes such as when changing models.

The identification unit 4802, 5122, 5124 (identification means 4220) may be configured to cover its peripheral surface with the protection unit 4808 (FIG. 85). In the present embodiment, the protective portion 4808 is provided on the front surface of the covering member 4800, the peripheral surface of the second identification portion 5124 attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800, and the third identification portion attached to the front surface of the covering member 4800. Each of the peripheral surfaces of 4802 is covered with a protective portion 4808. Specifically, the protection unit 4808 is composed of a wall extending in the front-rear direction in a recess formed according to the shape of the identification unit 4802, 5124 corresponding to the mounting position of the identification unit 4802, 5124. There is. Further, the recess of the covering member 4800 is as deep as the thickness of the identification portions 4802, 5124, and the protective portion 4808 faces the peripheral surface of the identification portions 4802, 5124 fitted and attached to the recess, and the identification portion is also identified. The entire circumference of 4802,5124 is surrounded by a protective portion 4808.

By covering the peripheral surface of the identification unit 4802, 5124 with the protective unit 4808 in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the protective unit 4808 to access the identification unit 4802, 5124, and the peripheral surface can be hooked with a nail or the like to catch the identification unit. It is possible to prevent the 4802,5124 from being removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as replacing the identification units 4802, 5124 or removing the identification units 4802, 5124 to access the first display board 4200. Further, by attaching the identification portions 4802, 5124 to the covering member 4800 with the protection portion 4808 as a reference, the identification portions 4802, 5124 can be aligned. In particular, since the second identification unit 5124 overlapping the front side of the window 4206 can be arranged without deviation, the state of the LED 4045 can be more appropriately determined.

In this modification, the protection unit 4808 is provided corresponding to the entire circumference of the identification unit 4802, 5124, but the protection unit 4808 is used as a part of the peripheral surface of the identification unit 4802, 5122, 5124 (identification means 4220). It may be configured to be provided correspondingly.

As the information to be displayed by the identification means 4220, the information regarding the profit given to the player in the game (which may be referred to as the game state information in the description) displayed by the first game information display device 59 is assisted or explained. Game status display such as, unique display showing unique information such as model name, probability of game machine 1 (for example, 1/299, etc.), probability variation rate of game machine 1 (for example, 60/100, etc.), big hit It is preferable to display the spec display showing the spec information such as the number of rounds (for example, 15R, 4R, etc.) alone or in combination. In addition, these displays are described by printing or other methods that can be visually recognized by the player.

For example, as the game state display, as in the above-described embodiment, by forming the combination area 4804 surrounded by the section sign 4806, the states of the plurality of LEDs 4045 in the combination area 4804 are associated and recognized as a combination. The game state information displayed by the combination of the plurality of LEDs 4045 may be easily identified and assisted.

FIG. 86 is an explanation showing an example of the game state display 4810 applied corresponding to the round number display 66. For example, as shown in FIG. 86A, the game status display 4810 has a number of rounds at a position such as a position corresponding to the side of the round number display 66, which is known to correspond to the round number display 66. A pattern schematically showing the display 66 may be configured to describe the display mode and the number of rounds of the LED 4045 for each round. The game state display 4810 of FIG. 86A explains the game state information (number of rounds) displayed by the combination of the plurality of LEDs 4045 of the round number display 66. Therefore, by referring to the game state display 4810 of FIG. 86 (a), it is possible to easily identify the game state information (number of rounds) shown by the round number display 66.

Further, as the game state display 4810, a sign such as a number or a symbol is arranged at a position (FIG. 86 (b)) corresponding to the side of the LED 4045 or on the front side (FIG. 86 (c)) corresponding to the LED 4045. The sign may be used to assist in associating and recognizing the state of the LED 4045 as a combination, or to explain the state of the LED 4045. The sign may have a difference in color or shape.

The identification means 4220 is divided into a first identification unit 5122 provided on the first cover member 4202 and a second identification unit 5124 provided on the covering member 4800 as a configuration corresponding to the front side of the window 4206. Since the functions required for the identification means 4220 can be assigned and set in the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the configuration of the respective identification units 5122 and 5124 can be simplified. Further, by assigning and setting the functions required for the identification means 4220 to the two identification units 5122 and 5124, the state of the LED 4045 can be more clearly distinguished and the state of the LED 4045 can be made easier to understand. Moreover, by arranging the first identification unit 5122 and the second identification unit 5124 so as to overlap each other, a synergistic effect difficult to obtain with one sheet can be obtained due to the overlap of the two identification units 5122 and 5124.

Since the covering member 4800 is replaceably attached to the gaming board 5, if the covering member 4800 is removed from the gaming board 5 and replaced when the model is changed, the identification portions 4802, 5124 provided on the covering member 4800 can be used. Can be easily replaced including. If the unique display and the spec display are performed by the covering member 4800, another model can be supported by replacing the covering member 4800. Further, since the first identification unit 5122 is provided on the first cover member 4202, it is not affected by the replacement of the covering member 4800.

(Details of the structure of the second game information display device 79)
As shown in FIG. 94, the second game information display device 79 has a plurality of LEDs arranged in a triangular shape. These LEDs are the first and second special symbol second display 80, 81, the first and second special symbol hold second display 83, 84, the normal symbol second display 82, and the normal symbol hold second display. The device 85 and the right-handed second display 87 are configured.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the second game information display device 79 covers at least the second display board 5800 on which 10 LEDs are surface-mounted on the surface and the front side of the second display board 5800. It is composed of a second cover member 5710 and the like. Although not shown here, on the front side (top) of the second cover member 5710, an identification means capable of identifying the light emitting modes of a plurality of LEDs individually or as a combination of the light emitting modes of two or more LEDs is arranged. ..

The second cover member 5710 is composed of a plate-shaped pedestal portion 5730 forming the bottom of the second cover member 5710 and a triangular columnar protruding portion 5720 protruding from the pedestal portion 5730. The corners of the side surface of the protruding portion 5720 are chamfered, and the second game information display device 79 is arranged with the top of the protruding portion 5720 facing the player.

The second display board 5800 is a printed circuit board provided with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface facing the player, and can irradiate light from each LED toward the front side. The LED is surface-mounted on the second display board 5800, not through-hole mounting in which the LED leads are fixed to the holes in the printed circuit board. In the second display board 5800, the light emitting element of the LED and the solder for fixing the light emitting element to the second display board 5800 are on the same front surface of the second display board 5800. That is, the lead for connecting the LED to the circuit does not protrude from the rear surface of the second display board 5800, and the solder for fixing the LED is not arranged on the rear surface. As the LED, either full color or single color may be used, and a plurality of LEDs may be configured by combining full color and single color. Further, as the LED, either a chip type or a cannonball type can be used as long as it can be surface-mounted, but the chip type is preferable because the space can be reduced. The second display board 5800 is controlled by the control means of the effect control board 130 (see FIG. 5) to control the lighting, extinguishing, blinking, and other states of a plurality of LEDs, and the lighting, extinguishing, and blinking states. Information on the profit given to the player is displayed by the combination of these or the change of the state.

By surface-mounting the LED on the second display board 5800 in this way, the space for arranging the LED on the second display board 5800 can be reduced, and the second display board 5800 can be made more compact. can. Further, by surface-mounting the LED on the second display board 5800, the weight can be reduced and the failure can be reduced. Further, by mounting the LED on the front surface of the second display board 5800, the mounting of the LED does not affect the rear surface of the second display board 5800 as in the case of through-hole mounting. Therefore, in the second display board 5800, other electronic components can be arranged on the rear surface corresponding to the mounting area on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and the rear surface of the second display board 5800 is effectively used. It can be used, and the second display board 5800 can be made more compact.

The LED may have either a configuration in which the light emitting element is arranged so as to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800, or a configuration in which the LED is embedded so as not to protrude from the surface of the second display substrate 5800. The second display substrate 5800 may be provided with a reflective portion that easily reflects light such as white in the front region where a plurality of LEDs are mounted, or it is difficult to reflect light such as black in the front region. An absorption unit may be provided. When the light emitting element of the LED protrudes from the surface of the second display substrate 5800, by providing a reflecting portion around the light emitting element, the light emitted from the LED is reflected by the reflecting portion and can be efficiently used. When the light emitting element of the LED is embedded in the second display substrate 5800, the light emitted from the LED by the absorbing portion is diffused on the front surface of the second display substrate 5800 by providing an absorbing portion around the light emitting element. Can be prevented from doing so.

The projecting portion 5720 is formed with ten light guide hole portions 5740 as windows penetrating the projecting portion 5720 along the projecting direction. Further, the pedestal portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710 is attached with the second display substrate 5800 in a state of covering the surface thereof, and each light guide hole portion 5740 is surface-mounted on the surface of the second display substrate 5800. It is arranged at the position corresponding to the LED. This makes it possible to visually recognize the lighting state of each LED from the top side of the protruding portion 5720 via the light guide hole portion 5740.

On the other hand, on the back surface of the second display board 5800, a connector 5810 wired to the LED surface-mounted on the front surface is provided (see FIG. 95), and the LED and the effect control board 130 are provided via the connector 5810. And are connected.

The second display board 5800 is screwed to the pedestal portion 5730 of the second cover member 5710, whereby the second display board 5800 is removable and reassembled with respect to the second cover member 5710. It can be attached to the second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 without leaving any trace when disassembled.

The method of attaching the second display board 5800 to the second cover member 5710 (pedestal portion 5730) is not limited to this, and for example, by attaching using the engaging portion and the engaging receiving portion. , The second cover member 5710 may be detachably attached, reassembled, and attached to the second cover member 5710 or the second display substrate 5800 without leaving a trace when disassembled.

Further, the shape of the protruding portion 5720 is not limited to the triangular columnar shape, but may be various shapes such as a cylindrical columnar shape and a square columnar shape. Further, in the present embodiment, as an example, 10 LEDs are surface-mounted on the second display board 5800, and 10 light guide holes corresponding to each LED are mounted on the second cover member 5710. Although the 5740 is formed, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of LEDs and light guide holes.

Further, the second game information display device 79 may be divided and arranged in a plurality of display devices according to the function. In that case, the second game information display device 79 may be collectively arranged adjacent to the inner rail 35 in the lower left of the game area 5a. It may be arranged, or it may be distributedly arranged in a plurality of places in the game area 5a.

When the second game information display device 79 is divided into a plurality of display devices, for example, the first special symbol second display 80 and the first special symbol hold second display 83 are set as one display device, and the second display device is used. The special symbol 2nd display 81 and the 2nd special symbol holding 2nd display 84 are used as one display device, and the normal symbol 2nd display 82 and the normal symbol holding 2nd display are used as one display device. Two display devices may be used as one display device.

Further, the first special symbol 2nd display 80, the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81, and the normal symbol 2nd display 82 are used as one display device, and the 1st special symbol holding 2nd display 83 and the 2nd special are used as one display device. The symbol holding second display 84 and the normal symbol holding second display 85 may be used as one display device, and the right-handed second display may be used as one display device.

Further, the first special symbol 2nd display 80, the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81, and the normal symbol 2nd display 82 are used as one display device, and the 1st special symbol holding 2nd display 83 is used as one display. The second special symbol holding second display 84 may be used as one display device, and the normal symbol holding second display 85 and the right-handed second display may be used as one display device.

(Modification example of the second game information display device 79)
Next, a modified example of the second game information display device 79 will be described. Here, the differences from the second game information display device 79 described above will be mainly described, and the description of the same configuration will be basically omitted.

As shown in FIG. 96A, in the present modification, the second game information display device 79 is closer to the right side area of the game area 5a (the right side flow path through which the right-handed game ball flows down), and the first game is played. It is arranged at a position closer to the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 than the information display device 59. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the display state of the second game information display device 79 while visually recognizing the game ball hit to the right.

Specifically, it is an effect space 40a provided inside the decorative frame 40, that is, a specific area in which the game ball formed inside the game area 5a does not flow down (flow is restricted) and is adjacent to the decorative frame 40. It is provided to do so. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the game area 5a does not collide with the second game information display device 79. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the second game information display device 79 is damaged due to the collision of the game balls.

Further, since the second game information display device 79 is arranged at a position deviating from the operation trajectory of the movable effect member 73 in the effect space 40a, even if the movable effect member 73 operates, the second game information The front of the display device 79 is not shielded and does not collide with the second game information display device 79. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the second game information display device 79 regardless of the progress state of the game. The arrangement and structure of the second game information display device 79 of this modification may be applied to the above-described embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96 (b), the second game information display device 79 includes a first special symbol second display 80, a second special symbol second display 81, and a normal symbol second, which are composed of one LED. 2 display 82, right-handed second display 87, first special symbol hold second display 83 composed of two LEDs, second special symbol hold second display 84, normal symbol hold second display Equipped with 85.

The right-handed second display 87 is provided at the uppermost portion of the second game information display device 79, and is a triangular window 4206 provided in the second cover member 5710 so that the tip of the right-handed second display 87 faces the right side region of the game region 5a. The lighting state of the LED can be visually recognized. In this way, since the second game information display device 79 is arranged at the uppermost stream in the flow direction of the game ball, it becomes easier for the player to find the existence of the right-handed second display device 87. Further, since the right-handed hitting is simply expressed by the direction of the triangular window 4206, it is possible to easily grasp the right-handed hitting by the player.

The first special symbol second display 80 is provided on the left side directly below the right-handed display 87, and visually recognizes the lighting state of the LED that emits green light from the circular window 4206 provided in the second cover member 5710. It is possible. In this way, the first special symbol 2nd display 80 is placed on the left side of the 2nd game information display device 79, that is, the left side area of the game area 5a in which the game ball is launched in the normal game state (the game ball hit left). Since it is arranged on the side close to the flowing area), it becomes easy for the player who is hitting the left side to visually recognize the lighting state of the first special symbol second display 80.

The second special symbol second display 81 is provided on the right side directly below the right-handed display 87 (position closer to the right side area of the game area 5a than the first special symbol first display 80), and the second cover. The lighting state of the LED that emits red light can be visually recognized from the rectangular window 4206 provided in the member 5710. In this way, the second special symbol 2 display 81 is on the right side of the first special symbol 2 display 80, that is, the right region of the game area 5a for launching the game ball in the time-saving game state (right-struck game ball). Since it is arranged on the side close to the area where the second special symbol flows down), it becomes easier for the player who is hitting the right to visually recognize the second lighting state of the second special symbol. Further, since the light is emitted in a different color from that of the first special symbol 2 display 80 and the shape of the window 4206 is different, that is, the display mode (light emission mode, visual mode) is different, the window 4206 is different from the first special symbol 2 display 80. It becomes easy to distinguish from the second special symbol second display 81.

It should be noted that at least the effect symbol 70a (composed of the identification unit and the decorative unit) that is variablely displayed by the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 during the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is at least. If they are in the same gaming state, they are displayed in the same (common) display mode, but by checking the first special symbol second display 80 and the second special symbol second display 81, the first special symbol can be displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the display is a variable display or a variable display of the second special symbol.

The first special symbol hold second display 83 is provided directly under () the first special symbol second display 80, and emits green light from two diamond-shaped windows 4206 provided in the second cover member 5710. The lighting state of the LED is visible. As described above, since the light is emitted in the same color as the LED of the first special symbol 2 display directly under the first special symbol 2 display 80, that is, the display mode (light emission mode, visual mode) is the same, the game is played. It becomes easy to grasp that the person is the first reserved number.

The second special symbol holding second display 84 is provided directly below the second special symbol second display 81 (at a position closer to the right side area of the game area 5a than the first special symbol holding first display 83). The lighting state of the LED that emits green light can be visually recognized from the two hexagonal windows 4206 provided in the second cover member 5710. In this way, it emits light in the same color as the LED of the second special symbol 2 display 81 directly under the second special symbol 2 display 81, that is, the display mode (light emission mode, visual mode) is the same. It becomes easy to grasp that the player is the second reserved number.

The normal symbol second display 82 is provided on the lower left side of the lowermost portion of the second game information display device 79, and visually recognizes the lighting state of the LED that emits yellow light from the circular window 4206 provided in the second cover member 5710. It is possible. In this way, the light is emitted in a different color from the first special symbol 2nd display 80 and the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81, that is, the display mode (light emission mode, visual recognition mode) is different, so that the player is the first special. It becomes easy to distinguish from the symbol second display 80 and the second special symbol second display 81.

The normal symbol hold second display 85 is provided on the right side of the normal symbol second display 82, and the lighting state of the LED that emits yellow light from the two circular windows 4206 provided in the second cover member 5710 is displayed. It is visible. As described above, since the light is emitted in the same color as the normal symbol second display 82, that is, the display mode (light emitting mode, visual mode) is the same, it becomes easy for the player to grasp that the number is reserved.

Although the first special symbol 2nd display 80 and the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81 are arranged adjacent to each other, they may be arranged apart from each other, and even in that case, the first The special symbol 2nd display 80 is arranged closer to the left side area of the game area 5a than the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81, and the 2nd special symbol 2nd display 81 is placed from the 1st special symbol 2nd display 80. May be placed closer to the right side area of the game area 5a. Further, the first special symbol second display 80 may be provided above the second special symbol second display 81 (upstream side in the flow direction of the game ball), or vice versa.

Further, although the shape of the window 4206 of the first special symbol second display 80 and the shape of the window 4206 of the first special symbol holding second display 83 are different, they may be the same shape. Similarly, the shape of the window 4206 of the second special symbol second display 81 and the shape of the window 4206 of the second special symbol holding second display 84 are different, but they may be the same shape.

Further, although the shape of the window 4206 of the first special symbol 2 display 80 and the shape of the window 4206 of the normal symbol 2 display 82 are the same, they may be different shapes, and even in that case. , The shape of the window 4206 of the ordinary symbol second display 82 and the shape of the window 4206 of the ordinary symbol holding second indicator 85 may be the same or different.

Further, the second game information display device 79 has a first special symbol second display 80, a second special symbol second display 81, a first special symbol hold second display 83, and a second special symbol hold second display. 84, the normal symbol second display 82, the normal symbol hold second display 85, and the right-handed second display 87 are provided, but only some of them may be provided. For example, the normal symbol holding second indicator 85 may not be provided, the right-handed second indicator 87 may not be provided, or the first special symbol second indicator 80 and the second special may not be provided. It is also possible not to provide other than the symbol second display 81.

Further, the second game information display device 79 (special symbol second display 80, 81, special symbol hold second display 83, 84, etc.) is displayed on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 to display the number of holds. It may be provided at a position lower than the areas SH1 and SH2 and the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2, or may be provided at a position higher than the reserved number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2. Further, the second game information display device 79 may be provided at a position higher than one of the reserved number display areas SH1 and SH2 and the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2 and lower than the other.

Further, the first reserved number display area SH1 and the second reserved number display area SH2 provided in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 are arranged at positions closer to the right side area than the left side area of the game area 5a. May be good. Even in that case, the second reserved number display area SH2 may be arranged at a position closer to the right side area of the game area 5a than the first reserved number display area SH1. Further, the first reserved number display area SH1 may be arranged above (immediately above) the second reserved number display area SH2, or vice versa.

Further, instead of arranging the second special symbol display area DZ2 below (including directly below) the first special symbol display area DZ1 provided in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the second special symbol display is displayed. The first special symbol display area DZ1 may be arranged below (including directly below) the area DZ2. Further, the second special symbol display area DZ2 may be arranged at a position closer to the right side area of the game area 5a than the first special symbol display area DZ1.

Further, instead of arranging the reserved number display areas SH1 and SH2 below the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2, the special symbol display areas DZ1 and DZ2 are arranged below the reserved number display areas SH1 and SH2. May be.

In the present embodiment, the right-handed second display 87 has a display mode that is easier for the player to recognize than the right-handed first display 67 by marking "right-handed" in the vicinity of the LED. The display mode of the striking second display 87 is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as it is easier for the player to recognize than the right-strike first display 67. For example, instead of the LED lighting display, a blinking display may be used, or a full-color LED may be used to light in various colors at predetermined intervals, which is larger than the LED of the right-handed first display 67. You may use a size LED. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to recognize than the right-handed first display 67.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 is the special display mode 3 (red), which is highly expected to be a big hit than the hold icon of the normal display mode (white). Even if the hold icon is displayed, the display of the special symbol hold second display 83, 84 is displayed in the same display mode (LED lighting or blinking) as when the hold icon in the normal display mode is displayed. However, the display of the special symbol holding second display 83, 84 may also be displayed in a special display mode corresponding to the display mode of the hold icon of the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. For example, the special symbol hold 2nd display corresponding to the hold icon of the 1st image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 by using the LED of the special symbol hold 2 display 83, 84 that can display the full color. The display colors of 83 and 84 may be changed and displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the SP reach effect, the blackout effect, the movement effect performed by using the movable effect member 73, and the jackpot game effect, the first hold icon display area 70B1 on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 is used. The displays of ~ 70B4, the second hold icon display areas 70C1 to 70C4, and the variable icon display area 70D have been erased, but the erased display is not limited to this. For example, the display of the number of reserved special symbols in the reserved number display area (first reserved number display area SH1 and second reserved number display area SH2) may be deleted, or the special symbol display area (first special symbol display area DZ1) may be deleted. , The display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the second special symbol display area DZ2) may be erased, or all of them may be erased.

In this way, even if the information regarding the progress of these games is erased, the information is displayed on the second game information display device 79, so that the SP reach effect, the blackout effect, the movement effect performed by using the movable effect member 73, and the jackpot It is possible for the player to grasp information on the progress of the game while preventing the game from being disturbed.

In the present embodiment, the display of the number of special symbol reservations at the time of power restoration after the occurrence of the power failure is set to substantially the same timing for the restoration of the display of the first game information display device 59 and the second game information display device 79. After the display of the first game information display device 59 is restored, the display of the second game information display device 79 is restored so that the display of the first game information display device 59 → the second game information display device 79 → the first image The display of the number of reserved special symbols may be restored in the order of the display device main liquid crystal) 70.

Further, when the power is restored after the power failure occurs, only the special symbol hold number and the normal figure hold number are transmitted from the main CPU 110a to the sub CPU 130a, but other information should be transmitted. You can do it.

For example, information on whether or not the special symbol is changing and information on whether or not the normal symbol is changing may be transmitted. When such information is transmitted, even during the power restoration effect on the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the special symbol second display 80, 81 and the normal symbol second on the second game information display device 79. The display of the display 82 can be restored, and the player can grasp the variable display of the special map and the variable display of the normal map.

In addition, information on the gaming state (at least information on whether or not the gaming state is shortened) may be transmitted. By doing so, the display of the right-handed second display 87 can be restored in the second game information display device 79 even during the power restoration effect in the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70. , The player can grasp the right-handed display.
For example, if the power is restored during a big hit game, if you do not hit right during the power restoration production, you will miss the opportunity to win the game ball at the big prize opening, but as mentioned above, the second right-handed display By restoring the display of the device 87 and allowing the player to grasp the right-handed display, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage.

Further, in the present embodiment, the player can adjust the brightness of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, the frame lighting device 10, the panel lighting device 74, and the like. Although it is not configured, the gaming machine 1 may be configured so that the player can adjust the brightness.

For example, the cross key 19 is displayed during a customer waiting effect such as displaying a customer waiting demo image on the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 or the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71, or displaying an image during power saving. When any of the above is operated and a signal indicating that the cross key 19 is operated is input to the effect control unit 130m, the sub CPU 130a transmits a command corresponding to the operation to the image control unit 140.

Then, the image control unit 140 causes the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71 to display the brightness adjustment image based on the reception of the command from the effect control unit 130m. Take control.

When the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated while the brightness adjustment image is displayed, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the left button or the right button of the cross key 19 is operated, and is currently set. Refer to the brightness that is set, and respond to the operation of the cross key 19 from among several levels of brightness prepared in advance (if the left button, lower the brightness from the currently set brightness, and if it is the right button, If the brightness is higher than the currently set brightness), the brightness is selected, and the brightness command corresponding to the selected brightness is transmitted to the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 160.
The sub CPU 130a corresponds to the luminance adjusting means of the present invention.

The image control unit 140 changes and displays the brightness of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70 and the second image display device (sub liquid crystal) 71 based on the brightness command from the effect control unit 130m. Controls to update and display the image on the image indicating that the brightness has been changed. Further, the lamp control unit 160 controls to change the brightness of the panel lighting device 74 and the frame lighting device 10 based on the brightness command from the effect control unit 130m.

In such a game machine 1, the cross key 19 is operated by the player, and the first image display device (main liquid crystal display) 70, the second image display device (sub liquid crystal display) 71, the board lighting device 74, and the frame lighting are operated. Even if the brightness of the device 10 is changed, each display of the second game information display device 79 (first special symbol second display 80, second special symbol second display 81, normal symbol second display 82, The brightness of the LED of the first special symbol holding second display 83, the second special symbol holding second display 84, the normal symbol holding second display 85, and the right-handed second display 87) is not changed.

In this way, even if the player operates the cross key 19 to reduce the brightness and play the game, each display of the second game information display device 79 (first special symbol second display 80, second). Special symbol 2nd display 81, normal symbol 2nd display 82, 1st special symbol hold 2nd display 83, 2nd special symbol hold 2nd display 84, normal symbol hold 2nd display 85, and right Since the brightness of the LED of the second indicator 87) is not changed and is displayed at a constant brightness, the player can grasp the information regarding the progress of the game.
It should be noted that each display of the first game information display device 59 (first special symbol first display 60, second special symbol first display 61, normal symbol first display 62, first special symbol hold first display). LED of the device 63, the second special symbol hold first display 64, the normal symbol hold first display 65, the right-handed first display 67, the high-probability game state display 68, and the time-saving game state display 69). The brightness of is also unchanged.

In addition, each display of the second game information display device 79 (first special symbol second display 80, second special symbol second display 81, normal symbol second display 82, first special symbol hold second display). The brightness of the LED of the device 83, the second special symbol holding second display 84, the normal symbol holding second display 85, and the right-handed second display 87) may also be changed. In this case, display control data corresponding to the brightness determined by the sub CPU 130a may be created and output to each display of the second game information display device 79.

Further, the control method for adjusting the brightness is not limited to the above method. For example, the effect control unit 130m transmits only a command indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated, and the image control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 160 memorize the currently set brightness to control the effect. The brightness may be changed by referring to the currently set brightness stored based on the command from the unit 130m and determining the brightness to be changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the LED is exemplified as a means for displaying the game state information in the game information display device (display means), but the present invention is not limited to this, and a 7-segment display, an organic EL, or another light emitting body is used. You may. It is desirable that the light emitting body can be surface-mounted from the viewpoint of compactification and the like.

The display board is not limited to a plate shape, and may be any one on which the above-mentioned light emitting body as a means for displaying game state information is mounted, and the display board on which the light emitting body is mounted is collectively referred to as a light emitting means. You can also.

Further, in the modified example of the first game information display device, the configuration in which the cover member is covered with the covering member is exemplified, but the covering member provided on the game board may be used as the cover member. Further, the cover member may also be used as a covering member. A configuration that covers at least the front side of the display substrate (light emitting means) to protect the display substrate (light emitting means) is used as a cover means by pointing to both the covering member and the cover member or one of the covering member and the cover member. You can catch it.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is an example in which an identification means for assisting in the identification of the game state information displayed by the light emitting state of the LED is provided corresponding to the first game information display device and the second game information display device (display means). I explained, but it is not limited to this. For example, an information display unit that is compatible with or adjacent to the first game information display device or the second game information display device and that displays the above-mentioned unique display or spec display that is not directly related to the game state information may be provided. Further, the information display unit may be configured to cover the front side of the first game information display device and the second game information display device and the front side of the window. As described above, the identification means may be provided with an information display unit in place of or in addition to the mode of displaying the above-mentioned unique display, spec display, or the like.

Further, the identification means is not limited to being configured so that the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs can be identified individually or as a combination of the light emitting modes of two or more LEDs, and may be configured to assist the identification of the gaming state information. As the mode of identification, an information assisting mode in which a sign or the like is provided corresponding to the LED to make it easier to understand the meaning of the state of the LED, and a relationship between a first region that transmits light and a second region that is difficult to transmit light. As described above, a discrimination assisting mode in which the LED state is easily discriminated (easily visually recognized), or a combination thereof is included. In particular, the information assisting mode can be distinguished and referred to as an information assisting means, and the discriminating assisting mode can be distinguished and referred to as a discriminating assisting means.

Further, in the first game information display device and the second game information display device, the configuration arranged on the front side of the window is not limited to the above-mentioned identification means, for example, is arranged so as to cover the window and is arranged via the window. It may be a protective measure to prevent cheating. For example, in addition to the identification means, a protective means made of a transparent or other light-transmitting sheet is provided on the cover member, the covering member, or the identification means itself, or instead of the identification means, transparent or the like can transmit light. A protective means made of a simple sheet can be provided on the cover member or the covering member.

Further, the first game information display device and the second game information display device are connected to control means such as a main control board and an effect control board, and are individually or combined with a plurality of light emitters according to signals from the control means. Depending on the display mode, it can be said that information on the profit given to the player (special symbol, number of rounds of big hit game: game state information) is displayed. In the special symbol 1st display, the special symbol 2nd indicator, the normal symbol 1st indicator and the normal symbol 2nd indicator (display means), a plurality of light emitters turn on / off in a predetermined pattern during the symbol variation period. By repeatedly turning on / off the illuminant corresponding to the predetermined pattern among the plurality of illuminants immediately after the end of the symbol variation or at the timing after a predetermined period, the display by the individual illuminants or a plurality of illuminants can be displayed. It is possible to display a combination of light emitters and display these in a plurality of patterns.

In addition, the display mode directly or indirectly (the above-mentioned identification means, etc.) displayed on the covering member by printing, etc., and each special symbol, the number of reserved storages, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, etc. in the display (display means), etc. By changing both or one of the arrangement and / or control, the display (display means) may be commonly used by another model.

Further, the first game information display device and the second game information display device are installed in the front-rear area (glass side position) between the front surface of the game area of the game board (cel image position) and the height direction of the launch rail. As long as it can be seen through the glass arranged on the front of the game board, it can be in the game area (front and back area using the predetermined space of the winning opening or the decorative frame) or the game area forming part (game ball flows down). It can be installed on a member (which may be rail or resin) that forms a possible gaming area, or outside the gaming area (outside the outer rail). Similarly, a covering member may be installed at these positions. good.

Specifically, for example, the gaming machine of the embodiment is configured as one type of pachinko gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the above-described embodiment can be used for various types of pachinko gaming machines. Can be installed.

Further, as a display connected to the main control board that controls various lottery and reels in the spinning machine, a display having the same configuration as the display of the above-described embodiment is provided, and the display is used. , Information on the benefits given to the player in the game on the reel-type gaming machine may be displayed. The back surface of the display board on which the LED is surface-mounted on the front surface is attached to the housing of the spinning machine by welding, etc., so that it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or disassemble, leaving a trace. A cover member that covers the surface of the substrate may be provided. Then, the display may display information on the profit given to the player in the game on the spinning machine.

(Invention described in the present specification)
By the way, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-096067), when a reach state occurs during execution of variable display, a part or all of a predetermined music is output as a sound output unit. By outputting from, it is suggested whether or not the result of the variable display is a special result mode. However, in such a gaming machine, since the music output during the variable display is limited to one song, it is not possible to effectively raise the player's expectation for the occurrence of a special gaming state. There was a problem that the interest of the game was poor.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a special game of whether or not to generate a special game (big hit game) state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of the start condition. In a gaming machine that executes a determination (big hit lottery) and generates the special game state based on the result of the special game determination, a variable display of identification information (special symbol) for notifying the result of the special game determination is executed. The variable display executing means is provided with a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect (music notice effect) accompanied by output of one or a plurality of songs during the execution of the variable display, and the specific effect executing means is described as described above. The number of songs to be output during the execution of the specific effect is different depending on whether the expectation that the special gaming state is generated is low or high.

By doing so, it is possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player for the occurrence of a special game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-15251), a notice that the production mode is changed over a plurality of stages based on the determination result of whether or not a special gaming state occurs. The production mode was changed to a stage according to the degree of expectation that a special gaming state would occur. However, in such a gaming machine, the higher the expectation that a special gaming state will occur, the easier it is for the production mode of the advance notice effect to change until the final stage, but it effectively raises the player's expectation for the advance notice effect. Instead, there was the problem that the interest in pachinko was poor.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the identification information (special symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result of the variation display is the special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming (big hit game) state that is advantageous to the player in the aspect, it is determined whether or not to generate the special gaming state before the result of the variation display is derived. A predetermined means for notifying that the specific effect is executed by the means, the specific effect executing means for executing a predetermined specific effect (acquired challenge effect) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the specific effect executing means. The advance notice effect is provided with a notice effect execution means for executing the advance notice effect (step-up advance notice effect 1), and the predetermined advance notice effect is a advance notice effect that can change the effect mode over a plurality of stages, and the plurality of stages. Includes a first stage, a second stage following the first stage, and a final stage next to the second stage, and the advance notice effect executing means is the first stage. The effect of the second stage is executed for a longer time than the effect of the above and the effect of the final stage.

By doing so, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation for the advance notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-15251), the production mode is changed over a plurality of stages based on the determination result of whether or not a special gaming state occurs. The mode of the advance notice was changed to a stage according to the degree of expectation that a special gaming state would occur. However, in such a gaming machine, the final number of stages is the same even though there are multiple types of advance notice effects, so that the number of stages expected by the player is constant regardless of which advance notice effect is executed. Therefore, there was a problem that there was little interest in the preview production.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation display of the identification information (special symbol) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and the result of the variation display is the special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game (big hit game) state that is advantageous to the player in the aspect, a specific variation display is executed in which a specific effect (acquisition challenge effect) is performed after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variation display. A display execution means and a notice effect execution means for executing any one of a plurality of types of notice effects (step-up notice effects 1 to 3) for notifying that the specific effect will be executed during the specific variation display are provided. , The plurality of types of advance notice effects are advance notice effects in which the effect mode can be changed over a plurality of stages, and the first advance notice effect in which the final number of stages is set to the first number of stages (step-up advance notice effect 1). And the second advance notice effect (step-up advance notice effect 2 or 3) in which the final number of stages is set to the second number of stages larger than the first step number, any kind of the advance notice effect execution means. Even when the advance notice effect is executed up to the final number of stages, the advance notice effect is executed up to the final number of stages from the start of the specific variation display to the time when the specific effect is performed. There is.

By doing so, it is possible to effectively raise the player's expectation for the advance notice production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-208143), the effect display unit is used to notify the player of the number of stored reservations for the special game lottery. The number of pending items was displayed. However, in recent gaming machines, the effect accessory device has become large, and when it is movable, it covers the effect display unit and it becomes difficult to visually display the number of reserved items, or a specific effect image is displayed on the effect display unit. In some cases, the display of the number of holds may be erased, and in these cases, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of holds.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information and the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a start condition is satisfied are provided. After acquiring the start information by A variation effect is produced in the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70) based on the control information from the main control means (main control board 110) provided with the special game determination means for performing the above. In a gaming machine including a sub-control means (effect control board 130) for executing the above, the main control means uses the start information acquisition means when the start condition is satisfied but the determination condition is not satisfied. The first reserved storage means that stores the acquired start information up to a predetermined number as reserved storage and the number of the reserved storages stored in the first reserved storage means are transmitted to the sub-control means as reserved storage number information. The hold display device (special symbol hold first display 63, 64), the sub-control means further includes a second reserved storage means for storing the number of reserved storages indicated by the reserved storage number information transmitted by the reserved storage number information transmitting means. The hold display corresponding to the number of the hold storages stored in the second hold storage means is displayed on the second hold display device (special symbol hold second display 83, 84) and the image display device. ..

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information acquisition means for acquiring the start information and the start information acquisition means for acquiring the start information when the start condition is satisfied. After acquiring the start information by A main control means (main control board 110) including a special game determination means for performing the above, and a sub control means (effect control board 130) that executes a variation effect in the image display device based on control information from the main control means. When the start condition is satisfied but the determination condition is not satisfied, the main control means uses the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means as a hold storage and a predetermined number of the game machines. Further includes a first reserved storage means for storing up to, and a reserved storage number information transmitting means for transmitting the number of the reserved storages stored in the first reserved storage means to the sub-control means as the reserved storage number information. , The hold display corresponding to the number of the hold storages stored in the first hold storage means is displayed on the first hold display device (special symbol hold first display 63, 64), and the sub control means is used. The hold storage means further comprising a second hold storage means for storing the number of the hold storage indicated by the hold storage number information transmitted by the hold storage number information transmitting means, and the hold stored in the second hold storage means. The hold display corresponding to the number of memories is displayed on the second hold display device (special symbol hold second display 83, 84) and the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70), and the image display. The hold display displayed on the device includes a first mode (first hold icons H11 to H14, second hold icons H21 to H24) displayed by the hold icon and a second mode (hold number display area (hold number display area)) displayed numerically. The special game determination is included in the variation effect, including the hold number display (first hold number display, second hold number display) displayed in the first hold number display area SH1 and the second hold number display area SH2). It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests the determination result, and a specific suggestion effect (for example, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, blackout effect, movement effect of the movable effect member 73) predetermined in the variable effect is performed. In that case, when the specific suggestion effect is being performed, the hold display of the first aspect displayed on the image display device is turned off. I was trying to leave it.

By adopting these first configuration or the second configuration, it is possible to grasp the number of reserved items.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-208143), a variation display of an effect symbol for notifying a lottery result of a special game, a display of a holding number, and the like are displayed according to the progress of the game. Information (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined information regarding the progress of the game") was displayed, and the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game was displayed on the effect display unit in order to notify the player. However, in recent gaming machines, the effect device has become larger, and when it is movable, it covers the effect display unit, making it difficult to visually recognize predetermined information regarding the progress of the game, or a specific effect image is displayed on the effect display unit. In some cases, the display of predetermined information regarding the progress of the game may be erased, and in these cases, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a start information acquisition means for acquiring start information and the start information acquisition means for acquiring start information when a start condition is satisfied are provided. After acquiring the start information by, when the judgment condition is satisfied, a special game judgment (big hit lottery) is made as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the start information. A main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game including a special game determination means to be performed, and a sub control means (effect control board) for controlling the effect based on control information from the main control means. 130), the main control means causes the first game information display device (first game information display device 59) to display predetermined information regarding the progress of the game, and the sub control means displays the control information on the control information. Based on this, predetermined information regarding the progress of the game is displayed on the second game information display device (second game information display device 79) and the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70).
Further, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the luminance adjusting means (sub CPU 130a) for adjusting the luminance of the display device is further provided, and the luminance adjusting means adjusts the luminance of the image display device, but the first. 2 The brightness of the game information display device is not adjusted.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start condition is satisfied in the game machine in which the player plays a game by launching the game medium into the game area. A special game determination as to whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the start information acquisition means for acquiring the start information and the start information acquired by the start information acquisition means. A main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game provided with a special game determination means for performing (big hit lottery), and a sub control for controlling the effect based on control information from the main control means. The main control means includes means (effect control board 130), the main control means causes a first game information display device (first game information display device 59) to display predetermined information regarding the progress of the game, and the sub control means , The second game information display device (second game information display device 79) and the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70) display predetermined information regarding the progress of the game based on the control information. The second game information display device is provided in the game area so as to form a part of a passage path of the game medium.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information acquisition means for acquiring the start information and the start information acquisition means for acquiring the start information when the start condition is satisfied. Controls the progress of the game provided with the special game determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the start information acquired by The main control means (main control board 110) and the sub control means (effect control board 130) for controlling the effect based on the control information from the main control means are provided, and the main control means is a game. Predetermined information regarding the progress is displayed on the first game information display device (first game information display device 59), and the sub-control means displays predetermined information regarding the progress of the game based on the control information in the second game information. The second game information display device is displayed on the device (second game information display device 79) and the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70), and the second game information display device is compared with the first game information display device. It is provided in the vicinity of the image display device.

By adopting these first to third configurations, it is possible to grasp predetermined information regarding the progress of the game.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-208143), a variation display of an effect symbol for notifying a lottery result of a special game, a display of a holding number, and the like are displayed according to the progress of the game. Information (hereinafter referred to as "predetermined information regarding the progress of the game") was displayed, and the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game was displayed on the effect display unit in order to notify the player. By the way, when a power failure occurs in a conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-123507), when the power failure is subsequently restored, a power failure recovery screen indicating that the power is being restored from the power failure is displayed. It was displayed on the device (effect display unit). However, this power failure recovery screen usually only displays "Power failure recovery in progress". Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp predetermined information regarding the progress of the game during the recovery from the power failure.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the start information acquisition means for acquiring the start information when the start condition is satisfied and the start information by the start information acquisition means are used. After acquiring A main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game including the determination means, and a sub control means (effect control board 130) that controls the effect based on the control information from the main control means. Based on the detection that the power supplied to the game machine has reached a predetermined level value lower than the normal value in the game machine provided with, the control of the progress of the game when the predetermined level value is detected. When the game state storage means that stores information so that it can be held even when the power supply is not supplied, and when the game state storage means stores information related to control of the progress of the game when the game machine is started. , The game state recovery means for performing a recovery process for recovering to the game state when the predetermined level value is detected based on the stored information regarding the control of the progress of the game, and further, the main control means. , The predetermined information regarding the progress of the game is displayed on the first game information display device (first game information display device 59), and the sub-control means secondly displays the predetermined information regarding the progress of the game based on the control information. When the game information display device (second game information display device 79) and the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70) are displayed and the recovery process is performed by the game state recovery means, the game The display of the predetermined information regarding the progress of the second game information display device is displayed before the display of the image display device.

By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp predetermined information regarding the progress of the game.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine (for example, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-33792), after the special game, the gaming state shifts to the high-frequency support mode (time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In the special game or high frequency support mode, it is configured to aim at the right side of the game area by so-called right-handed, and in the special game or high-frequency support mode, right-handed to urge the right side of the game area on the display screen. It was displaying. However, in recent gaming machines, the effect accessory device has become large, and when it is movable, it covers the effect display unit and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the right-handed display, or when a specific effect image is displayed on the effect display device. May erase the right-handed display, and in these cases, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to grasp the right-handed display.

◆ As a configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, a normal game state (non-time saving game state) or an advantageous gaming state (time saving game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, In the game machine controlled to any of the game states (big hit game state), the effect is produced based on the control information from the main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and the control information from the main control means. It is provided with a sub-control means (effect control board 130) for controlling, a game area in which the game medium flows down, and a game medium launching means for launching the game medium into the game area according to the operation of the player. The game area is a first game area (left side game area) which is a region where the game medium should be launched when controlled to the normal game state, and the game when controlled to the advantageous game state. It has a second gaming area (right side gaming area), which is a region where the medium should be launched, and the main control means has the game toward the second gaming region when controlled to the advantageous gaming state. The display for notifying that the medium should be launched is displayed on the first display device (right-handed first display device 67), and the sub-control means is the second game when controlled to the advantageous gaming state. A display for notifying that the game medium should be launched toward the area is displayed on the second display device (right-handed second display 87) and the image display device (first image display device (main liquid crystal) 70). The display of the second display device is easier for the player to recognize than the display of the first display device, and the display of the image display device is more easily recognized by the player than the display of the second display device. It was designed to be displayed in an easy-to-recognize manner.

By doing so, it becomes possible to grasp the right-handed display.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-099682), a gaming machine provided with a special symbol display provided with a plurality of LEDs is known. In such a gaming machine, by making the lighting pattern of the LED of the special symbol display corresponding to each type of jackpot irregular, it is determined from the display contents of the special symbol display whether or not the jackpot has occurred. It has been proposed to make it difficult. However, conventionally, in the special symbol display, the LED is attached to the board by a through-hole mounting in which a terminal is inserted into a hole formed in the board and soldered. Therefore, it is possible to remove the LED from the board and reattach it to the board, which may be a target of fraudulent activity, which may impair the interest of the game.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200), a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (4202) that are arranged in front of the cover member (4202). 4045) is provided with an identification means (4220) capable of identifying the light emitting mode individually or as a combination of two or more LED (4045) light emitting modes, and the cover member (4202) comprises the cover member (4202). The window (4206) that penetrates back and forth and is formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is partitioned, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) can be distinguished for each window (4206). The identification means (4220) is provided on the front side of the window (4206), and has a window image area (4212) configured in the above, and is a first region capable of transmitting light or affecting the transmitted light. (4222, 5126, 5132) and a second region (4224, 4224,) which is provided around the first region (4222, 5126, 5132) and is less likely to transmit light than the first region (4222, 5126, 5132). 5128, 5134) and a combination region (4226, 4804) displayed in the second region (4224, 5128, 5134) and showing the light emission modes of the two or more LEDs (4045) as a combination, and the display. In the means (59), the display board (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display board (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or the display means (4202) is difficult to reassemble. 59) is characterized in that when the cover member (4202) and the display substrate (4200) are disassembled, a trace of removal remains on either of the cover member (4202) and the display substrate (4200).

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the cover member (4202) is the cover member (4202). The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is partitioned, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) can be distinguished for each window. The cover member (4202) is arranged behind the covering member (4800) that fills the front-rear region on the front side of the game board (5) of the game machine (1). , Attached to the covering member (4800), and on the front side of the cover member (4202), surround a first region (4222, 5126, 5132) arranged on the front side of the window (4206) to transmit light. A difficult second region (4224, 5128, 5134) is provided, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) can be identified via the first region (4222, 5126, 5132). The identification means (4220, 5120) are arranged, and in the display means (59), the display board (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), and the display board (4200) and the cover member (4202) are arranged. ) Is difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display board (4200). And.

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, and the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the cover member (4202) is the cover member (4202). The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is partitioned, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is distinguished for each window (4206). The display board (4200) has a window image area (4212) that is configured to be possible, and the front surface of the display board (4200) and the peripheral surface of the display board (4200) are covered members (4202). A protective member (4204) housed inside and covering the rear surface of the display board (4200) housed in the cover member (4202) is attached to the cover member (4202) or the display board (4200). In the display means (59), the display board (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display board (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or the display is displayed. It is characterized in that when the means (59) is disassembled, a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200).

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the cover member (4202) is the cover member (4202). The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is partitioned, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is distinguished for each window (4206). The cover member (4202) has the window image forming portion (4212) configured so as to be able to face the display substrate (4200) so that the window image forming portion (4212) faces the front surface of the display substrate (4200). The entire circumference of the LED (4045), which is combined with 4200) and mounted on the front surface of the display board (4200), is individually surrounded by the window image forming portion (4212), and the window is placed on the front surface of the cover member (4202). The identification means (4220, 5120), which is attached so as to cover (4206) and can identify the light emitting mode of the LED (4045) for each window (4206), is provided. The first layer (4230, 5130, 5136) that easily transmits light and the first layer (4230, 5130, 5136) are arranged on the front side of the area other than the window (4206) in the cover member (4202). The display means (59) has a second layer (4322, 5131, 5138) that is less likely to transmit light than the first layer (4230, 5130, 5136), and the display means (59) is the display substrate (4200). Is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display substrate (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or the cover member (4202) is disassembled when the display means (59) is disassembled. It is characterized in that it is configured so that a trace of removal remains on any of the display boards (4200).

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the cover member (4202) is the cover member (4202). The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is partitioned, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is distinguished for each window (4206). A covering member (4800) having a freely configured window image forming portion (4212) and interchangeably attached to the game board (5) of the game machine (1) to fill the front-rear area on the front side of the game board (5). ) Covers the front side of the cover member (4202) and is provided on the covering member (4800) located on the front side of the cover member (4202). The display means (59) has an identification means (4220, 5120) that can be identified as a combination of the light emitting modes of the LED (4045), and the display substrate (4200) is attached to the cover member (4202). Difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble the display board (4200) and the cover member (4202), or when the display means (59) is disassembled, the cover member (4202) and the display board (4200) It is characterized in that it is configured so that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the cover member (4202) is the cover member (4202). The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is partitioned, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is distinguished for each window (4206). The above-mentioned by the covering member (4800) which has the window image formation part (4212) which was made possible and is attached to the game board (5) of the game machine (1) and fills the front-rear area of the front side of the game board (5). Covering the front side of the cover member (4202), the covering member (4800) is located on the front side of the cover member (4202) and attached to the front surface of the covering member (4800), and emits light from the plurality of LEDs (4045). An identification means (4220, 5120) capable of identifying an aspect individually or as a combination of two or more light emitting modes of the LED (4045), provided on the front surface of the covering member (4800), and on the front surface of the covering member (4800). It has a protective portion (4808) that covers the peripheral surface of the attached identification means (4220, 5120), and the display means (59) has a display substrate (4200) from the cover member (4202). Difficult to remove, difficult to reassemble the display board (4200) and the cover member (4202), or when the display means (59) is disassembled, the cover member (4202) and the display board (4200) It is characterized in that it is configured so that a trace of removal remains in any of the above.

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the cover member (4202) is the cover member (4202). The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is partitioned, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is distinguished for each window (4206). By a covering member (4800) which has a window image forming portion (4212) which can be configured and is attached to the game board (5) of the game machine (1) to fill the front-rear area on the front side of the game board (5). A first identification unit (5122) provided on the front surface of the cover member (4202) and a second identification unit (5124) provided on the covering member (4800) are provided so as to cover the front side of the cover member (4202). The identification means (5120) is configured to allow the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs (4045) to be identified individually or as a combination of two or more light emitting modes of the LEDs (4045), and the display means (59) is configured. The display board (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display board (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or the display means (59) is disassembled. It is characterized in that it is configured so that a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200).

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the cover member (4202) is the cover member (4202). The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is partitioned, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is distinguished for each window (4206). It has a window image area (4212) that can be configured, and on the front surface of the cover member (4202), an identification formed according to the region shape in which the window (4206) opens on the front surface of the cover member (4202). Means (4220, 5120) are attached, and the identification means (4220, 5120) surrounds a first region (4222, 5126, 5132) arranged on the front side of the window (4206) to transmit light. A difficult second region (4224, 5128, 5134) is provided, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) can be identified via the first region (4222, 5126, 5132). In the display means (59), the display board (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display board (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or the display means (59) is said. It is characterized in that when the display means (59) is disassembled, a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200).

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200), a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the display board (4200) housed in the cover member (4202). A protective member (4204) that covers the rear surface is provided, and the cover member (4202) penetrates the cover member (4202) back and forth and has a window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045). The cover member (4202) and the cover member (4202) have a window image area (4212) that is partitioned and configured so that the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) can be distinguished for each window (4206). The protective member (4204) has an engaging portion (4214) provided on one of the cover member (4202) and the protective member (4204) on the other of the cover member (4202) and the protective member (4204). It is fitted and combined with the provided engaging receiving portion (4216), and when it is difficult to remove, reassemble, or disassemble, it can be removed from either the cover member (4202) or the protective member (4204). It is characterized by being configured so that a trace remains.

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a tenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, and the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the cover member (4202) is the cover member (4202). The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is partitioned, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is distinguished for each window (4206). The window image forming portion (4212) configured as possible and the window image forming portion (4212) so as to project rearward from the rear surface of the window image forming portion (4212) facing the front surface of the display board (4200). The display board (4200) can be aligned with the cover member (4202) by being integrally formed with the display board (4200) and fitted into the board hole (4400) formed in the display board (4200). The display means (59) includes an alignment portion (4600), and the display board (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), and the display board (4200) and the cover member (4202) are provided. ) Is difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display board (4200). And.

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200), a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the plurality of LEDs (4200) that are surface-mounted on the display board (4200). The cover member (4202) is provided with a current limiting means (4500) for controlling the current supplied to the 4045), and the cover member (4202) penetrates the cover member (4202) back and forth and corresponds to the LED (4045). The window (4206) formed is partitioned, and the window image area (4212) is configured so that the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) can be distinguished for each window (4206). However, in the display means (59), the display board (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), the display board (4200) and the cover member (4202) are difficult to reassemble, or It is characterized in that when the display means (59) is disassembled, a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200).

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control means (110) for controlling the progress of the game and the main control means (110) are connected to each other. , The number of reserved storage for the special symbol, the lottery corresponding to the special symbol, the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the normal symbol, the number of reserved storage for the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol, according to the signal from the main control means (110). A gaming machine including a display means (59) for displaying any one of them by an LED (4045), wherein the display means (59) is a display board on which a plurality of the LEDs (4045) are surface-mounted. (4200) and a cover member (4202) that covers the front surface of the display board (4200) on which the plurality of LEDs (4045) are mounted, and the cover member (4202) is the cover member (4202). The window (4206) formed corresponding to the LED (4045) is partitioned, and the state of the LED (4045) corresponding to the window (4206) is distinguished for each window (4206). The main control means (110) has a window imager (4212) configured as possible, and controls the current supplied to the plurality of LEDs (4045) surface-mounted on the display substrate (4200). The display means (59) has a current limiting means (4500, 4500) so that the display board (4200) is difficult to remove from the cover member (4202), and the display board (4200) and the display means. It is configured so that the cover member (4202) is difficult to reassemble, or when the display means (59) is disassembled, a trace of removal remains on either the cover member (4202) or the display substrate (4200). It is characterized by the fact that it was done.

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is the above-mentioned special game machine. The display unit includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game, and a display unit (first game information display device) capable of displaying a state related to the state of the game based on the determination. A display board (first display board) on which an LED for displaying the state is surface-mounted, and a cover member (first cover member) for accommodating the display board are provided, and the cover member is provided. An identification means (sheet) having a window image forming portion for defining a window that makes the LED visible, and provided so as to cover the front side of the window, and making it possible to identify the state of the LED corresponding to the window. ), The display substrate is configured to be housed in the cover member so as to be difficult to attach / detach from the cover member.

By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a game machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the game can be played. The first display unit (first game information display device) capable of displaying the status related to the status (variable display, hold display, right-handed display) and the status display separately from the first display unit. The first display unit includes a second display unit (second game information display device) capable of displaying the state, and the first display unit includes a first display board on which an LED for displaying the state is surface-mounted, and the first display unit. A first cover member for accommodating a display board is provided, and the first cover member has a window image forming portion for defining a window that makes the LED visible, and covers the front side of the window. The first display board is attached to the first cover member so as to be difficult to attach / detach from the first cover member. The second display unit includes a second display board on which an LED for displaying the state is mounted, and a second cover member provided on the front surface of the second display board. The first display unit and the second display unit are characterized in that the state display is performed in different modes (right-handed notation, lighting / blinking mode, and the number of LEDs are different).

By doing so, the player can grasp the information about the game.

Further, in a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-208143), when a gaming ball enters the starting area, a random number for drawing whether or not to win a special game is stored as a hold. When the preset start condition is satisfied, the hold is read out and a special game is drawn, and when the special game is won by the special game lottery, the special game is executed. Furthermore, based on the lottery result of the special game, the effect image composed of various moving images and still images is displayed on the effect display unit, and the effect device is moved to excite the player's game. Has become the mainstream. Further, in order to notify the player of the information about the game, the information about the game is displayed in the effect display unit. By the way, in recent gaming machines, the effect equipment device has become large, and when it is movable, it may cover the effect display unit and it may be difficult to visually recognize the information about the game. In these cases, the player can obtain the information about the game. There was a problem that it was difficult to grasp.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board) for controlling the progress of the game and control information from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (sub-control board) for controlling an effect based on the above, the main control means is based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied. The determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player, the variation display means for performing variation display in the variation display area based on the result of the determination, and the determination are not performed. A storage means for storing the determination information as a hold storage, a pre-determination means for predetermining whether or not to execute the special game, and a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold storages are displayed in a first hold display area (special symbol). The display result displayed in the variable display area includes a type of loss display result in which the special game is not executed, and the special game, which is provided with a first hold display means to be displayed on the hold first display). There are a plurality of types of special display results to be executed, and the sub-control means displays a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold displays displayed in the first hold display area in the second hold display area (special symbol hold display area). 2 display), a second hold display means for displaying in a third hold display area (first image display device) that is easier to see than the second hold display area, and based on the result of the preliminary determination. The hold changing means for changing the display mode of the hold display displayed by the second hold display means is provided, and the hold change means does not change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the second hold display area. However, the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area is changed.

By doing so, the player can grasp the information about the game.

-As a second configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the acquisition condition is obtained in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A storage means (main control board) that stores the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by the establishment of the above, and a determination means (main) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. The control board), the variation display means (main control board) that displays variations in the variation display area (special symbol first display) based on the result of the determination, and whether or not to execute the special game is determined in advance. The pre-determination means (main control board), the hold display means (main control board, effect control board) for displaying the hold display according to the number of hold storages in the hold display area, and the above-mentioned based on the result of the pre-determination. The hold display area includes a hold change means (effect control board) for changing the display mode of the hold display, and the hold display area includes a first hold display area (special symbol hold first display) and a second hold display area (special). It has a symbol hold second display) and a third hold display area (first image display device) in which the hold display is easier to see than the first hold display area and the second hold display area. The hold display means does not perform a specific display (display of the change icon) corresponding to the variation display in the second hold display area, but performs the specific display in the third hold display area and the hold change. The means does not change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the first hold display area and the second hold display area, but changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area. It is characterized by that.

By doing so, the player can grasp the information about the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a gaming ball is provided in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. The first start area (first start port) and the second start area (second start port) provided in the game area where the player can flow down, and the determination information acquired by entering the ball into the first start area (special figure). A storage means (main control board) that stores the determination information) as the first hold storage and stores the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by entering the second starting area as the second hold storage. And, a determination means (main control board) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a variation display in the first variation display area (special symbol first display) based on the result of the determination. The second fluctuation display is performed in the first fluctuation display means (main control board) and the second fluctuation display area (special symbol second display) so as to correspond to the fluctuation display in the first fluctuation display region. A display means (effect control board), a pre-determination means (main control board) that predetermines whether or not to execute the special game, and a hold display according to the number of hold storages are displayed in the hold display area. The second variable display area includes a display means (main control board, effect control board) and a hold change means (effect control board) that changes the display mode of the hold display based on the result of the preliminary determination. , The first variation display area (first special symbol second display) on which the first variation display corresponding to the first hold storage is performed, and the second variation display corresponding to the second hold storage. It has a second variation display display area (second special symbol second display) to be performed, and the first variation display in the first variation display display area and the second variation display display area. The second variable display can be distinguished, and the hold display area includes a first hold display area (special symbol hold first display), a second hold display area (special symbol hold second display), and the above. The hold display area has a first hold display area and a third hold display area (first image display device) in which the hold display is easier to see than the second hold display area, and the hold change means has the first hold display. The display mode of the hold display displayed in the area and the second hold display area is not changed, but the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area is changed.

By doing so, the player can grasp the information about the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a gaming ball is provided in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A memory for storing the start area (first start port, second start port) provided in the game area where the player can flow down and the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by entering the start area as a hold memory. A means (main control board), a determination means (main control board) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a first variation display area (special symbol 1) based on the result of the determination. The first fluctuation display means (main control board) that displays fluctuations on the display) and the second fluctuation display area (special symbol second display) that corresponds to the fluctuation display in the first fluctuation display area. A second variable display means (effect control board) for displaying, a pre-determination means (main control board) for preliminarily determining whether or not to execute the special game, and a hold display according to the number of hold memories are held. The holding display means (main control board, effect control board) to be displayed in the display area and the hold change means (effect control board) for changing the display mode of the hold display based on the result of the prior determination are provided. The mode (size, number of LEDs, shape) of the first variable display area (special symbol 1st display) and the 2nd variable display area (special symbol 2nd display) are different, and the reserved display area is The hold display area is more than the first hold display area (special symbol hold first display), the second hold display area (special symbol hold second display), the first hold display area, and the second hold display area. Has a third hold display area (first image display device) that is easy to see, and the hold change means displays the hold display displayed in the first hold display area and the second hold display area. The mode is not changed, but the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area is changed.

By doing so, the player can grasp the information about the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a gaming ball is provided in a gaming machine capable of performing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. A memory for storing the start area (first start port, second start port) provided in the game area where the player can flow down and the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired by entering the start area as a hold memory. A means (main control board), a determination means (main control board) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a first variation display area (special symbol 1) based on the result of the determination. The first variation display means (main control board) that displays the variation of the symbol on the display) and the second variation display area (special symbol second indicator) so as to correspond to the variation display in the first variation display area. The second variation display means (effect control board) that displays the variation of the symbol and the third variation display area (first image display device) that displays the variation of the symbol based on the result of the determination. The variable display means, the pre-determination means (main control board) for preliminarily determining whether or not to execute the special game, and the hold display means (main) for displaying the hold display according to the number of hold storages in the hold display area. A control board (effect control board) and a hold change means (effect control board) that changes the display mode of the hold display based on the result of the preliminary determination, and a specific effect (SP reach, etc.) in the variation effect. When is executed, the size of the symbol displayed in the second variable display area does not change, but the size of the symbol displayed in the third variable display area changes, and the reserved display area becomes. The hold display area is more than the first hold display area (special symbol hold first display), the second hold display area (special symbol hold second display), the first hold display area, and the second hold display area. Has a third hold display area (first image display device) that is easy to see, and the hold change means displays the hold display displayed in the first hold display area and the second hold display area. The mode is not changed, but the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area is changed.

By doing so, the player can grasp the information about the game.

◆ As an eighth configuration for solving the above problems, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board) for controlling the progress of the game and control information from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a sub-control means (sub-board) for controlling an effect based on the above, the main control means is acquired by entering a starting area provided in a gaming area where a game ball can flow down. A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information, and a first variable display area (special symbol first display) based on the result of the determination. A first variation display means for displaying variations in The first holding display means for displaying the holding display corresponding to the number of holding storages in the first holding display area (special symbol holding first display) is provided, and the starting area is the first flow of the gaming area. A first starting area (first starting port) where a game ball flowing down the area (left side area) can enter, and a second starting area (first starting port) where a game ball flowing down the second flowing area (right side area) of the game area can enter. A second variation display means having two start areas (second start port), and the sub control means performing variation display in the second variation display area (special symbol second display) based on the result of the determination. And, the hold display corresponding to the number of the hold displays displayed in the first hold display area is visually recognized from the second hold display area (special symbol hold second display) and the second hold display area. The second hold display means to be displayed in the easy third hold display area (image display device) and the hold to change the display mode of the hold display displayed by the second hold display means based on the result of the preliminary determination. The second variation display area is provided with a change means, and the second variation display area is a first variation display display area (first special symbol second display) on which the first variation display is performed based on the entry into the first start area. And a second variation display display area (second special symbol second display) on which the second variation display is performed based on the entry into the second start region, and the second variation display display. The area is arranged closer to the second flow area than the first flow area, and the hold change means does not change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the second hold display area, but the third. The display mode of the hold display displayed in the hold display area is changed.

Further, in a gaming machine provided with a main control means (main control board) for controlling the progress of a game and a sub control means (sub control board) for controlling an effect based on control information from the main control means. Whether or not the main control means executes a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired by entering the starting area provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down. The determination means for determining the above, the first variation display means for displaying the variation in the first variation display area (special symbol first display) based on the result of the determination, and the determination information for which the determination has not been made are reserved. A storage means for storing as a memory, a pre-determination means for predetermining whether or not to execute the special game, and a hold display corresponding to the number of the hold storages are displayed in a first hold display area (special symbol hold first display device). ) Is provided, and the start area is a first start area (first start port) into which a game ball flowing down the first flow area (left side area) of the game area can enter. ), And a second starting region (second starting port) into which a game ball flowing down the second flowing region (right region) of the gaming region can enter, and the sub-control means has the determination. Based on the result, the second variation display means for displaying the variation in the second variation display area (special symbol second display) and the hold display corresponding to the number of the hold displays displayed in the first hold display area are displayed. 2 Hold display area (special symbol hold second display), second hold display means for displaying in a third hold display area (image display device) that is easier to see than the second hold display area, and the advance. The second variable display area includes a hold change means that changes the display mode of the hold display displayed by the second hold display means based on the result of the determination, and the second variable display area enters the first start area. The first variation display area (first special symbol second display) on which the first variation display is performed based on the above, and the second variation display on which the second variation display is performed based on the entry into the second starting area. The second variable display display area has a display area (second special symbol second display), and the second variable display display area is arranged closer to the second flow down area than the first variable display display area. The hold change means does not change the display mode of the hold display displayed in the second hold display area, but changes the display mode of the hold display displayed in the third hold display area.

By doing so, the player can grasp the information about the game.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a rotating cylinder type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used for a Jiyan ball game machine and an arrange ball game machine.

It should also be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Game machine 5 Game board 43 General winning opening 43a General winning opening detection switch 44 Normal gate 44a Gate detection switch 45 1st starting port 45a 1st starting port detection switch 47 2nd starting port 47a 2nd starting port detection switch 50 Large Winning opening 50a Large winning opening detection switch 70 1st image display device (main liquid crystal)
71 Second image display device (sub liquid crystal)
110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110b main ROM
110c main RAM
120 Payout control board 130 Production control board 130a Sub CPU
130b sub ROM
130c sub RAM

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of performing a special game that is advantageous to the player
A starting area provided in the game area where the game ball can flow down, and
A storage means for storing the determination information acquired by entering the starting area as a hold storage, and a storage means.
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information,
A display means for displaying the hold information according to the number of hold storages is provided.
The display means is
A first display means having a first hold display area and
A second display means having a second hold display area,
A third display means having a first hold display area and a third hold display area in which the hold information is easier to see than the second hold display area.
When the power to the gaming machine is cut off, the holding information is not displayed in any of the holding display areas, and then when the power to the gaming machine is restored, the holding display area is said to be. Resume the display of pending information and
In resuming the display of the reserved information, the timing for resuming the display of the reserved information in the first reserved display area and the timing for resuming the display of the reserved information in the first reserved display area and the second reserved display area rather than the restart timing of the display of the reserved information in the third reserved display area. The timing for resuming the display of the pending information in
The third display means is
When the power supply to the gaming machine is restored, the image related to the restoration is displayed, and then the display of the holding information in the third holding display area can be resumed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images